Home

RH850 Build - Renesas Electronics

1. R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 476 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 6 4 Relationship with pragma directives The behavior of the following options varies depending on the relationship with pragma directives When the Xep callee or Xep option is not specified If the following attribute strings are specified at the same time in a pragma section an error will occur edata edata23 tdata tdata4 tdata5 tdata7 tdata8 sdata sdata23 ep_auto ep_disp4 ep_disp5 ep_disp7 ep_disp8 ep_disp16 ep_disp23 gp_disp16 gp_disp23 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 477 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Symbols Assemble option 420 Compile option 399 A Active project 66 Add a build mode 68 Adding a file 14 Add Excluding File dialog box 309 Add Existing File dialog box 299 Add File dialog box 260 Add Folder and File dialog box 262 Add Overlay dialog box 280 Add Section dialog box 280 ALIGNED_SECTION Link option 455 Assemble list file 83 Assemble list 84 Command line information 85 Section list 85 Structure of the assemble list 83 B Batch build 73 77 Batch Build dialog box 291 Binary Link option 427 Browse For Folder dialog box 303 Build 73 75 Build mode 68 69 Build Mode Settings dialog box 289 Build tool versio
2. No 2tENESAS Outputs various data records according to each address Page 202 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Unify record size Motorola S record file APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to output a specified data record regardless of the address range This corresponds to the RECord option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Motorola S record file FOrm Stype in the Hex file format property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes S1 record REcord S1 Outputs the S1 record Yes S2 record REcord S2 Outputs the S2 record Yes S3 record REcord S3 Outputs the S3 record No Outputs various data records according to each address Fill unused areas in the output ranges with the value Select whether to fill the vacant area of the output range with data This corresponds to the SPace option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when a file is specified in the Division output file property in the Output File category Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Random SPace Random Fills the vacant area with random numbers Yes Specification value SPace lt Numerical value gt Fills the vacant area with the specified hexadecimal value No Does not fills the vacan
3. R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 284 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is being edited on the Editor panel Remark The target file name is displayed on the title bar Figure A 35 Save Settings Dialog Box main c Save Settings Encode Western European Windows Newline code Windows CR LF 3 C Reload the file with these settings Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select file name Save Settings from the File menu Description of each area 1 Encode Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items of the drop down list are displayed according to the following sequence Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed Current encoding of the file default Default encoding of the current OS Most recently used encodings maximum 4 Popular encodings for current locale e g for United States locale it will be Western European Windows Unicode UTF 8 All other encodings supported by the OS in alphabetical order 2 Newline code Select the newline code to be set from the drop down list
4. How to change Changes not allowed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 148 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Using compiler package Select the version of the compiler package to be used version This setting is common to all the build modes Default Always latest version which was installed How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Always latest version Uses the latest version in the installed compiler which was installed packages Versions of the installed Uses the selected version in the compiler compiler packages package Latest compiler package The version of the compiler package to be used when Always latest version which was version which was installed is selected in the Using compiler package version property is displayed installed This setting is common to all the build modes This property is displayed only when Always latest version which was installed in the Using compiler package version property is selected Default Latest version of the installed compiler packages How to change Changes not allowed 13 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Memo Add memos to the build tool Add one item in one line This setting is common to all the build modes The specified memo is displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of it
5. Default ProjectName mot How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 200 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Division output file Specify the division output files Specify in the format of file name start address end address start address end address The start address and end address of the output range or file name section name section name The name of the output section with one entry per line If multiple section names are specified delimit them with a colon as in file name section name section name example file1 mot sec1 sec2 Specify the address in hexadecimal example file2 mot 400 4ff If the extension is omitted it is automatically added according to the selection in the Hex file format property in the Hex Format category When Intel HEX file FOrm Hexadecimal is selected hex When Motorola S record file FOrm Stype is selected mot When Binary file FOrm Binary is selected bin The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolP
6. Add New Category Adds a category node directly below the File node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Set selected project as Active Project Sets the selected project to the active project Save Project and Development Tools as Package Saves a set of this product and the project by copying them in a folder It is also possible to pack and save the project only Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected project Property Build active project Displays the selected project s property on the Property panel 2 When the Subproject node is selected Runs a build of the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Runs a rebuild of the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Page 124 of 485 2tENESAS CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Clean active project Runs a clean of the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Folder with Explor
7. Default signed int None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction signed int None The enumeration type is handled as int type auto Xenum_type auto Handles each enumerated type as the smallest integer type capable of expressing all the enumerators in that type R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 161 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Handle external variables as if they are volatile qualified Select whether to handle all external variables as if they were volatile declared This corresponds to the Xvolatile option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xvolatile Handles all external variables as if they were volatile declared No Handles only the volatile qualified variables as they were volatile declared Check C program compatibility 6 Character Encoding Select whether to check the compatibility of a C program This corresponds to the Xcheck option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes for SuperH RISC engine C C compiler Xcheck shc Checks the compatibility with the SuperH family C C compiler No Does not check the compatibility with existing programs The detailed information on character encoding is disp
8. Output panel Add File dialog box This panel is used to display the message that is output from the build tool This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Path Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to edit or add the path or file name including the path System Include Path Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer the system include paths specified for the compiler and set their specified sequence Specify Rule Number dialog box This dialog box is used to select the number of the MISRA C 2004 rule and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Section Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add modify or delete sections Add Section dialog box Modify Section dialog box Add Overlay dialog box These dialog boxes are used to set a section name when adding modifying or overlaying a section respectively Section Address dialog box This dialog box is used to set an address when adding or modifying a section Unassigned Section dialog box This dialog box is used to delete sections Save Settings dialog box
9. Perform inline expansion Selsect whether to perform inline expansion of functions strcpy stremp mMemcpy of strcpy stremp and memset calls with regarding the alignment conditions of the array including character memcpy memset strings and the structure as 4 bytes This improves the execution speed of the program to be generated but it increases the code size This corresponds to the Xinline_strcpy option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when No in the Structure packing property in the Output Code category from the Compile Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xinline_strcpy Performs inline expansion of functions strcpy stremp memcpy and memset calls Does not perform inline expansion of functions strcpy stremp memcpy and memset calls Merge string literals When the same string literals exist in the source file specify whether to merge them and allocate to the one area This corresponds to the Xmerge_string option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xmerge_string Merges the same string literals exist in the source file and allocates to the one area No Each allocates the same string literals exist in the source file to separate
10. Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the create library options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the create library options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 216 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Settings tab This tab shows the detailed information on each C source file assembly source file object file and library file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Build Figure A 10 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting C Source File Property c main c Property E Build Set as build target Set individual compile option File type Set as build target Selects whether to build this file File Information Property asm system asm Property E Build Set as build target Yes Set individual assemble option No File type Assembly source file Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Property obj object obj Property E Build Set as build target Yes File type Object file Set as build target Selects whether to build this file e Information R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Pag
11. CPu type addressi1 address2 type addressl address2 Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option checks the consistency of the address to which the section is allocated An error will be output if the section allocation address for memory type type does not fit in the specified address range The items that can be specified as type are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified ROm Allocates the section to a ROM area RAm Allocates the section to a RAM area FIX Allocates the section to a fixed address area e g I O area If the address range overlaps with ROM or RAM the setting for FIX is valid Specify the start address and end address of the address range to check for consistency in hexadecimal as address and adadress2 This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Check section larger than specified range of address Address range of memory type in the Verify category Example of use The result is normal when section text and section bss are respectively allocated within the ranges from 0x100 to Ox1FF and from 0x200 to Ox2FF If they are not allocated within the ranges an error will be output gt rlink a obj b obj start text 100 bss 200 cpu ROM 100 1FF RAM 200 2FF Remark If the form object relocate liorary option or strip option is specified this option will be inv
12. Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box and runs builds of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the builds is displayed on the Output panel After the builds are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Rebuild Closes this dialog box and runs rebuilds of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the rebuilds is displayed on the Output panel After the rebuilds are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Closes this dialog box and deletes the files which are built in the respective build modes set for the selected projects The execution result of the cleans is displayed on the Output panel After the cleans are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 292 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to show how the process has been progressed when the time consuming process is taken
13. How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65535 items can be specified 10 Message The detailed information on messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 193 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Enable information Select whether to enable the output of information messages message output This corresponds to the Message and NOMessage options of the rlink command Default No NOMessage How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs information messages Message No Suppresses the output of information messages NOMessage Suppress number of Specify the number of the information message of which output is to be suppressed information message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also a range of message numbers can be specified using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the NOMessage option of the rlink command This property is displayed when No NOMessage in the Enable information message output property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialo
14. STRip This option deletes debug information in the load module file or library file CHange_message This option changes the type of information warning and error messages Hide This option deletes local symbol name information from the output file Total_size This option displays the total size of sections after the linking to the standard error output LOgo This option outputs the copyright notice NOLOgo This option suppresses the output of the copyright notice END This option executes option strings specified before this option EXIit R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 This option specifies the end of option specifications 2tENESAS Page 422 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE The input control options are as follows Input LIBrary Binary DEFine ENTry Input This option specifies the input file Specification format Input file module module 1 1 A file module module Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option specifies input file file If multiple files are specified delimit them with a comma or space Wildcard characters can also be used The character strings specified with wildcard characters are expanded in alphabetical order Expansion of numerical values precedes that of alphabetic characters Uppercase characters are
15. Specification format Xreg_mode mode Interpretation when omitted The 32 register mode object file is generated Detailed description This option generates the object file for the specified register mode This option limits the number of registers used by ccrh to 32 the 32 register mode or 22 the 22 register mode or register mode common and embeds the magic number into the object file Use register mode common to generate the object file that does not depend on register modes The items that can be specified as mode are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Register Mode mode Working Registers Registers for Register Variables common r10 to r14 r25 to r29 22 r10 to r14 r25 to r29 32 r10 to r19 r20 to r29 An error will occur if mode is omitted An abort error will occur if the register that cannot be used for the assembly source file The same register mode must be specified for all source files The different register mode cannot be specified for each source file If there are object files with different register modes an error will occur during linking By specifying this option the register mode of the software register bank function can be changed Example of use To generate the 22 register mode object file describe as gt asrh Xreg_mode 22 Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 414 of 485 Apr 01 2013 C
16. This option specifies link options Specification format Xlk_option arg Interpretation when omitted The ccrh driver interprets all specified options Detailed description This option passes arg to the linker as the link option Use this option to pass a file to the linker containing an identifier that the ccrh driver does not recognize as input to the linker An error will occur if arg is a non existent link option An error will occur if arg is omitted Example of use To pass the form relocate option to the linker describe as gt ccrh X1k_option form relocate Xcommon v850e3v5 main c The example above has the same meaning as the following gt ccrh c Xcommon v850e3v5 main c gt rlink form relocate main obj R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 398 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Subcommand file specification The subcommand file specification option is as follows This option specifies a subcommand file Specification format file Interpretation when omitted Only the options and file names specified on the command line are recognized Detailed description This option handles file as a subcommand file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted See B 4 2 Subcommand file usage for details about a subcommand file Example of use To handle
17. This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_path in the Output assembly source file property in the Output File category is selected or when Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xpass_ source Outputs a C source program as a comment to the assembly source file No Does not output a C source program as a comment to the assembly source file Output code of switch statement R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Select the code output mode for switch statements in programs This correspond s to the Xswitch option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Auto None The ccrh selects the optimum output format if else Xswitch ifelse Outputs the switch statements in the same format as the if else statement along a string of case statements in programs Select this item if the case statements are written in the order of frequency or if only a few labels are used Because the case statements are compared starting from the top unnecessary comparison can be reduced and the execution speed can be increased if the case statement that most often matches is written first
18. Xignore_files_misra Xcheck_language_extention Xansi This option processes as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard Specification format Interpretation when omitted Compatibility with the conventional C language specifications is conferred and processing continues after warning is output Detailed description This option processes as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standardNote and outputs an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard When this option is specified macro name __STDC__ is defined as the macro that the value is 1 Processing when compiling in strict adherence to the language specification is as follows Bit fields An error will occur if a type other than an int type is specified in a bit field If this option is not specified specifying a type other than an int type will be enabled A warning will not be output line number An error will occur If this option is not specified line number will be handled in the same way as line line number Argument of function for which pragma inline is specified If the type of the return value or parameter is different but type conversion is possible between the specified function call and definition an error will occur If this option is not specified the type of the return value is converted to the type at the call side the parameters are converted to the type of the funct
19. section E in this example is allocated after the last of the sections enclosed by Remark If the form object relocate liorary option or strip option is specified this option will be invalid cannot be nested One or more colons must be described within If is not described cannot be described If is described cannot be described outside of R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 453 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE FSymbol This option outputs external defined symbols to the symbol address file Specification format FSymbol section section Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option outputs the external defined symbols in section section to a file symbol address file in the form of assembler directives The file name is output file name fsy This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Section that includes startup function Section that outputs external defined symbols to the file in the Section category Example of use To output the external defined symbols in sections sct2 and sct3 to symbol address file test fsy describe as gt rlink a obj b obj fsymbol sct2 stc3 output test abs The output example of symbol address file test fsy is shown below RENESAS OPTIMIZING LINKER GENERATED FILE xx
20. 10 MISRA C 2004 Rule Check The detailed information on the MISRA C 2004 rule check are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 235 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Apply rule APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select the MISRA C 2004 rules to be applied This corresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Apply all rules Xmisra2004 all Checks the source code against all of the rules which are supported Apply specified rule number Xmisra2004 apply Checks the source code against the rules with the specified numbers among the rules which are supported Ignore specified rule number Xmisra2004 ignore Checks the source code against the rules that do not match the specified numbers among the rules which are supported Apply rules that are classified as required Xmisra2004 required Checks the source code against the rules of the required type Apply rules that are classified as required and specified rule number Xmisra2004 required_add Checks the source code against the rules of the required type and the rules with the specified numbers among the rules which are supported Ignore specified rule number from rules that are classified as required Xmisra2004 required_remov e C
21. Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build wi k Options He jut Options Start build all Wedmesday February 20 2013 12 48 50 PM Start build sample DefaultBuild gt sre main c Renesas Optimizing Linker Completed Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 rROFI Ft r Fa All Messages Rapid Build i Build Tool la s Fe F w EDISCONNECT The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Select Windows start gt gt All programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite Remark In Windows 8 double click on CubeSuite on the start screen R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 112 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Menu bar The menus used in build process are displayed a Project The Project menu shows menu items to operate the project and others Add New Subproject Closes the current project and opens the Create Project dialog box to create a new project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Open Project Closes the current project and opens the Open Project dialog box to open the existing project If the currently open project or file h
22. Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 318 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Export File dialog box This dialog box is used to output the information of the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 52 Select Export File Dialog Box Select Export File 4 Save in sample 2 My Recent Documents B DefaultBuild My Documents 39 My Computer Gemme x 4 hteo i Link order specification file mtls Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Link Order dialog box click the Export button In the Section Settings dialog box click the Export button Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder to store the file to output the information of the area that this dialog box is called from The project folder is selected when the file is selected for the first time The previously selected folder is selected after the second time 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Save in area and Save as type area R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 319 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Specify the name of the output file 4
23. Character encoding Select the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the source file This corresponds to the Xcharacter_set option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Auto None Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS SJIS Xcharacter_set sjis Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS EUC Xcharacter_set euc_jp Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as EUC UFT 8 Xcharacter_set utf8 Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as UFT 8 Big5 Xcharacter_set big5 Interprets the Chinese character code in the source file as Traditional Chinese GB2312 Interprets the Chinese character code in Xcharacter_set gb231 2 the source file as Simplified Chinese No process Does not interpret the Japanese Chinese Xcharacter_set none character code in the source file 7 Output Code The detailed information on output codes is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 229 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Output comment to assembly source file APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to output a C source program as a comment to the assembly source file to be output This corresponds to the Xpass_source option of the ccrh command
24. Click on the toolbar 2 When running a build of the active project Select the project and then select Build active project from the context menu Figure 2 108 Build active project Item a E sample Project Be Ror 7o103s2Ar kL E Buld sample A CC RH Build Tool Rebuild sample a RH850 E1 LPD 0 CM clean sample Ce Program Analyzer 4 Ei File BE Open Folder with Explorer L sub Subproject E Windows Explorer Menu Add gt Pes FE Save Project and Development Tools as Package G afe Rename F2 A Property Remark _ If the build of the included source file is not run after editing the header file and running the build update the file dependencies see 2 3 6 Update file dependencies 2 12 2 Runa build of all files A build of all build target files is run hereafter referred to as rebuild The cross reference file is deleted Running a rebuild is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 11 5 Change the build target project 1 When running a rebuild of the entire project Click on the toolbar 2 When running a rebuild of the active project Select the project and then select Rebuild active project from the context menu R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 75 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 109 Rebuild active project Item t Rebuild sample i RH850 E
25. Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the assemble option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the assemble options group Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 251 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on each file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File Information 2 Notes Figure A 16 Property Panel File Information Tab Property cj main c Property amp File Information Save with absolute path writable Notes File name T
26. Program Options Displays the program name and command line options in the output message Format of build option list Specify the display format of the build option list see 2 11 4 Display a list of build options This applies to the options of the build tool to be used and commands added by plugins It does not apply to the options of commands specified in the Commands executed before build processing or Commands executed after build processing property The following placeholders are supported Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution Program Replaces with the program name under execution TargetFiles Replaces with the file name being compile assemble or making link If this is blank TargetFiles Program Options will be set automatically Default TargetFiles Program Options How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 256 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 150 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before build processing before build processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the act
27. Select items Enable All Disable All Help Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Compile Options tab Rule number Exclusion rule number Check rule number besides required rule Exclusion rule number from required rule in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category From the Individual Compile Options tab Rule number Exclusion rule number Check rule number besides required rule Exclusion rule number from required rule in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category Description of each area 1 Select items The list of the MISRA C 2004 rule numbers which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed ascending order Select the check boxes to set the rule number Remark Inthe area that this dialog box is called from if a rule number is already set the check box for that rule number will be selected by default R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 275 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function OK Closes this dialog box and sets the selected rule number to the area that this dialog box is called from Cancel Cancels the rule number selecting and closes the dialog box E
28. The library file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Using libraries number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button gt Edit by the Specify Using Library File dialog box which appears when clicking the Browse button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified System libraries The system library files are displayed This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command The system library file name is displayed as the subproperty Default System libraries number of defined items How to change Changes not allowed Use standard libraries Select whether to use the standard libraries provided by the compiler This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the standard libraries No Does not use the standard libraries Use Standard Library Select whether to use the standard library functions function This property is changed to Yes LIBrary libc when Yes in the Use Mathematical Library Double precision function or Use Mathematical Library Single precision function property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only wh
29. This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is editing on the Editor panel Link Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer files to be input to the linker and configure these link orders Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to do build rebuild and clean process in batch with the build mode that the project has Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to show how the process has been progressed Option dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment 2tENESAS Page 110 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description Add Existing File dialog box This dialog box is used to select existing files to add to the project Import Build Options dialog box This dialog box is used to select the target project file for importing the build options Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select the folder and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Specify Far Jump File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the Far Jump file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Specify MISRA C 2004 Rule File dialog box This dialog bo
30. 00000000 ld w data r12 00000000 440E0000 0x0 gp r1 00000004 21670100 ox0 r1 r12 00000008 00000000 dseg data 00000000 00000000 dw 0 00000004 Description Location counter value The location counter value for the beginning of the code generated for the source program of the corresponding line is output Code The code machine language instruction or data generated for the source program of the corresponding line is output Each byte is expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number Line number The number of the line is output This is expressed in a decimal number Source program The source program of the line is output If instruction expansion is performed for the instruction at that line the disassembly of the array of machine language instructions generated after the instruction expansion is displayed after Compiler information lines 1 to 4 is output only when an assembly source file output from the compiler is assembled R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 84 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 1 3 Section list The type size and name of the section is output The output example of the section list is shown below Section List 2 Size 8 00000008 text 4 00000004 data Description 1 Section type The type of the section is output as the relocation attribute 2 Section size The size of the section is
31. 55 Set hex output options 50 Set link options 39 SHow Link option 450 Simultaneous build 78 SPace Link option 440 Specify Far Jump File dialog box 305 Specify MISRA C 2004 Rule File dialog box 307 Specify Rule Number dialog box 275 Specify Using Library File dialog box 311 STACk Link option 459 STARt Link option 452 STRip Link option 467 SUbcommand Link option 457 System Include Path Order dialog box 273 T Tag jump 258 Text Edit dialog box 266 Total_size Link option 471 U U Assemble option 411 U Compile option 348 Unassigned Section dialog box 283 V V Assemble option 402 V Compile option 334 X Xalias Compile option 373 Xansi Compile option 354 Xasm_far_jump Assemble option 417 Xasm_option Compile option 397 Xasm_path Compile option 339 340 Xbit_order Compile option 378 Xcall_jump Compile option 385 Xcharacter_set Assemble option 413 Xcharacter_set Compile option 364 Xcheck Compile option 358 Xcheck_div_ov Compile option 389 Xcheck_language_extention Compile option 363 Xcommon Assemble option 408 Xcommon Compile option 342 Xcpu Compile option 343 409 Xcref Compile option 394 Xdiv Compile option 388 Xenum_type Compile option 356 Xep Assemble option 416
32. CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Project tree area This area displays the project components in tree view with the following given nodes Node Description Project name Project hereafter referred to as Project node The project name Build tool name Build tool hereafter referred to as Build tool node The build tool CC RH used in the project File hereafter referred to as File node Files that are added to the project are displayed directly below this node Build tool generated files hereafter referred to as Build tool generated files node The following files generated by the build tool appear directly below the node generated during the build For other than library projects Load module file abs Intel Hex file hex Motorola S record file mot Binary file bin Link map file map Library file lib Library list file lbp Stack information file sni Error message file err For library projects Library file lib Library list file lbp Error message file err Files displayed below this node cannot be renamed deleted or moved This node is always generated below the File node This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after building Category name hereafter referred to as category node Categories that the user creates to categorize files see 2 3 4 Classify a f
33. List 6 Message 7 Others Caution This tab is displayed for the library project Figure A 9 Property Panel Create Library Options Tab Property A CC RH Property E Debug Information Delete local symbol name information No E Input File Object file Object file 0 E Output File Output file format User libraries FOrm Library U Output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectName lib E Library Using libraries Using libraries 0 System libraries System libraries 0 Use standard libraries No List Message Others Delete local symbol name information Select whether to delete local symbol name information This option corresponds to the Hide option of the rink command V Common Options Comple Options R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 205 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output debug Select whether to output debug information information This corresponds to the DEBug and NODEBug options of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Relocatable file FOrm Relocate in the Output file format property in the Output File category Default Yes Output to the output file DEBug How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Output to the O
34. Notes Select whether to enable writing to the file This property is not displayed if the Property panel being displayed while a dependency file is selected on the project tree Default Yes when the file is write enabled No when the file is not write enabled How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Enables the file to write No Does not enable the file to write The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed if the Property panel being displayed while a dependency file is selected on the project tree R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Add memos to the file Add one item in one line The specified memo is displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 2tENESAS Page 253 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Category Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on the category node the category that the user added Files node and Build tool generated files node categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Category Information 2 Notes
35. ProjectName is a placeholder It is replaced with the project name The method to change these file names is shown below 1 When changing the load module file name and non ROMized load module file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to in the Output file name property in the Output File category Figure 2 16 Output file name Property E Output File Qutp OOE RuildhiadeN ame Output file name test abs This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 24 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark You can also change the option in the same way with the Output file name property in the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab 2 When changing the hex file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel Enter the hex file name to be changed to in the Output file name property in the Output File category Figure 2 17 Output file name Property E Output File Output hex file Yes BuildModel ame Output file name test mot Division output file This property su
36. Rule check exclusion file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category From the Individual Compile Options tab Rule check exclusion file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category Example of use Not to check sample c against the MISRA C 2004 rules describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 362 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xcheck_language_extention This option enables the source code checking of the MISRA C 2004 rules which are partially suppressed by the extended language specifications Specification format Xcheck_language_extension Interpretation when omitted The source code checking of the MISRA C 2004 rules is disabled which are partially suppressed by the extended language specifications Detailed description This option enables the source code checks of the MISRA C 2004 rules in the following cases where they are suppressed by the unique language specifications extended from the C language standard When the function has no prototype declaration rule 8 1 and pragma interrupt is specified for it This option is valid only when the Xmisra2004 option is specified If the Xmisra2004 option is not specified this option will be ignored A warning will not be output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output message of the enhanced key word and extended specification
37. Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes g Generates the debug information No Does not generate the debug information R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 221 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Optimization The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Level of optimization Select the level of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the O option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Default Performs optimization that debugging is not Optimization None affected optimization of expressions and register allocation and the like Code Size Performs optimization with the object size Precedence Osize precedence Regards reducing the ROM RAM capacity as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Speed Precedence Performs optimization with the execution speed Ospeed precedence Regards shortening the execution speed as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Debug Precedence Performs optimization with the debug precedence Onothing Regards debugging as important and suppresses all optimization including default optimization 3 Optimization Details The detailed informat
38. Xfloat This option controls generating floating point calculation instructions Specification format Xfloat type Interpretation when omitted If the Xcpu g3m option is specified and the Xcpu option is not specified floating point calculation instructions are generated If the Xcpu g3k option is specified runtime function call instructions are generated Detailed description This option controls generating floating point calculation instructions The items that can be specified as type are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Generates runtime library call instructions for floating point calculations Additionally the FPU math support library will not be linked Generates floating point calculation instructions of FPU floating point unit for floating point calculations Additionally the FPU math support library will be linked An error will occur if type is omitted If this option is specified together with the Xcpu g3k option this option will be invalid and runtime function call instructions will always be generated This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Floating point calculating type in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Floating point calculating type in the Output Code category Example of use To generate the jarl32 and jr32 instructions for function
39. place This dialog box automatically closes when the process in progress is done Figure A 39 Progress Status Dialog Box Progress Status o Loading project 1 J 2 LLL Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open This dialog box automatically opens when a message is output while the time consuming process is in progress Description of each area 1 Message display area This area displays messages output while process is in progress edit not allowed 2 Progress bar The progress bar shows the current progress of the process in progress with the bar length When the process is 100 done the bar gets to the right end this dialog box automatically closed Function buttons Cancel Cancels the process in progress and closes this dialog box Note that this button will be disabled if the process termination is impossible R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 293 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment All settings made via this dialog box are saved as preferences for the current user Figure A 40 Option Dialog Box TT BOY Genera R 1 3 Startup and Exit General E Display G Extemal Text Editor G Font and Color G Extemal Tools G Build
40. 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Select whether to use the mathematical library double precision functions This property is changed to No when No in the Use standard libraries property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default Yes LIBrary libm How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libm Uses the mathematical library double precision functions No Does not use the mathematical library double precision functions Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Select whether to use the mathematical library single precision functions This property is changed to No when No in the Use standard libraries property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default Yes LIBrary libmf How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libmf Uses the mathematical library single precision functions No Does not use the mathematical library single precision functions Use Non local jump Library function 6 Output Code Select whether to us
41. After Setting Sections E Section Section start address VYECT const text data 00000000 RESET 01000000 data F t Section that outputs external defined symbols to the Section that outputs external defined symbols to the file O gamen z Fa OM to RAM mapped section 10 00 data data A 01 user01 text user01 text A 02 user02 text user02 text A 03 user03 text user03 text A 04 user 1 text userl 1 text A 05 user 2 text userl 2 text A 06 user 3 text userl 3 text A 07 userD1 data user01 data A 08 user02 data user02 data A 09 user03 data user03 data A To change the section names you can use the button or enter them directly in the text box of the subproperty R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 42 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Set ROM sections and RAM sections overlaid sections Setting the sections is made with the Section start address property in the Section category Figure 2 52 Section start address Property VECT const text data 00000000 RESET 01000000 data ection that outputs external defined symbols to the Section that outputs external defined symbols to the Mell Section alignment Section alignment 0 ROM to RAM mapped section ROM to RAM mapped section 10 lt 1 gt Set ROM sections If you click the button the Section Settings dialog box will open Figure 2 53 Section Settings Dialog Box Section Setting
42. C Language Character Encoding Output Code Output File Assemble List MISRA C 2004 Rule Check Add debug information Specifies whether to generate the debug information Such information is generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option corresponds to the g optio Common Options Link Options Hex Output Options Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 30 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 1 Perform optimization with the code size precedence Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To perform optimization with the code size precedence select Code Size Precedence Osize in the Optimization Level property in the Optimization category Figure 2 29 Level of optimization Property Code Size Precedence Code Size Precedence Osize Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Optimization Level property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 2 Perform optimization with the execution speed precedence Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To perform op
43. Drag a file using such as Explorer and drop it onto the location in this area where you want to add it to Remark If you drag the file using such as Explorer and drop it onto the empty space below the lower project tree it is assumed that you have dropped it onto the Main project lt 2 gt Adding a new file Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the File menu The Add File dialog box will open Designate the file to be created Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box will open Designate the file to be created Remark A blank file is created at the location designated in the Add File dialog box b Removing a file from the project You can remove a file from the project by one of the following procedures The file itself is not deleted from the file system Select the file you want to remove from the project and then select Remove from Project from the Project menu Select the file you want to remove from the project and then select Remove from Project from the context menu c Moving a file You can move a file by the following procedure The file is moved below the File node Drag the file you want to move and then drop it onto the destination Remarks 1 If you drop the file in the main project or subproje
44. Enables MISRA C 2004 rule check and Xcheck_language_extension outputs messages when the rule check is partially suppressed by the unique language specifications extended from the C language standard Disables MISRA C 2004 rule check is disabled which are partially suppressed by the extended language specifications 11 Error Output The detailed information on the error output is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output error message Select whether to output the error message file file This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the ccrh command Error messages are displayed on the Output panel regardless of this property s Default Configuration of the common option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xerror_file Outputs the error message file No Does not output the error message file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 239 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Error message file output Specify the folder which the error message file is output folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If
45. Link Options tab Enable information message output Suppress number of information message in the Message category From the Create Library Options tab Enable information message output Suppress number of information message in the Message category Example of use To suppress outputting messages of M0560004 M0560100 to M0560103 and M0560500 describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 442 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE MSg_unused This option notifies the user of the external defined symbol that is not referenced Specification format MSg_unused Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option notifies the user of the external defined symbol that is not referenced during link processing through an output message This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Notify unused symbol in the Message category Example of use To notify the user of the external defined symbol that is not referenced describe as gt rlink a obj b obj message msg_unused Remark If a load module file is input this option will be invalid This option must be specified together with the message option The a message may be output for the function that inline expansion was performed during compilation In this case add a static declaration for the function definition
46. RH850 architecture common common rh850 Object for G3M cpu g3m No BuildModeN ame Default Optimization None Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Using libraries 0 BuildModeN ame ProjectName abs Yes Yes LIBrary libe Yes LIBrary libm Yes LIBrary libmf No Yes Motorola S record file FOrm Stype BuildModeN ame ProjectName mot Division output file 0 Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build Link Options Hex Output Options i B 5 Option This section explains ccrh options for each phase Compile phase gt See B 5 1 Compile options Assemble phase gt See B 5 2 Assemble options Link phase gt See B 5 3 Link options R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 330 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 5 1 Compile options This section explains options for the compile phase Caution about options are shown below Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are distinguished for options When numerical values are specified as parameters decimal or hexadecimal numbers which starts with Ox 0X can be specified Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the alphabet of hexadecimal numbers When a file name is specified as a parameter it can include the path absolute path or relative path When a file name without the pa
47. Reference count of symbol The reference count of the symbol is output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number This item is output only when the show reference option is specified When the reference count of the symbol is not output is output Whether optimization is applied Whether optimization is applied is output ch Symbol changed by optimization cr Symbol generated by optimization mv Symbol moved by optimization 3 2 7 Cross reference information When the show xreference option is specified the reference information of symbols cross reference information is output The output example of the cross reference information is shown below R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 90 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Cross Reference List 2 3 Unit Name Global Symbol Location External Information samplel SECTION text _main 00000000 _func_01 00000018 SECTION data _gval3 fe600000 0003 00000032 0003 00000038 SECTION bss _gvall fe600004 0001 0000001a 0001 00000020 fe600008 0002 00000026 0002 0000002c sample2 SECTION text _funcod2 00000024 0001 0000000a sample3 SECTION text _funcod3 00000030 0001 00000010 Number Description Unit number The identification number in object units is output Object name The object name is output in the order of input when linking Symbol name The symbol name is output in t
48. Yes LIBrary libmf No No No No Output debug information Specify whether to output debug information This option corresponds to the NODEBug and DEBug option of the rink command Compile Options Hex Output Options Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 39 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 1 Add a user library Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Adding a user library is made with the Using libraries property in the Library category Figure 2 46 Using libraries Property Use standard libraries Yes Use Standard Library function Yes LIBrary libc Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Yes LIBrary libm Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Yes LIBrary libmf Use Non local jump Library function No If you click the button the Path Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 47 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line Fe MainProjectDir user lib Browse C Permit non existent path Placeholder Placeholder Value Description A ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active projec ActiveProjectName sample Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode nam
49. a build of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Runs a rebuild of the active project If the active project is the main project a rebuild of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Runs a clean of the active project If the active project is the main project a clean of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Update Dependencies of active project Updates the dependency of a file in the active project to build Stop Build Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation Build Mode Settings Opens the Build Mode Settings dialog box to modify and add to the build mode Batch Build Opens the Batch Build dialog box to run a batch build Build Option List R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Lists the currently set build options in the Output panel 2tENESAS Page 114 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Toolbar The buttons used in build process are displayed a Build toolbar Build toolbar shows buttons used in build process Runs a build of the project A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Runs a rebuild of the project
50. category From the Individual Compile Options tab Undisplayed warning message in the Warning Message category Example of use To suppress outputting warning message W0511146 and W0511147 describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 396 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Phase individual option specification The phase individual option specification options are as follows Xasm_option Xlk_option Xasm_option This option specifies assemble options Specification format Xasm_option arg Interpretation when omitted The ccrh driver interprets all specified options Detailed description This option passes arg to the assembler as the assemble option Use this option to pass a file to the assembler containing an identifier that the ccrh driver does not recognize as an assembly source file An error will occur if arg is a non existent assemble option An error will occur if arg is omitted Example of use To pass the Xasm_far_jump option to the assembler describe as gt ccrh Xasm_option Xasm_far_jump Xcommon v850e3v5 main c The example above has the same meaning as the following gt ccrh S Xcommon v850e3v5 main c gt asrh Xasm_far_jump Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 397 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xlk_option
51. comma example 02042 02107 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 02222 02554 02699 02782 This corresponds to the Xno_warning option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters Other detailed information on assembly is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 249 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before assemble processing before assemble Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Replaces with the command line opti
52. gt ccrh P Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 344 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE S This option does not execute processing after assembling Specification format Interpretation when omitted Processing is continued after assembling Detailed description This option does not execute processing after assembling The assembly source file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by asm The output file name can be specified by specifying this option and the o option Example of use To output assembly source file main asm without executing any processing after the assembling describe as gt ccrh S Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 345 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE C This option does not execute processing after linking Specification format Interpretation when omitted Processing is continued after linking Detailed description This option does not execute processing after linking The object file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by obj The output file name can be specified by specifying this option and the o option Example of use To output object file main obj without executing any processing after the linking describe as gt ccrh c Xcommon
53. load module file on the target system It also performs ROMization performs optimization during linking of relocatable files creates and edits library files and converts to Intel HEX files and Motorola S record files R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 321 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 1 Operation Flow of ccrh C source file user created file y Compiler cerh Compile driver cerh Preprocessed file gt Assembler asrh Assembly source file Assembly source file user created file Optimizing linker rlink Object file Library file Stack information file Load module file Relocatable file Motorola S record file Intel HEX file Binary file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 322 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 B 2 I O Files APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE The I O files of the ccrh command are shown below File Type C source file Table B 1 Extension 1 0 Files of ccrh Command Description Source file described in C language This is created by the user Preprocessed file File which the execution result of preprocess processing for the input file is output This is an ASCII image file This file is output when the P option is specified Assembly source file Assembly language file generated from C source file by compilation This file is outpu
54. object file and libraryfile Individual Compile Options tab for C source file Individual Assemble Options tab for assembly source file File Information tab c When the category node Files node or Build tool generated files node is selected on the Project Tree panel Category Information tab Remark When multiple components are selected on the Project Tree panel only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed If the value of the property is modified that is taken effect to the selected components all of which are common to all R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 130 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu only available for the Property panel Undo Cancels the previous edit operation of the value of the property Cut While editing the value of the property cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected characters of the property to the clipboard Paste While editing the value of the property inserts the contents of the clipboard Delete While editing the value of the property deletes the selected characters Select All Context menu While editing the value of the property selects all the characters of the selected property Undo Cancels the previous edit operation of the value of the property Cut While editing the value of the p
55. property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Other detailed information on assembly is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 179 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before assemble processing before assemble Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program R
56. the format of the standard address type consists of SO S2 and S8 records and the format of the 32 bit address type consists of SO S3 and S7 records The structure and contents of the Motorola S record file are shown below Figure 3 2 Structure of Motorola S record File SO record 1 S2 S3 record 1 S2 S3 record 9 S8 S7 record Output Information Description SO record File name S1 record Value of code S2 record Value of code S3 record Value of code S7 record Entry point address S8 record Entry point address R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 105 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Each record consists of the following fields Description Record type S0 SO record 1 S1 record S2 S2 record S3 S3 record S4 S4 record S5 S5 record S6 S6 record S7 S7 record S8 S8 record S9 S9 record Record length The number of bytes as 2 digit hexadecimal number of 3 number of bytes expressed by gg Note js expressed Field Checksum The one s complement is obtained from the sum of the number of 2 digit hexadecimal bytes in the record except for Sx SS and NL and the lower one byte of the one s complement is expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal number Newline n Note Thisis 1 3 6 2 S0 record This indicates the file name Number Description Fixed at S0 Fixed a
57. the upper digit is extended with 0 to handle it as an even number of digits If the size of a vacant area is not a multiple of the size of the output data the value is output as many times as possible and then a warning will be output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Fill unused areas in the output ranges with the value Output padding data in the Hex Format category Example of use To fill the vacant memory area with ffH within the range from address 100H to address 2FFH describe as gt rlink a obj b obj form hexadecimal output filel 100 2ff start P1 100 P2 200 space ff Remark If the specification of the data is omitted in this option vacant areas are not filled with values This option is valid only when the form binary stype hexadecimal option is specified If the output range is not specified in the output option this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 440 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Message This option output information messages Specification format Interpretation when omitted The output of information messages is suppressed It is the same result as when the nomessage option is specified Detailed description This option output information messages This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSui
58. you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the compile option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the compile options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 174 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Assemble Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the assemble phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Debug Information 2 Preprocess 3 Character Encoding 4 Output Code 5 Assemble List 6 Others Caution This tab is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Figure A 6 Property Panel Assemble Options Tab Property a CC RH Property E Debug Information Add debug information Yes g E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 Assemble List Others Add debug information Specifies whether to generate the debug informa
59. you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Macro undefinition Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the U option of the ccrh command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro undefinition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 160 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output C source Select whether to output the comments of the C source to the preprocessed file comments to This corresponds to the Xpreprocess option of the ccrh command preprocessed file This property is displayed only when Yes P in the Output preprocessed source file property in the Output File category is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the comments of the C source to the Xpreprocess comment preprocessed file No Does not output the comments of the C source to the preprocessed file Output line number Select whether to output the line number information of the C source to th
60. 2tENESAS Page 47 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 63 Section Settings Dialog Box After Overlaid Sections Are Added Section Settings Address 0x00001 300 Section user 1 text Overlay Overlay2 000001 400 user 2 text 000001500 user 3 text New Overlay 0x00001600 user01 data Remove 0x00001 700 user02 data 000001800 user03 data Up Down 0x01 000000 RESET OxFEBF8000 data F bss stack bss OxFEBFS100 user01 text A jor _a _ For other RAM sections set addresses and section names in the same way Remark Click the Address column and click the Add button to open the Section Address dialog box allowing you to add a new address R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 48 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 64 Section Settings Dialog Box After Multiple RAM Sections Are Added Section Settings Address Section Overlay1 Overlay2 VECT const text daa ROM sections 000001000 user01 text 000001100 user02 text 000001200 user03 text 000001300 user11 text 0x00001400 user12 text 000001500 user13 text 000001600 user01 data 000001700 user02 data user 3 data RAM sections A m 001000000 RESET data R bss stack bss OxFEBF8100
61. 5 Total section size 88 3 2 6 Symbol information 89 3 2 7 Cross reference information 90 3 3 Link Map File When Objects Are Combined 92 3 3 1 Structure of link map 92 3 3 2 Header information 93 3 3 3 Option information 93 3 3 4 Error information 94 3 3 5 Entry information 94 3 3 6 Combined address information 94 3 3 7 Address overlap information 95 3 4 Library List File 96 3 4 1 Structure of the library list 96 3 4 2 Option information 96 3 4 3 Error information 97 3 4 4 Library information 97 3 4 5 Module section and symbol information within the library 98 3 5 Intel HEX File 100 3 5 1 Structure of the Intel HEX file 100 3 5 2 Start linear address record 102 3 5 3 Expanded linear address record 102 3 5 4 Start address record 102 3 5 5 Expanded address record 103 3 5 6 Data record 103 3 5 7 End record 104 3 6 Motorola S record File 105 3 6 1 Structure of the Motorola S record file 105 3 6 2 SO record 106 3 6 3 S1 record 107 3 6 4 S2 record 107 3 6 5 S3 record 107 3 6 6 S7 record 108 3 6 7 S8 record 108 3 6 8 S9 record 109 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 110 A 1 Description 110 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 321 B 1 Overview 321 B 2 I O Files 323 B 3 Environment Variable 325 B 4 Method for Manipulating 326 B 4 1 Command line operation 326 B 4 2 Subco
62. A D1 E tp2 obj B D3 F tp3 obj C D2 E G lib lib E R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 452 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE When the start A B E 400 C D F G 8000 option is specified 0x400 0x8000 A B E tp1 E tp3 E lib c D1 D3 D2 Sections C F and G delimited by are allocated to the same address Sections specified with wildcard characters in this example the sections whose names start with D are allocated in the input order Objects in the sections having the same name section E in this example are allocated in the input order An input library s sections having the same name section E in this example are allocated after the input objects When the start A B C D1 D2 D3 E F G 400 option is specified 0x400 A B C D1 D2 D3 E F G The sections that come immediately after Sections A D2 and G in this example are selected as the start and allocated to the same address When the start A B C D1 D2 D3 E F G 400 option is specified 0x400 A B C D1 E F D2 D3 G When the sections to be allocated to the same address are enclosed by the sections within are allocated to the address immediately after the sections that come before the sections C and E in this example The section that comes after the
63. A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation 3 Panel display area The following panels are displayed in this area Project Tree panel Property panel Editor panel Output panel See the each panel section for details of the contents of the display R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 115 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Tree panel This panel is used to displays the project components such as the build tool source files etc in tree view Figure A 2 Project Tree Panel Project Tree E3 a E sample Project R7F70103524FP Microcontroller A CC RH Build Tool S RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 5 g File a g Build tool generated files abs sample abs map sample map mot sample mot cj main c UR sub Subproject R7F70103524FP Microcontroller A CC RH Build Tool S RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 4 E File The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Context menu How to open From the View menu select Project Tree R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 116 of 485
64. Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add an existing subproject to the project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add a new subproject to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as an existing category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 113 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Sets selected project or subproject to an active project APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Sets the selected project or subproject to an active project Close Project Closes the current project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Save Project Saves the setting information of the current project to the project file Save Project As Opens the Save Project As dialog box to save the setting information o
65. Are Added Section Settings Address Section 000001300 userl1 text 000001400 userl2 text 0x00001500 userl3 text 0x00001600 user01 data 000001700 user02 data 000001800 user03 data 001000000 RESET Click here and then click OxFEBF8000 data R insew Ovsrlay button bss stack bss Click the added address row Address column or Section column and click the New Overlay button to open the Add Overlay dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 46 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 61 Add Overlay Dialog Box Add Overlay Enter in Section name the name of the RAM section to be added and click the OK button to add the entered section to Section in the Section Settings dialog box Figure 2 62 Section Settings Dialog Box After RAM Sections Are Added Section Settings Address Section Ox00001300 userl1 text Ox00001400 userl2 text Ox00001500 userl3 text Ox00001600 user data 0x00001700 user02 data Ox00001800 user03 data 001000000 RESET Click here and then click OxFEBF8000 data R Me New Overlay button bss Add the sections to be allocated to the same address by using the New Overlay button in the same way The added sections are displayed under Overlay n n number starting with 1 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00
66. Binary search Xswitch binary Outputs the code in the binary search format for switch statements in programs Searches for a matching case statement by using a binary search algorithm If this item is selected when many labels are used any case statement can be found at almost the same speed Table jump Xswitch table 2tENESAS Outputs the code in the table jump format for switch statements in programs References a table indexed on the values in the case statements and selects and processes case labels from the switch statement values The code will branch to all the case statements with about the same speed However if case values are not used in succession an unnecessary area will be created Page 230 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Floating point calculating type APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to generate runtime library call instructions for floating point calculations or to generate floating point instructions for the floating point unit FPU This corresponds to the Xfloat option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Object for G3M Xcpu g3m in the Specify CPU core property in the Output File Type and Path category from the Common Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Auto None Generates floating point calculation instructions Software
67. COMMAND REFERENCE Xbit_order This option specifies the order of bit field members Specification format Xbit_order pos Interpretation when omitted The bit field members are allocated from the lower bit Detailed description This option specifies the order of bit field members The items that can be specified as pos are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified The members are allocated from the upper bit The members are allocated from the lower bit An error will occur if pos is omitted If this option is specified when the order of bit field members is specified by the pragma directive in the C source the value specified by this option is applied to all members until the first pragma bit_order directive appears After that the value of the pragma directive is applied This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Order of bit field members in the Output Code category Example of use To allocate the bit field members from the upper bit describe as gt ccrh Xbit_order left Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 378 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xpass_ source This option outputs a C source program as a comment to the assembly source file Specification format Xpass_ source Interpretation when omitted
68. Calculating Xfloat soft Generates runtime library call instructions for floating point calculations FPU Calculating Xfloat fpu Generates floating point calculation instructions of FPU for floating point calculations Generate div divu instructions Select whether to generate the div and divu instructions instead of the divq and divqu instructions for division Although the divq and divau instructions are fast the number of execution cycles will differ depending on the values of the operands This corresponds to the Xdiv option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xdiv Generates the div and divu instructions for division No Generates the divq and divqu instructions for division Generate OV flag check code in division operation Select whether to generate code fetrap instruction that checks the OV flag after division instructions and generate an FE level software exception when the OV flag is 1 This corresponds to the Xcheck_div_ov option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xcheck_div_ov Generates code that checks the OV flag at division No Generates code that does not check the OV flag at division Vector number of fetrap instruction in divide exception R20
69. Create Library Register Mode Error Output 0 Warning Message 1 Build Method 2 Version Select 3 Notes 4 Others Remark If the property in the Frequently Used Options category is changed the value of the property having the same name contained in the corresponding tab will be changed accordingly Category from Common Options Tab Frequently Used Options for Compile category Corresponding Tab Compile Options tab Frequently Used Options for Assemble category Assemble Options tab Frequently Used Options for Link category Link Options tab Frequently Used Options for Hex Output category Hex Output Options tab Frequently Used Options for Create Library category Create Library Options tab R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 132 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 4 Property Panel Common Options Tab Property A CC RH Property E Build Mode Build mode E Output File Type andPath Output file type Output common object file for various devices Specify CPU core Output cross reference information Intermediate file output folder E Frequently Used Options for Compie Level of optimization Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition E Frequently Used Options for Link Using libraries Output folder Output file name Use standard libraries Use S
70. CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output code of switch statement in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output code of switch statement in the Output Code category Example of use To output a code for the switch statement in the binary search format describe as gt ccrh Xswitch binary Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 380 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xreg_mode This option specifies the register mode Specification format Xreg_mode mode Interpretation when omitted The 32 register mode object file is generated Detailed description This option generates the object file for the specified register mode This option limits the number of registers used by ccrh to 32 the 32 register mode or 22 the 22 register mode or register mode common and embeds the magic number into the object file Use register mode common to generate the object file that does not depend on register modes The items that can be specified as mode are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Register Mode mode Working Registers Registers for Register Variables common r10 tor14 r25 to r29 22 r10 to r14 r25 to r29 32 r10 to r19 r20 to r29 An error will occur if mode is omitted This option generates the code using the register that can be used
71. Debug E Python Console E Text Editor N Update Funcion butors The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Category selection area Select the items to configure from the following categories Category Description General Startup and Exit category Configure startup and shutdown General Display category Configure messages from the application General External Text Editor category Configure the external text editor General Font and Color category Configure the fonts and colors shown on each panel General External Tools category Configure the startup of external tools General Build Debug category Configure building and debugging R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 294 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Category Description General Python Console category Configure the Python console General Text Editor category Configure the text editor General Update category Configure update Other User Information category Configure user information Remark See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start for details about catego ries other than General Build Debug 2 Settings This area is used to configure
72. Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path Outputs the assemble list file No Does not output the assemble list file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 247 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for Specify the folder which the assemble list file is output assemble list file The assemble list file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xprn_path option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Commo
73. Figure A 17 Property Panel Category Information Tab Property New category Property E Category Information Category name New category Shortcut to a folder Notes Category name This is the name of this category The category name can be between 1 and 200 characters Also the category name colored in gray is fixed Description of each category 1 Category Information The detailed information on the category is displayed and the configuration can be changed Category name Specify the name of the category to categorize files This property of the Files node and Build tool generated files node is displayed in gray and you cannot change the attribute Default Category name of files How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 1 to 200 characters Shortcut to a folder Specify a shortcut to a folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder This property of the Files node and Build tool generated files node is not displayed Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters 2 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category of the Files node and Build tool generated files node is not displayed R20
74. File Output common object file for various devices Yes HHSoU architecture common common rh850 Specify CPU core Object for G3M Xcpu g3m Output cross reference information No Intermediate file output folder BuildModeN ame Caution When the main project is selected only the main project settings are made Even if subprojects are added their settings are not made R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 72 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 Runa Build This section explains operations related to running a build 1 Build types The following types of builds are available Table 2 1 Build Types Type Description Build Out of build target files runs a build of only updated files gt See 2 12 1 Runa build of updated files Rebuild Runs a build of all build target files gt See 2 12 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build Runs a build in parallel with the change of the build setting gt See 2 12 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations Batch build Runs builds in batch with the build modes that the project has gt See 2 12 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remarks 1 Builds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are built in the order that they are displayed on the project tree see 2 11 3 Change the build order of subprojects Note that when the build target project depends on another project the build of the d
75. How to open On the Project Tree panel select a file and then select Open with Selected Application from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the application to open the file is stored Program folder for Windows XP C Program Files is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 315 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Specify the executable file name of the application to open the file 4 Files of type area Specify the executable file type of the application to open the file Program exe Executable format default All Files All the formats Function buttons Open Opens the file with the specified application Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 316 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Import File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the file and import it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 51 Select Import File Dialog Box Select Import File 1 Look in sample DB DefaultBuild EG El LinkOrder mtls My Recent Documents 2 My Documents My Computer 3 eae 4 vy N
76. If this option is specified at the same time with the Oinline option inline expansion is performed between files Operation is not guaranteed if an object file is generated with this option specified and any of link options delete rename and replace is specified at linkage of the object file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Perform inter module optimization in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Perform inter module optimization in the Optimization Details category Example of use To merge main c and sub c compile them and output one file describe as gt ccrh Xmerge files Xwhole program Xcommon v850e3v5 main c sub c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 374 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xwhole_program This option performs optimization assuming that the files to be compiled comprise the entire program Specification format Xwhole_ program Interpretation when omitted It is not assumed that the files to be compiled comprise the entire program Detailed description This option performs optimization assuming that the files to be compiled comprise the entire program The compilation is performed assuming that the following conditions are met Operation is not guaranteed if these conditions are not met The values and addres
77. Level of of optimization None optimization property Yes Otail_call Gives precedence to using jr instructions in the place of jarl instructions when the function ends with a function call The code size can be reduced by removing the store restore instructions for Ip However some debug functions cannot be used No Otail_call off Uses jarl instructions when the function ends with a function call R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 156 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Optimize accesses to external variables APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to optimize accesses to external variables This corresponds to the Osmap and Omap options of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Optimizes the inner module Osmap Sets a base address for external or static variables defined in the file to be compiled and generates code that accesses these relative to the base address Yes Optimizes the inter module Omap Generates an external symbol allocation information file According to the information recompilation is done to generate code that performs access to external or static variables relative to the base address This item is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected If Yes in the Build s
78. List category From the Assemble Options tab Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category From the Link Options tab Output folder in the Output File category From the Hex Output Options tab Output folder Output folder for united hex file in the Output File category From the Create Library Options tab Output folder in the Output File category R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 303 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE From the Individual Compile Options tab Output folder for assembly source file in the Output File category Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category and Error message file output folder in the Error Output category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category and Error message file output folder in the Error Output category Description of each area 1 Message area This area displays the message related to the folder to be selected in this dialog box 2 Folder location area Select the folder to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from The folder selected by default differs depending on the area that this dialog box is called from a Add File dialog box The folder has been set to the area that this dialog box is called from is selected When the area has been blank or the path which do
79. Output quality report file when build is successful 5 gt Enable Break Sound 6 C Observe downloaded load module files changing 7 gt Add source files automatically for the Debug Only project only 8 i Initialize Settings Function buttons initialize All Settings The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Enable Rapid Build Enables the rapid build Ne feature default Does not use the rapid build feature Note This feature automatically begins a build when the source file being edited is saved Enabling this feature makes it possible to perform builds while editing source files If this feature is used we recommend saving frequently after editing source files R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 296 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Observe registered files changing This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected Starts a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like Does not start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text edi tor or the like default Remark This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build
80. Page 400 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE a file This option specifies a subcommand file specification R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 401 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Version help display specification The version help display specification options are as follows V h V This option displays the version information of asrh Specification format Interpretation when omitted Assembling is performed without displaying the version information of asrh Detailed description This option outputs the version information of asrh to the standard error output It does not execute assembling Example of use To output the version information of asrh to the standard error output describe as gt asrh V Xcommon v850e3v5 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 402 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE h This option displays the descriptions of asrh options Specification format Interpretation when omitted The descriptions of asrh options are not displayed Detailed description This option outputs the descriptions of asrh options to the standard error output It does not execute assembling Example of use To output the descriptions of asrh options to the standard error output describe as gt asrh h Xcommon v850e3v5 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2t
81. Project Tree panel select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu Description of each area 1 File area The names of the following files are listed in the order that the files are input to the linker Object module files which are generated from the source files added to the selected main project or subproject Object module files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Library files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject The default order is the order that the files are added to the project By changing the display order of the files you can set the input order of the files to the linker To change the display order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the file names Remarks 1 When the mouse cursor is hovered over a file name the path of the file appears in a popup If the file is on the same drive as the project file then it appears as the relative path if it is on the differ ent drive then it appears as the absolute path R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 287 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Object module files which are generated from newly added source files and newly added object module files are added after the last object module file in the list Newly added library files are added to the end of the list 3 When
82. See 3 4 Library List File for details about the library list file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 29 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 Set Compile Options To set options for the compile phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various compile options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 28 Property Panel Compile Options Tab Property y CC RH Property E Debug nformaton Add debug information Yes g E Optimization Level of optimization Default Optimization None E Optimization D etads Maximum number of loop expansions Remove unused static functions Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Perform pipeline optimization Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Use jr instruction to call a function at the end of the function Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Optimize accesses to external variables No Perform inter module optimization No Perform optimization considering type of data indicated by pointer No Perform inline expansion of strcepy stremp memcpy memset No Merge string literals No El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Include files at head of compiling units Include files at head of compiling units 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0
83. Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply tail Build mode list DefaultBuild Duplicate BuildMode2 2 4 Delete Rename Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Build Mode Settings Description of each area 1 Selected build mode area This area displays the build mode selected in the Build mode list area a Button Apply to All Set the build mode of the main project and all subprojects of the currently opened project to the currently displayed build mode 2 Build mode list area This area displays all build modes that exist in the currently opening project main project and subproject in a list The current build modes of all projects are same the build mode is selected by default If they are not same DefaultBuild will be selected The build mode that exists only in part of the main project and subproject is shown with the mark Note that the DefaultBuild is the default build mode and is always displayed at the top R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 289 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Button Duplicate Duplicates the selected build mode The Character String Input dialog box opens And the build mode is duplicated with the name
84. Size for inline expansion Specify the maximum increasing rate of the code size up to which inline expansion is performed If value is omitted it is assumed that 100 has been specified This item is valid when the Oinline 2 option is specified including when the Ospped option is specified delete_static_func on or off Deleting unused static functions If value is omitted it is assumed that on has been specified This item is valid when the Onothing option is not specified pipeline on or off R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Pipeline optimization If value is omitted it is assumed that on has been specified This item is always valid when the Ospeed option is specified 2tENESAS Page 366 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Optimization Item Parameter Description item value tail_call on or off Converting function calls at the end of functions to jr If on is specified then if there is a function call at the end of a function and certain conditions are met a jr instruction will be generated for that call rather than a jarl instruction The Ip store restore code will be removed reducing the code size However some debug functions cannot be used If value is omitted it is assumed that on has been specified This item is valid when the Ospeed or Osize option is specified file name External variable access optimization Base addresses are set
85. The C source program is not output as a comment to the assembly source file Detailed description This option outputs a C source program as a comment to the assembly source file The output comments are for reference only and may not correspond exactly to the code Additionally non executed lines may not be output as comments e g type declarations and labels For example comments concerning global variables local variables function declarations etc may be output to incorrect positions By specifying the optimization options the code may be deleted and only the comment may remain This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output comment to assembly source file in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output comment to assembly source file in the Output Code category Example of use To output a C source program as a comment to the assembly source file describe as gt ccrh Xpass_source S Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 379 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xswitch This option specifies the format in which the code of switch statements is to be output Specification format Interpretation when omitted ccrh selects the optimum output format for each switch statement Detailed description This option specifies the format in
86. The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 154 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Maximum number of Specify the maximum number of times to expand the loops such as for and while loop expansions If O or 1 is specified expansion is suppressed If this is blank it is assumed that 4 has been specified This corresponds to the Ounroll option of the ccrh command Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 0 to 999 decimal number or blank Remove unused static Select whether to remove the static functions which are not called functions This corresponds to the Odelete_static_func option of the ccrh command Default Yes To adjust the level of optimization None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes To adjust the level Performs optimization according to the Level of of optimization None optimization property Yes Removes the unused static functions which are Odelete_static_func not called No Does not remove the unused static functions Odelete_static_func off Which are not called Perform inline expansion Specify whether to perform inline expansion at the location calling functions This corresponds to the Oinline option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when
87. V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xmulti_level This option specifies the generation of a multi core program Specification format Xmulti_level level Interpretation when omitted A single core program is generated Detailed description This option generates a program for the specified core The items that can be specified as evel are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Generates a single core program The pragma pmodule directives in the program are ignored 1 Generates a multi core program The pragma pmodule directives in the program become valid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Type of a generating program in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Type of a generating program in the Output Code category Example of use To generate a multi core program describe as gt ccrh Xmulti_level 1 Xcommon v850e3v5 filel c file2 c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 392 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xpatch This option applies a patch Specification format Xpatch string Interpretation when omitted The patch is not applied Detailed description dw_access can be specified as string An error will occur if any other item is specified When the Xpatch dw_access option
88. V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Subcommand file specification The subcommand file specification option is as follows This option specifies a subcommand file Specification format file Interpretation when omitted Only the options and file names specified on the command line are recognized Detailed description This option handles file as a subcommand file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted See B 4 2 Subcommand file usage for details about a subcommand file Example of use To handle command txt as a subcommand file describe as gt asrh command txt Xcommon v850e3v5 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 420 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 5 3 Link options This section explains options for the link phase Caution about options are shown below Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for options Uppercase characters in options and parameters indicate that they can be specified as abbreviations for options and parameters The characters after the uppercase characters can be omitted Example For example FOrm Absolute can be specified as follows fo a fo abs for absolu When a file name is specified as a parameter and cannot be used When link options are specified for the ccrh command the XIk_option option must be u
89. Xep Compile option 383 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 480 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Xerror_file Assemble option 418 Xerror_file Compile option 395 Xfar_jump Compile option 386 Xfloat Compile option 384 Xignore_files_misra Compile option 362 Xinline_strcpy Compile option 371 Xintermodule Compile option 369 Xlk_option Compile option 398 Xmerge_files Compile option 374 Xmerge_string Compile option 372 Xmisra2004 Compile option 360 Xmulti_level Compile option 392 Xno_warning Assemble option 419 Xno_warning Compile option 396 Xobj_path Assemble option 405 Xobj_path Compile option 338 Xpack Compile option 376 Xpass_source Compile option 379 Xpatch Compile option 393 Xpreinclude Compile option 351 Xpreprocess Compile option 352 Xprn_path Assemble option 406 Xreg_mode Assemble option 414 Xreg_mode Compile option 381 Xreserve_r2 Assemble option 415 Xreserve_r2 Compile option 382 Xswitch Compile option 380 Xunordered_cmpf Compile option 391 Xuse_fmaf Compile option 390 Xvolatile Compile option 357 Xwhole_program Compile option 375 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 7tENESAS Page 481 of 485 Revision Record Description Summary Apr 01 201
90. Xreserve_r2 Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 382 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xep This option specifies how to handle the ep register Specification format Interpretation when omitted The ep register is treated as a register guaranteeing the value before and after the function call Detailed description This option specifies how to handle the ep register The items that can be specified as mode are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Fixes the value of the ep register for the entire project Specify this parameter when any of the following attribute strings in a pragma section in the project is used ep_auto ep_disp4 ep_disp5 ep_disp7 ep_disp8 ep_disp16 ep_disp23 callee Treats the ep register as a register guaranteeing the value before and after the function call Specify this parameter when the Omap or Osmap option is specified An error will occur if mode is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab ep register treatment in the Register Mode category Example of use To fix the value of the ep register for the entire project describe as gt ccrh Xep fix Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 383 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE
91. You can select any of items below Windows CR LF Macintosh CR R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 285 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Unix LF An active newline entry is selected by default 3 Reload the file with these settings Reloads the file with the selected encoding and newline code when the OK button is clicked FJ Does not reload the file when the OK button is clicked default Function buttons Button Function Sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and closes this dialog box If Reload the file with these settings is selected sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and reloads the file And then closes this dialog box Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 286 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer object module files and library files to be input to the linker and configure these link orders Figure A 36 Link Order Dialog Box Link Order File fileO2 obj fileO3 obj library01 lib libraryO02 lib libraryO3 lib Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the
92. a 0 fie J main c R7F7010352AFP Microcontroller Sl RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool F T Program Analyzer Analyze Tool E a Build tool generated files x ea Property Ay CC RH Property E Build Mode Build mode Output File Type andPath Output file type Output common abject file for various devices Specify CPU core Outputs cross reference information Intermediate file output folder E Frequently Used Options for Compie Level of optimization Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition E Frequently Used Options for Link Using libraries Output folder Output file name Use standard libraries Use Standard Library function Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Use Non local jump Library function E Frequently Used Options for HexO utput Output hex file Hex file format Output folder Outes Gln annem DefaultBuild Execute Module Load Module File Yes RH850 architecture common common rh850 Object for G3M Xcpu g3m No BuildModeName Default Optimization None Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Using libraries 0 BuildModeName ProjectName abs Yes Yes LIBrary libe Yes LIBrary libm Yes LIBrary libmf No Yes Motorola S record file FOrm Stype BuildModeName _2 Pheminnthlnnn n me nb Common Options Compile Options Li
93. are changed in accordance with the following rules Information about changes is displayed in the Output panel If you change from an older version to a newer version the option settings will be inherited and converted only if necessary If you change from a newer version to an older version only identical option settings will be inherited Options that only exist in the older version will be set to the default values R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 13 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 Set Build Target Files Before running a build you must add the build target files such as C source file or assembly source file to the project This section explains operations on setting files in the project 2 3 1 Add a file to a project Files can be added to a project by the following methods Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file 1 Adding an existing file a Add an individual files Drag the file from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty space below the project tree The file is added below the File node Figure 2 2 Project Tree Panel File Drop Location Project Tree o e sample Project F R7F70103524FP Microcontroller A CC RH Build Tool i RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool Ty Program Analyzer Analyze Tool SD File Drop the file here b Add a folder Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty
94. are created in the current folder Example gt set HLNK_TMP D workspace tmp HLNK_DIR Specify the folder where the input files for the optimizing linker are stored The files specified by the input and library options are searched from the current folder and the folder specified by HLNK_DIR in that order However the files specified with wildcard characters are searched in the current folder Example gt set HLNK_DIR D workspace obj1 D workspace obj2 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 325 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 4 Method for Manipulating This section explains how to manipulate each command Command line operation Subcommand file usage Set options in CubeSuite B 4 1 Command line operation You can launch the ccrh command the compilation driver to perform compilation assembly linking and other actions The assembler asrh and optimizing linker rlink can also start by itself 1 Specification format Enter the following on the command line gt ccrh Aoption Afile Afile Aoption gt asrh Aoption Afile Afile Aoption gt rlink Afile Aoption option Option name file File name Can be omitted Pattern in proceeding can be repeated Select from items delimited by the pipe symbol A One or more spaces The following points should be noted when entering a command The specification formats o
95. be specified using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes Specify message number CHange_message Information lt Message number gt in the Change warning message to information message property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters Change information and Select whether to change the type of information and warning messages to error warning message to This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command error message Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All Changes the type of all information and CHange_message Error warning messages to error Yes Specify message number Specifies the number of information or CHange_message Error lt Mes_ warning message of which type is to be sage number gt changed to error No Does not change the type of information and warning messages R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 195 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Number of information Specify the number of the information and warning message and warning message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit th
96. below Symbol List SECTION 1 FILE 2 6 SYMBOL SECTION text FILE sample obj 00000000 00000023 _main 00000000 _func_01 00000018 SECTION bss FILE sample obj e600004 fe60000b _gvall e600004 Number Description Section name The name of the section is output File name The file name is output Start address The start address of the corresponding section included in the file shown in 2 is output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 89 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Number Description End address The end address of the corresponding section included in the file shown in 2 is output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number Section size The size of the corresponding section included in the file shown in 2 is output in byte units This is expressed in a hexadecimal number Symbol name The symbol name is output Symbol address The symbol address is output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number Symbol size The symbol size is output in byte units This is expressed in a hexadecimal number Symbol type The data type and declaration type are output Data type func Function name data Variable name entry Entry function name none Undefined label assembler symbol Declaration type g External definition Internal definition
97. build you can collectively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and macro definition settings every time 1 When changing the build mode for the main project or subprojects Select the Build tool node of the target project on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select the build mode to be changed to on the Build mode property in the Build Mode category Figure 2 98 Build mode Property Build mode DefaultBuild v R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 69 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 When changing the build mode for the entire project Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open Figure 2 99 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to al Build mode list DefaultBuild BuildMode2 Rename Select the build mode to be changed from the build mode list The selected build mode will be displayed in Selected build mode Click the Apply to All button The build mode for the main project and all the subprojects which belong to the project will be changed to the build mode selected in the dialog box Caution For projects that the selected bui
98. call branches describe as gt ccrh Xfloat soft Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 384 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xcall_jump This option controls generating function call branch instructions Specification format Xcall_jump num Interpretation when omitted The jarl and jr instructions are generated for function call branches Detailed description This option controls generating function call branch instructions The items that can be specified as num are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Generates the jarl and jr instructions for the branch to the function Generates the jarl32 and jr32 instructions for the branch to the function An error will occur if num is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Specify jump instruction in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Specify jump instruction in the Output Code category Example of use To generate the jarl32 and jr32 instructions for the branch to the function describe as gt ccrh Xcall_jump 32 Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 385 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xfar_jump This option controls outputting far jump Specification for
99. can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified System libraries The system library files are displayed This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command The system library file name is displayed as the subproperty Default System libraries number of defined items How to change Changes not allowed Use standard libraries Select whether to use the standard libraries provided by the compiler This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the standard libraries No Does not use the standard libraries Use Standard Library Select whether to use the standard library functions function This property is changed to Yes LIBrary libc when Yes in the Use Mathematical Library Double precision function or Use Mathematical Library Single precision function property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default Yes LIBrary libc How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libc Uses the standard library functions No Does not use the standard library functions R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 188 of 485 Apr 01
100. contains space characters only R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 270 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 The path is too long Specify a path with a number of characters equal to or fewer than maximum number of restriction in the property that called this dialog box APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Message Description The file name including the path exceeds the maximum number of restriction in the property that called this dialog box The specified path contains a folder that does not exist The path contains a folder that does not exist The file name or path name is invalid The following characters cannot be used lt gt The file name with the invalid path is designated The following characters cannot be used for the file name and folder name lt gt More than maximum number of paths or files specified by the caller lines cannot be specified The number of paths or files which have been entered exceeds the maximum number of restriction in the property that called this dialog box b Button Browse When adding the path Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box If a folder is selected the path will be added in Path One path per one line When adding the file name including the path Opens the Specify Far Jump File dialog box If a file is selected the file will be added in Path One path per one line c Permit n
101. file example call a bat processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after assemble processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty
102. folder The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the OUtput option of the rlink command Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output file name Specify the output file name If the extension is omitted it is automatically added according to the selection in the Hex file format property When User libraries FOrm Library U is selected lib When System libraries FOrm Library S is selected lib When Relocatable file FOrm Relocate is selected rel The following placeholders are supported ActivePro
103. for a C source file An abort error will occur if the register that cannot be used for the assembly source file The same register mode must be specified for all source files The different register mode cannot be specified for each source file If there are object files with different register modes an error will occur during linking By specifying this option the register mode of the software register bank function can be changed This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Register mode in the Register Mode category Example of use To generate the 22 register mode object file describe as gt ccrh Xreg_mode 22 Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 381 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xreserve_r2 This option reserves the r2 register Specification format Xreserve r2 Interpretation when omitted The compiler uses the r2 register without reserving it Detailed description This option reserves the r2 register and generates code that does not use this register by the compiler This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Reserve r2 register in the Register Mode category Example of use To reserve the r2 register and generates code that does not use this register by the compiler describe as gt ccrh
104. from the drop down list Restriction Yes P Outputs the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file No Does not output the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file Output folder for Specify the folder which the preprocessed source file is output preprocessed source file The file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by i If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xprep_path option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes P in the Output preprocessed source file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters 9 Assemble List The detailed information on the assemble list is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 234 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APP
105. function is in a range that cannot be branched to by the jarl or jr directive 2MB or more in which case the Far Jump file is used to recompile Use the extension fjp This corresponds to the Xfar_jump option of the ccrh command Default Far Jump file name How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify Far Jump File dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 166 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Type of a generating Select the type of the program to be generated program This corresponds to the Xmulti_level option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only for the multi core project Default Generate a program for multi core Xmulti_level 1 How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Generate a program Generates a single core program for single core None The pragma pmodule directives in the program are ignored Generate a program Generates a multi core program for multi core The pragma pmodule directives in the program Xmulti_level 1 become valid and the PM number is added to the end of the section name 8 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assembly source Select whether to output the assembly source file o
106. in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category From the Compile Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category From the Individual Compile Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category Example of use To define sample 256 as a preprocessor macro describe as gt ccrh Dsample 256 Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 347 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE U This option deletes the definition of the preprocessor macro or assembler symbol by the D option Specification format Uname name Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option deletes the definition of the preprocessor macro or user defined symbol of the assembler name by the D option This is equivalent to adding undef name at the beginning of the source program An error will occur if name is omitted This option cannot delete the definition by describing define name def and SET name def only assembly source program This option can be used to undefine C language macros that have been defined already but it cannot undefine the following macros _ LINE _ FILE DATE__ __ TIME__ CCRH__ or__CCRH An error will occur if these are specified for name This option can be specified more than once If both this opti
107. in accordance with the external symbol allocation information generated by the linker and code for accessing external and static variables relative to the base addresses is generated When symbol __ gp_data is defined and a value is specified in gp in the code of the startup routine code for accessing variables relative to gp when possible is generated in accordance with the external symbol allocation information Specify the external symbol allocation information file generated by the optimizing linker as file name If file name is omitted it performs linking once and then after creating the external symbol allocation information file repeats the process from compilation to linking Optimization of access to external variables defined in the compilation unit Base address is set for external and static variables defined in the file to be compiled and code that accesses these relative to the base address is generated If item is omitted it is assumed that this option has specified Osize If this option is specified more than once for the same item the option specified last will be valid When Oitem is not specified the optimization items are interpreted as follows according to the O evel setting Optimization Item Optimization Level eve item nothing default size unroll inline inline_size delete_static_func pipeline tail_call map smap This o
108. jump library functions Library function This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the non local jump library functions LIBrary libsetjmp No Does not use the non local jump library functions 8 Register Mode The detailed information on register modes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Register mode Select the register mode number of registers used by the Compiler Ne of the software register bank function This corresponds to the Xreg_mode option of the ccrh command Default 32 register mode None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction 32 register mode None Sets the register mode to 32 22 register mode Sets the register mode to 22 Xreg_mode 22 Universal register mode Sets the register mode to 22 Xreg_mode common Use this item to generate the object module file that does not depend on the register mode Reserve r2 register Select whether to reserve the r2 register This corresponds to the Xreserve_r2 option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Reserves the r2 register and generates code that does not Xreserve_r2 use this register by the compiler N
109. linking No Does not display the total size of sections after the linking Display copyright Select whether to display copyright information information This corresponds to the LOgo and NOLOgo options of the rlink command This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Default No NOLOgo How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LOgo Displays copyright information No NOLOgo Suppresses the output of copyright information Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before link processing before link processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LinkedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under link processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder O
110. menu in the Output panel other items are all invalid Copy Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Select All Selects all the messages displayed on this panel Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Quick Find tab target Replace Context menu Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Replace in Files tab target Copy Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Select All Selects all the messages displayed on this panel Clear Deletes all the messages displayed on this panel Tag jump If there is information of the file name line and column on the caret line jumps to that location Help for Message Displays the help related to the message on the current caret position This only applies to warning messages and error messages R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 259 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Figure A 20 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type C source file c Header file h inc Assembly source file asm s fsy Python script file py Text file txt Empty C source file 2 Filename c L 3 File location D work sample The following items are explained here How to open Descriptio
111. more output file names are specified using the form absolute option and output option the debug information will not be output R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 433 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE NODEBug This option does not output the debug information Specification format NODEBug Interpretation when omitted The debug information is output to the output file It is the same result as when the debug option is specified Detailed description This option does not output the debug information This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Output debug information in the Debug Information category From the Create Library Options tab Output debug information in the Debug Information category Example of use Not to output the debug information describe as gt rlink a obj b obj nodebug output c abs Remark If the form object library hexadecimal stype binary strip option or extract option is specified this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 434 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE RECord This option specifies the size of the data record to be output Specification format RECord record Interpretation when omitted Various data records are output according to each address Detai
112. of file name is converted to and to Other than printable characters including spaces are output as 3 digit octal number e g 030 Line feed characters are converted to n If an input source file contains the preprocessor directive number string or line number string then number is used as line number and string as file name An error will occur if string is omitted It is output in the standard character encoding of the OS This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output C source comments to preprocessed file Output line number information to preprocessed file in the Preprocess category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output C source comments to preprocessed file Output line number information to preprocessed file in the Preprocess category Example of use To output the comments and line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file describe as The following example is equivalent to the example above R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 352 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 353 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE C language control The C language control options are as follows Xansi Xenum_type Xvolatile Xcheck Xmisra2004
113. of the compile result for the C source R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 ztENESAS Page 233 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for Specify the folder which the assembly source file is output assembly source file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name The assembly source file is saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by asm If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xasm_path option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_path in the Output assembly source file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output preprocessed Select whether to output the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file source file This corresponds to the P option of the cerh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select
114. of the rlink command Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the hex file Default No Does not output the hex file Hex file format Select the format of the hex file to be output This corresponds to the FOrm option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default Motorola S record file FOrm Stype How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Intel HEX file FOrm Hexadecimal Outputs an Intel HEX file Motorola S record file FOrm Stype Outputs a Motorola S record file Binary file FOrm Binary Outputs a binary file Output folder Specify the folder which the hex file is output If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the instal
115. omitted Compilation is performed without displaying the version information of ccrh Detailed description This option outputs the version information of ccrh to the standard error output It does not execute compilation Example of use To output the version information of ccrh to the standard error output describe as gt ccrh V Xcommon v850e3v5 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 334 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE h This option displays the descriptions of ccrh options Specification format Interpretation when omitted The descriptions of ccrh options are not displayed Detailed description This option outputs the descriptions of ccrh options to the standard error output It does not execute compilation Example of use To output the descriptions of ccrh options to the standard error output describe as gt ccrh h Xcommon v850e3v5 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 335 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output file specification The output file specification options are as follows 0 Xobj_path Xasm_path Xprep_path 0 This option specifies the output file name Specification format Interpretation when omitted The output file name differs depending on the specificated option The file is output to the current folder When the P option is specifi
116. option deletes the definition of the preprocessor macro or assembler symbol by the D option This option specifies the folder to search include files Xpreinclude This option specifies the file that is included at the top of the compilation unit Xpreprocess This option controls outputting the result of preprocessing R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 331 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Classification C language conirol APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description This option processes as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard Xenum_type This option specifies which integer type the enumeration type handles Xvolatile This option specifies external variables as volatile Xcheck This option checks the compatibility of a C source file Xmisra2004 This option checks source code against the MISRA C 2004 rules Xignore_files_misra This option specifies files that will not be checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules Xcheck_language_extention This option enables the source code checking of the MISRA C 2004 rules which are partially suppressed by language extensions Japanese Chinese character control Xcharacter_set This option specifies the Japanese Chinese character code Optimization specification R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 O This option specifies the optimization level or the
117. option is specified Motorola S record file Note 2 Load module file converted into the Motorola S record This file is output when the XIk_option form stype option is specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 323 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 File Type Binary file Extension cbinNote 1 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description Load module file converted into the binary format This file is output when the XIk_option form binary option is specified Symbol address file Assembly source file where external defined symbols are described in assembler directives This file is output when the Xlk_option fsymbol option is specified Link map fileNote 2 List file which has information from the link result This file is output when the Xlk_option list option is specified Library list fileNote 2 List file which has information from the library creation result This file is output when the Xlk_option list option is specified Stack information file List file which has information of the stack capacity This file is output when the Xlk_option stack option is specified External symbol allocation information file External variable allocation information file used by the compiler in optimizing access to external variables This file is output when the Omap option is specified Static analysis information file Information file which thi
118. or when Yes To adjust the level of optimization in the Perform inline expansion property and Speed Precedence Ospeed in the Optimization Level property are selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 0 to 65535 decimal number Perform pipeline optimization Select whether to improve the program s execution performance by reordering instructions at the machine language level This corresponds to the Opipeline option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Performs optimization according to the Level of optimization property Yes Opipeline Performs pipeline optimization No Opipeline off Does not perform pipeline optimization R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 223 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Use jr instruction to call a function at the end of the function APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to give precedence to using jr instructions in the place of jarl instructions when the function ends with a function call This corresponds to the Otail_call option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes To adjust
119. order specification file If a file with the same name exists check the location of the file in the popup display after installing the link order specification file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 63 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Edit the link order specification file Open the link order specification file with a editor and then change the description order of the file names The code example of the link order specification file is shown below CubeSuite Vx xx xx Link order specification file SampleProject XXXXXX XX XXXX file01 obj file03 obj library02 lib file02 obj library01 lib library03 1lib The following points should be noted when describing the link order specification file Describe one file name on one line Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the file name If the line begins with the line is interpreted as a comment A space or tab is ignored c Import the link order specification file Click the Import button in the Link Order dialog box to open the Select Import File dialog box Figure 2 90 Select Import File Dialog Box Select Import File Look in sample DefaultBuild l 4 E LinkOrder mtls My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents 9 My Computer e File name 3 i My Network Files of type Link order specification file mtls In the dialog box selec
120. paths which the system set during assembling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the option of the ccrh command The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Macro definition Specify the name of the macro to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be om
121. point address XX YYYYYY SS NL 4 5 S8 1 2 3 Number Description 1 Fixed at S8 Record length Entry point address 24 bits 0x0 to OxFFFFFF Checksum Newline R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 108 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 6 8 S9 record This indicates the entry point address S9 XX YYYY SS NL 1 2 3 4 5 Description Fixed at S9 Record length Entry point address 16 bits 0x0 to OxFFFF Checksum Newline R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 109 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This appendix explains windows panels dialog boxes used in build process A 1 Description The following lists the windows panels dialog boxes used in build process Table A 1 Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description This is the first window to be opened when CubeSuite is launched Main window List of Windows Panels Dialog Boxes Project Tree panel This panel is used to display the project components in tree view Property panel This panel is used to display the detailed information on the Build tool node file or category node that is selected on the Project Tree panel and change the settings of the information Editor panel This panel is used to display and edit text files and source files
122. project From the Build menu select Update Dependencies of active projecil Figure 2 13 Update Dependencies of active project Item Build Project F Rebuild Project Shift F7 amp ma E Clean Project Rapid Build Update Dependencies Build sample SO se Rebuild sample ag Update Dependencies of sample A Stop Build trl F7 THe Build Mode Settings a T a val amp El Batch Build Ty Build Option List Remark _ If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when updating file dependencies then all these files are saved Dependency files include files can be displayed under the source file on the project tree R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 21 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 14 Project Tree Panel After Displaying Dependency File Project Tree B LR sample Project R7F70103524FP Microcontroller A CC RH Build Tool S RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool T Ce Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a Ei File The display of the dependency files is updated on the following timings When the first build is run after the project is loaded When on the toolbar is clicked When Update Dependencies is selected from the Build menu When Update Dependencies of active project is selected from the Build menu Remarks 1 The display of dependency files is valid only when the Show dependen
123. project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder BuildModeName is set by default b Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Output file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name ProjectName mot is set by default 2 Set the hex file format Select the format in the Hex file format property in the Hex Format category Figure 2 68 Hex file format Property Unify record size Output 9 record at the end No You can select any of the formats below Format Configuration Intel HEX file FOrm Hexadecimal Outputs an Intel HEX file Motorola S record file FOrm Stype Outputs a Motorola S record file Binary file FOrm Binary Outputs a binary file Remark See 3 5 Intel HEX File and 3 6 Motorola S record File for details about the Intel Hex fil
124. property and a rule number is specified in the Rule number property When Ignore specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Rule number property When Apply rules that are classified as required and specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Check rule number besides required rule property When Ignore specified rule number from rules that are classified as required is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Exclusion rule number from required rule property When Apply rules that are described in the specified file is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number description file is specified in the Rule number description file property Default Rule check exclusion file number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button gt Edit by the Add Excluding File dialog box which appears when clicking the Browse button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 171 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output message of the Select whether to output the message of the enhanced key word and extended specifications enhanced key word and This c
125. running a build that targets a specific project main project or subproject you must set that project as the active project Caution The active project will be the debug target Note that the active project cannot be set during connection with the debug tool be sure to disconnect the debug tool before setting the active project To set the active project select the main project or subproject to be set as the active project on the project tree and select Set selected subproject as Active Project from the context menu R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 66 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 93 Set selected project as Active Project Item on R7F7010352 El Build sample A CC RH Build Rebuild sample SS RH850 EL LPL ra p Program Anal E g File BE Open Folder with Explorer a Windows Explorer Menu LA Clean sample Add gt th Set sub as Active Project Ra Remove from Project Shift Del Fy Paste Ctrl aj Rename F2 iT Z Property When a project is set as the active project that project is underlined Figure 2 94 Active Project Project Tree Fi sample Project R7F70103524FP Microcontroller A CC RH Build Tool RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool Program Analyzer Analyze Tool AFP Microcontroller A CC RH Build Tool RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 4 Ei File Remarks 1 Immediat
126. sections are left in the section group the section group itself is deleted When selecting a section in this area Deletes the selected section from this area If no sections are left in the section group the section group itself is deleted If no section names are left in the Overlayn column the column itself is deleted Note that this button is disabled when the selected sell is blank Moves up the selected section Note that this button is disabled when an address is selected Moves down the selected section Note that this button is disabled when an address is selected Opens the Select Import File dialog box Acquires the section settings from the file specified in the dialog box and updates this area to reflect the acquired settings Opens the Select Export File dialog box Outputs the contents of this area to the file specified in the dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 278 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the specified section to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 279 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Section dialog box Modify Section dialog box Add
127. select the target project file for importing the build options Figure A 43 Import Build Options Dialog Box Import Build Options 1 4 Look in sample 4 BD DefaultBuild 4 sub My Recent sample mtpj Documents Desktop A My Documents My cares 3 s ile name E on _ Project File mp Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node and then select Import Build Options from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the target project file for importing the build options exists The current project folder is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 301 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Specify the name of the project file 4 Files of type area Select the type of the project file Project file mtpj Project file Subproject file mtsp Subproject file Function buttons Open Imports the build options of the specified project file to the current project Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Pag
128. selected Default Commands executed after link processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the link option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the link options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 198 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Hex Output Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the Hex output phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Output File 2 Hex Format 3 Others Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure A 8 Property Panel Hex Output Options Tab Property A CC RH Property E Output File Output hex file Yes Output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectName mot Division output file Division output file 0 E Hex Format Hex file format Motorola S record file FOrm Stype Unify record size No Output 9 record at the end No Others Output hex file
129. set the option that differs from the project settings to the selected C source file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 218 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Set individual assemble Select whether to set the assemble option that differs from the project settings to the selected option assembly source file If Yes Level 3 Perform with assuming it the whole program Xwhole_program is selected in the Perform inter module optimization property in the Optimization Details category from the Compile Options tab this property will be grayed out and changed to No This property is displayed only when the assembly source file is selected on the project tree and Yes in the Set as build target property from this tab is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Sets the option that differs from the project settings to the selected assembly source file No Does not set the option that differs from the project settings to the selected assembly source file File type The type of the selected file is displayed Default C source file when the C source file is selected Assembly source file when the assembly source file is selected Object file when the object file is selected Library file when the library file is selected How to change Changes not allowed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS P
130. space below the project tree The Add Folder and File dialog box will open Remark You can also add multiple folders to the project at the same time by dragging multiple folders at same time and dropping them onto the project tree Caution When the folder with the name that is more than 200 characters is dropped the folder is added to the project tree as a category with the name that 201st character and after are deleted R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 14 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 3 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file c Header file h inc Assembly source file asm s fsy Library file lib Object file obj Relocatable file rel Python script file py Text file txt Subfolder level to search In the dialog box select the types of the files to be added to the project and specify the number of levels of the subfolder to be added to the project And then click the OK button Remark You can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected The folder is added below the File node Note that on the project tree the folder is the category Remark When the category node created by the user exists you can add a file below the node by dropping the fil
131. the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Auto None Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS SJIS Xcharacter_set sjis Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS EUC Xcharacter_set euc_jp Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as EUC UFT 8 Xcharacter_set utf8 Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as UFT 8 Big5 Xcharacter_set big5 Interprets the Chinese character code in the source file as Traditional Chinese GB2312 Interprets the Chinese character code in Xcharacter_set gb231 2 the source file as Simplified Chinese No process Does not interpret the Japanese Chinese Xcharacter_set none character code in the source file The detailed information on output codes is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 246 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use 32 bit branch instruction 5 Output File Select whether to use the far jump function for the jarl and jr instructions By using the far jump function it is assumed that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 and jr32
132. the Output Code category is selected the C source program that corresponds to the assembly source program is output as comments in the assemble list file 2 Command line When the Xprn_path option is specified the assemble list file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn Also the output folder and file name can be specified by the parameter of the Xprn_path option If the Xpass_ source option is specified at the same time the C source program that corresponds to the assembly source program is output as comments in the assemble list file 3 1 1 Structure of the assemble list The structure and contents of the assemble list are shown below Output Information Description Assemble list Location counter value code line number and source program under assembly Section list Type size and name of section Command line information Character string of command line of assembler R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 83 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 1 2 Assemble list The location counter value code line number and source program under assembly is output The output example of the assemble list is shown below SOURCE STATEMENT 00000000 Compiler RH850 Assembler Source 00000000 CC RH Version VX XX XXx DD Mmm YYY 00000000 Command main c Xcommon v850e3v5 S 00000000 compiled at Sun Jan 1 00 00 00 2012 00000000 cseg text
133. the build mode to be duplicated from the build mode list and click the Duplicate button The Character String Input dialog box will open Figure 2 96 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input String BuildMode2 In the dialog box enter the name of the build mode to be created and then click the OK button The build mode with that name will be duplicated The created build mode is added to the build modes of the main project and all the subprojects which belong to the project R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 68 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 97 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box After Adding Build Mode Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to All Build mode list 1 Duplicate DetantBruld BuildMode2 Delete Rename 2 Change the build mode Change the build mode to the newly created build mode see 2 11 7 Change the build mode 3 Change the setting of the build mode Select the build tool node on the project tree and change the build options and macro definition settings on the Property panel Remark Creating a build mode is regarded a project change When closing the project you will be asked to confirm whether or not to save the build mode 2 11 7 Change the build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the
134. the build option that is different from the standard option is set its property is displayed in boldface Import Build Options Opens the Import Build Options dialog box to import the build options from the selected project file Note Set Link Order Opens the Link Order dialog box to display object module files and library files to and set their link orders Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Property Note See 2 11 1 options Displays the selected build tool s property on the Property panel Import the build options of other project for details about the import function of the build 4 When the Files node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Add New File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default cate
135. the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after compile processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is
136. the extension replaced by Ibp 2 Command line When the form library or extract option is specified and the list option is specified the library list file is output to the current folder under the output file name with the extension replaced by lbp The output information for the library list file can be specified by specifying the show option at the same time See 3 4 1 Structure of the library list for details 3 4 1 Structure of the library list The structure and contents of the library list are shown below Output Information Description show Option When show Option Specification Is Omitted Option information Option strings specified by a command line or Output subcommand file Error information Error message Output Library information Library information Output Module section and symbol Module within the library Output mermaion NE nO Symbol names within a module show symbol No output Section names and symbol names within each show section No output module Caution The show option is valid when the list option is specified See SHow for details about the show option 3 4 2 Option information Option strings specified by a command line or subcommand file are output The output example of the option information when they are specified by a command line or subcommand file as follows is shown below lt Command line gt gt rlink subcommand test sub list show R20UT25
137. the file is dragged and dropped the multiple files that are next to each other can be selected together a Button Moves the selected file to up If any file is not selected this button will be disabled Moves the selected file to down If any file is not selected this button will be disabled Opens the Select Import File dialog box The description order of the file names are acquired from the selected link order specifica tion file and then they are reflected in File If nothing is displayed in File this button will be disabled Opens the Select Export File dialog box Outputs the list of the file names diaplayed in File to the specifiled link order specification file If nothing is displayed in File this button will be disabled Remark See 2 11 2 Set ithe link order of files for the method of using the link order specification file Function buttons Button Function OK Sets the input order of the files to the linker as the display order in File and closes this dia log box Cancel Cancels the link order settings and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 ztENESAS Page 288 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Figure A 37 Build Mode
138. the message that is output from the build tool Messages are shown individually on the tab categorized by the output tool Remark This panel can be zoomed in and out by 100 Mi in the tool bar or by moving the mouse wheel forward or backward while holding down the Ctrl key Figure A 19 Output Panel Start build all Friday February 15 Z013 1 39 38 PM Start build sample DefaultBuild gt sre main cl Renesas Optimizing Linker Completed Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 a Ended Success 1 Projects Failed 0 Projects Friday February 15 2013 1 39 39 PM J EOF 2 All Messages Rapid Build Build Tool The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu only available for the Output panel Edit menu only available for the Output panel Context menu How to open From the View menu select Output Description of each area 1 Message area This area displays messages output from each tool In build result display a new message is displayed deleting the previous message every time build is done but not the All Messages tab Remark Up to 500000 lines of messages can be displayed If 500001 lines or more of messages are output then the excess lines are deleted oldest first The message colors differ as follows depends on the type of the output message the character color background color is set in th
139. the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is displayed for the library project Figure 2 77 Property Panel Create Library Options Tab Property Ay CC RH Property E DebugInformaton Delete local symbol name information No E Input File Object file Object file 0 Output File Output file format User libraries FOrm Library U Output folder BuildModeName Output file name ProjectName lib E Library Using libraries Using libraries 0 System libraries System libraries 0 Use standard libraries No Delete local symbol name information Select whether to delete local symbol name information This option corresponds to the Hide option of the rink command Common Options Compile Options Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Create Library category on the Common Options tab 2 9 1 Set the output of a library file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output a library file is made with the Output File category Figure 2 78 Output File Category Output file format User libraries FOrm Library U Output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectN ame lib R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 55 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 2 3 Set the output format Select the format in the Output f
140. the tools in use The display of overlay icons is updated on the following timings When the project is loaded When E on the toolbar is clicked When Refresh is selected from the Edit menu Remark This function is valid only when this product is activated while the Show overlay icons for Windows Explorer in project tree checkbox in the General Display category of the Option dialog box is selected r Highlighting the category in which a shortcut to a folder is set The category in which a shortcut to a folder is set is highlighted as shown in the example below Ordinal category source Category in which a shortcut to a folder has been set fal source s Highlighting the project that has been changed The file component that is added to the project and the property of the project component are changed the we project name is followed by and is displayed in boldface The boldface is canceled when the project is saved The project that has not been changed E sample Project The project that has been changed E sample Project t Highlighting the active project The active project is underlined Non active project UR sample Project Active project sample Project u Updating the status of file highlighting The state of highlighting for files read only files non existent files and overlay icons is updated by the following procedure Select fe on the toolbar v Runni
141. the various options for the selected category For details about configuration for a particular category see the section for the category in question Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 295 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Build Debug category Use this category to configure general setting relating to building and debugging Figure A 41 Option Dialog Box General Build Debug Category General 3 Startup and Exit General Build Debug Display 1 ci ay a dtor LAY Enable Rapid Build External Tools If rapid build is selected the build is started when the edited source file is saved As a result the build is executed in parallel with editing When rapid Python Console build is selected we recommend saving a file with Ctrl S after the file edit is G Text Editor completed N Update 2 ELL Others gt Observe registered files changing 3 i C Show dependency files in project tree 4 gt
142. this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Error message file name Specify the error message file name The extension can be freely specified The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName err has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters 12 Warning Message The detailed information on warning messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed Undisplayed warning Specify the number of the warning message not to be displayed message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit the
143. to suppress the output of the message If there are references to constant symbols within the same file references are not correctly analyzed so that information notified by the output messages will be incorrect R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 443 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE BYte_count This option specifies the maximum byte count for a data record Specification format BYte_count num Interpretation when omitted An Intel HEX file is generated assuming that the maximum byte count is FF Detailed description This option specifies maximum byte count for a data record when a file num when an Intel HEX file Specify a one byte hexadecimal value 01 to FF as num This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Specify byte count for data record Maximum byte count for data record in the Hex Format category Example of use To specify 10 as the maximum byte count for a data record describe as gt rlink a obj b obj form hexadecimal byte_count 10 Remark When a generated file is not an Intel HEX file when the form hexadecimal option is not specified this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 444 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE PADDING This option fills in data at the end of a section Sp
144. type is to be changed to warning No Does not change the type of information messages Number of information message Specify the number of the information message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also a range of message numbers can be specified using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes Specify message number CHange_message Information lt Message number gt in the Change warning message to information message property is selected Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Default How to change Restriction Up to 2048 characters Change information and Select whether to change the type of information and warning messages to error warning message to error message This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All CHange_message Error Changes the type of all information and warning messages to error Yes Specify message number CHange_message Error lt Mes sage number gt Specifies the number of information or warning message of which type is to be changed to error No Does not change the type of information and
145. under assembling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after assemble processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after assemble processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters U
146. use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction When exporting the Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations It is the responsibility of the buyer or distributor of Renesas Electronics products who distributes disposes of or otherwise places the product with a third party to notify such third party in advance of the contents and conditions set forth in this document Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties as a result of unauthorized use of Renesas Electronics products This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics 2012 4 How to Use This Manual This manual describes the role of the CubeSuite integrated developm
147. value is omitted it is assumed that 4 has been specified If the Ospeed option is specified this item is assumed that the Ounroll 4 option is specified inline 0to3 Integer value Inline expansion for functions value signifies the level of the expansion 0 Suppresses all inline expansion including the function for which pragma inline is specified 1 Performs inline expansion for only a function for which pragma inline is specified 2 Distinguishes a function that is the target of expansion automatically and expands it 3 Distinguishes the function that is the target of expansion automatically and expands it while minimizing the increase in code size However if 1 to 3 is specified the function that is specified by pragma inline may not be expanded according to the content of the function and the status of compilation If value is omitted it is assumed that 2 has been specified This item is valid when the Osize or Ospeed option is specified when the Osize option is specified it is assumed that the Oinline 3 option has been specified When the Ospeed option is specified it is assumed that the Oinline 2 option has been specified If any of the Osize Ospeed or Oinline option is not specified this item is assumed that the Oinline 1 option is specified If the Onothing option is specified this item is assumed that the Oinline 0 option is specified inline_size 0 to 65535 Integer value
148. warning messages Number of information and warning message Specify the number of the information and warning message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also a range of message numbers can be specified using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes Specify message number CHange_message Error lt Message number gt in the Change warning message to information message property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 7tENESAS Page 213 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 7 Others Other detailed information on creating a library is displayed and the configuration can be changed Reduce memory occupancy Select whether to reduce the memory capacity This corresponds to the MEMory option of the rlink command This property is displayed only in the following cases When No in the Delete local symbol name information property in the Debug Information category is selected When User libraries FOrm Library U or System libraries FOrm Library S in the Output file format property in t
149. when the Omap or Osmap option is specified An error will occur if mode is omitted Example of use To fix the value of the ep register for the entire project describe as gt asrh Xep fix Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 416 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assembler control specification The assembler control specification option is as follows Xasm_far_jump Xasm_far_jump This option controls outputting far jump for an assembly source file Specification format Xasm_far_jump Interpretation when omitted Assembly is performed as a jarl or jr instruction Detailed description For an assembly source file this option assumes that all jarl and jr instructions described in the source are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and assembling is performed If you wish to control individual instructions add jarl22 jarl32 or jr22 jarl32 to the source This option does not affect the jump instruction If this option is specified for a C source file that will be ignored without outputting a warning This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Use 32 bit branch instruction in the Output Code category From the Assemble Options tab Use 32 bit branch instruction in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Use 32 bit branch in
150. when the offset value of the data record s load address exceeds the maximum value of Oxffff and a new segment is output 4 Record type Fixed at 02 5 Paragraph value of segment 6 Checksum 7 Newline 3 5 6 Data record This indicates the value of the code Description Record mark Note Number of bytes Location address Record type Fixed at 00 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 103 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Number Description Code Each byte of code is expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number Checksum Newline Note This is limited to the range of 0x1 to Oxff the minimum value for the number of bytes of the code indicated by one data record is 1 and the maximum value is 255 Example 04 0100 00 3C58E01B 6C NL 2 3 4 5 6 7 Number Description Record mark Number of bytes of 3C58E01B expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal numbers Location address Record type 00 Each byte of code is expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number Checksum The lower 1 byte of E6C which is the two s complement of 04 01 00 00 3C 58 E0 1B 194 is expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal number Newline n 3 5 7 End record This indicates the end of the code Description Record mark Fixed at 00 Fixed at 0000 Record type Fixed at 01 Fixed
151. which the code of switch statements is to be output The items that can be specified as type are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Outputs the code in the same format as the if else statement along a string of case statements Select this item if the case statements are written in the order of frequency or if only a few labels are used Because the case statements are compared starting from the top unnecessary comparison can be reduced and the execution speed can be increased if the case statement that most often matches is written first Outputs the code in the binary search format Searches for a matching case statement by using a binary search algorithm If this item is selected when many labels are used any case statement can be found at almost the same speed Outputs the code in a table jump format References a table indexed on the values in the case statements and selects and processes case labels from the switch statement values The code will branch to all the case statements with about the same speed However if case values are not used in succession an unnecessary area will be created If the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the case labels exceeds 8192 then this option is ignored and the optimum output format for each switch statement is selected automatically An error will occur if type is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in
152. with build modes Remark If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process on the Property panel from the Common Options tab in the Others category set the Commands executed before build processing and Commands executed after build processing properties If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process at the file level you can set R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 11 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS them from the Individual Compile Options tab for a C source file and Individual Assemble Options tab for an assembly source file 7 Save the project Save the setting contents of the project to the project file Remark See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start for details about saving the project 2 1 2 Create a user library The procedure for creating a user library is shown below 1 Create or load a project Create a new project or load an existing one When you create a new project set a library project Remark See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start for details about creating a new project or loading an existing one 2 Set a build target project Set a build target project see 2 11 Make Settings for Build Operations Remarks 1 If there is no subproject in the project the project is always active 2 When setting a build mode add the build mod
153. 0 9 20 10 20 11 20 12 An error will occur if string is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Apply rule Rule number description file Rule number Exclusion rule number Check rule number besides required rule and Exclusion rule number from required rule in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category From the Individual Compile Options tab Apply rule Rule number description file Rule number Exclusion rule number Check rule number besides required rule and Exclusion rule number from required rule in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category Example of use To check the source code against MISRA C 2004 rule number 5 2 5 3 and 5 4 describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 361 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xignore_files_misra This option specifies files that will not be checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules Specification format Interpretation when omitted All C source files are checked Detailed description This option does not check file file against the MISRA C 2004 rules This option is valid only when the Xmisra2004 option is specified If the Xmisra2004 option is not specified this option will be ignored A warning will not be output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab
154. 0 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Warning message output control The warning message output control options are as follows Xno_warning Xno_warning This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Specification format Xno_waning num num Xno_waning numl num2 Interpretation when omitted All warning messages are output Detailed description This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Specify the error numbers as num num1 and num2 If the error number that does not exist it will be ignored An error will occur if num num1 or num2 is omitted If num1 num2 is specified it is assumed that error numbers within the range have been specified The error number specified by this option is the rightmost 5 digits of the 7 digit number following the W See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Message for error numbers This option controls the warning messages of the compiler and assembler and does not control the messages of the optimizing linker This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Individual Assemble Options tab Undisplayed warning message in the Warning Message category Example of use To suppress outputting warning message W0550002 and W0550003 describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 419 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite
155. 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark The default order is the order that the files are added to the project Object module files generated from newly added source files and newly added object module files are added after the last object module file in the list Newly added library files are added to the end of the list 2 Change the file display order By changing the display order of the files you can set the input order of the files to the linker Change the file display order by one of the following procedures Move the file name by using the Up and Down buttons Drag and drop the file name Use a link order specification file Remark You can use a link order specification file to change the display order on a file basis The procedures for performing this operation are described below a Generate a link order specification file Click the Export button in the Link Order dialog box to open the Select Export File dialog box Figure 2 89 Select Export File Dialog Box Select Export File Save in sample DefaultBuild My Recent Documents File name 3 My Network Save as type Link order specification file mtls In the dialog box specify the file link order specification file that is output the list of the file names displayed in File in the Link Order dialog box Click the Save button to generate the link order specification file Caution Only the file names are output to the link
156. 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project On the Property panel if you add a change to the settings for the standard build options the value of the property will be displayed in boldface Figure 2 102 Property Panel After Changing Standard Build Option E Output File Type andPath Output file type Execute Module Hex File Output common object file for various devices Yes AASS architecture common common rh850 Specify CPU core Object for G3M lt cpu g3m Output cross reference information No Intermediate file output folder BuildModeN ame To make the build options for the currently selected project main project or subproject the standard build options remove the boldface select the Build tool node on the project tree and select Set to Default Build Option for Project from the context menu Figure 2 103 Set to Default Build Option for Project Item Ao CC RH Build Tool l RHBSO E1 LPD De GM Build Project F7 CD Program Analyzer GP Rebuild Project Shift F7 a File ed Clean Project pai Set to Default Build Option for Project Ww Import Build Options inh Set Link Order Property The values of the properties after setting them as the standard build option are as shown below Figure 2 104 Property Panel After Setting Standard Build Option E Output File Type andPath Output file type Execute Module Hex
157. 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output preprocessed Select whether to output the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file source file This corresponds to the P option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes P Outputs the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file No Does not output the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file Output folder for Specify the folder which the preprocessed source file is output preprocessed source file The file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by i If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xprep_path option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes P in the Output preprocessed source file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restric
158. 1 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder Specify the output folder The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the OUitput option of the rlink command Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output file name Specify the output file name If the extension is omitted it is automatically added according to the selection in the Output file format property When User libraries FOrm Library U is selected lib When System libraries FOrm Library S is selected lib When Relocatable file FOrm Relocate i
159. 1 LPD 0 CD Program Analyzer l E g File BE Open Folder with Explorer fe E sub Subproject E Windows Explorer Menu LA Clean sample Add gt hs Set samp s Active Proje PD Save Project and Development Tools as Package 44 Pa aj Rename F2 Property 2 12 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations CubeSuite can automatically start a build when one of the following events occurs hereafter referred to as rapid build When any one of the following files that are added to the project is updated C source file assembly source file symbol address file header file object file relocatable file and library file When a build target file has been added to or removed from the project When the link order of object module files and library files is changed When the property of the build tool or build target file is changed If a rapid build is enabled it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operations To enable disable a rapid build select Rapid Build from the Build menu A rapid build is enabled by default Figure 2 110 Rapid Build Item When a rapid build is valid When a rapid build is invalid Build Build fq Build Project F7 E Build Project F7 GF Rebuild Project Shift F7 a Rebuild Project Shift F7 a Clean Project a Clean Project ag Update Dependencies ay Update Dependencies a Build sample raji Build sample ra Rebuild sample H Rebuild s
160. 1 Set build options at the project level 57 2 10 2 Set build options at the file level 57 2 11 Make Settings for Build Operations 61 2 11 1 Import the build options of other project 61 2 11 2 Set the link order of files 62 2 11 3 Change the build order of subprojects 65 2 11 4 Display a list of build options 66 2 11 5 Change the build target project 66 2 11 6 Adda build mode 68 2 11 7 Change the build mode 69 2 11 8 Delete a build mode 71 2 11 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project 72 2 12 Runa Build 73 2 12 1 Runa build of updated files 75 2 12 2 Runa build of all files 75 2 12 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations 76 2 12 4 Run builds in batch with build modes 77 2 12 5 Compile assemble link multiple files simultaneously 78 2 12 6 Compile assemble individual files 79 2 12 7 Stop running a build 80 2 12 8 Save the build results to a file 80 2 12 9 Delete intermediate files and generated files 81 2 13 Estimate the Stack Capacity 82 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 83 3 1 Assemble List File 83 3 1 1 Structure of the assemble list 83 3 1 2 Assemble list 84 3 1 3 Section list 85 3 1 4 Command line information 85 3 2 Link Map File 86 3 2 1 Structure of link map 86 3 2 2 Option information 87 3 2 3 Error information 87 3 2 4 Link map information 88 3 2
161. 12 byte NOP instructions are text2 inserted immediately after section zero R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 448 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE List output The list output options are as follows LISt SHow LISt This option outputs the list file Specification format LISt file Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option outputs list file file An error will occur if the specification of the file name is omitted form library option or extract option Library list file Output file nameN lbp Other than above Link map file Output file nameN map Note If there are two or more output files this is the first input file name This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Output link map file in the List category From the Create Library Options tab Output link map file in the List category Example of use To output the link map file to file map describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 449 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE SHow This option specifies information that is output to the list file Specification format SHow info info Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option specifies information info that is output to the list
162. 2 abs describe as gt rlink a obj b obj output filel abs secl sec2 file2 abs sec3 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 437 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Remark If a input file is an Intel Hex file or Motorola S record file two or more output files cannot be specified by this option If this option is omitted the output file name will be first input file name_combine extension If the input file is a mot the output file will be a_combine mot R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 438 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE MAp This option outputs the external variable allocation information file Specification format MAp file Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option outputs external variable allocation information file file that is used by the compiler in optimizing access to external variables If the specification of the file name is omitted the file name is the one specified by the output option or first input file name bls If the order of the declaration of variables in the external variable allocation information file is not the same as the order of the declaration of variables found when the object was read after recompilation an error will occur This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Output externa
163. 24FP Microcontroller A CC RH Build Tool 2 RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool g File nerated files aom system asm lib user lib Remark The location of the file added below the File node depends on the current file display order setting See 2 3 5 Change the file display order for the method of changing the file display order Cautions 1 If the paths differ you can add source files with the same name Note however that if the setting of the output file name is left as the default the output files will have the same name which will prevent the build from running correctly for example when adding D sample1 func c and D sample2 func c the default output file name for these files is both func ob j To avoid this problems set the output file name for each of those files to a different name with the individual build options for the source files Changing the name of the C source file is made with the Object module file name property in the Output File category from the Individual Compile Options tab The changing the name of the assembly source file is made with the Object file name property in the Output File category from the Individual Assemble Options tab See 2 10 2 Set build options at the file level for how to set the individual build options 2 If source files with the same name are added the target file cannot opened during debugging 3 Up to 5000 files can be added to t
164. 3 First Edition issued CubeSuite V2 01 00 User s Manual RH850 Build Publication Date Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation tENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 01 Nicholson Road Newmarket Ontario L3Y 9C3 Canada Tel 1 905 898 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628 651 700 Fax 44 1628 651 804 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 D sseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 65030 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 204 205 AZIA Center No 1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd Pudong District Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5877 1818 Fax 86 21 6887 7858 7898 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2886 9318 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan
165. 85EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 96 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS lt Subcommand file test sub gt form library input extmod1 input extmod2 output usrlib lib Options subcommand test sub form library input extmod1 input extmod2 output usrlib lib list show Number Description Options specified by command line The options specified by the command line are output in their specified order Options specified in subcommand file The options specified in subcommand file test sub are output 3 4 3 Error information Messages for errors or warnings are output The output example of the error information is shown below Error Information F0561200 Backed up file samplel lib into usrlib 1bk Message The message is output 3 4 4 Library information The type of the library is output The output example of the library information is shown below R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 97 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS xxx Library Information LIBRARY NAME usrlib lib CPU RH850 ENDIAN Little ATTRIBUTE user NUMBER OF MODULE 2 Description Library name The library name is output Microcontroller name The microcontroller name is output Endian type The endian type is output Library file attribute Either a system library or user library is output Numbe
166. Brary Link option 425 Library list file 96 Error information 97 Library information 97 Module section and symbol information within the library 98 Option information 96 Structure of the library list 96 Link map file 86 Cross reference information 90 Error information 87 Link map information 88 Option information 87 Structure of link map 86 Symbol information 89 Total section size 88 Link Map File When Objects Are Combined 92 Address overlap information 95 Combined address information 94 Entry information 94 Error information 94 Header information 93 Option information 93 Structure of link map 92 Link Order dialog box 287 LISt Link option 449 LOgo Link option 472 Main window 112 MAp Link option 439 MEMory Link option 462 Message Link option 441 Modify Section dialog box 280 Motorola S record file 105 SO record 106 S1 record 107 S2 record 107 S3 record 107 S7 record 108 S8 record 108 S9 record 109 Structure of the Motorola S record file 105 MSg_unused Link option 443 N NOCOmpress Link option 461 NODEBug Link option 434 NOLOgo Link option 473 NOMessage Link option 442 0 o Assemble option 404 O Compile option 365 o Compile option 336 Open with Program dialog box 315 Option
167. C O D aes Cp lt 5 D CENESAS CubeSuite V2 01 00 Integrated Development Environment User s Manual RH850 Build Target Device RH850 Family All information contained in these matenals including products and product specifications represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corp without notice Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corp through various means including the Renesas Electronics Corp website http www renesas com Renesas Electronics www renesas com Rev 1 00 Apr 2013 10 11 12 Notice Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included here
168. CE Commands executed after build processing Specify the command to be executed after build processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after build processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after build processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when c
169. Co Ltd 3F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel 886 2 8175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 80 Bendemeer Road Unit 06 02 Hyflux Innovation Centre Singapore 339949 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6213 0300 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 Jin Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 2013 Renesas Electronics Corporation and Renesas Solutions Corp Colophon 1 3 CubeSuite V2 01 00 tENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation R20UT2585EJ0100
170. Code Size Precedence Osize or Speed Precedence Ospeed in the Level of optimization property is selected Default Yes To adjust the level of optimization None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes To adjust the level Performs optimization according to the Level of of optimization None optimization property Yes Only specified Performs inline expansion at the location calling functions Oinline 1 the function for which pragma inline is specified Yes Auto detect Distinguishes the function that is the target of Oinline 2 inline expansion automatically and expands it Yes Auto detect without Distinguishes the function that is the target of code size increase inline expansion automatically and expands it Oinline 3 while minimizing the increase in code size No Oinline 0 Suppresses all inline expansion including the function for which pragma inline is specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 155 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Maximum increasing rate of inline expansion size APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the maximum increasing rate of the code size up to which inline expansion is performed Example When 100 is specified inline expansion will be applied until the code size increases by 100 becomes twice the initial size This corresponds to the Oinline_size option of the ccrh command This property i
171. CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Perform inter module optimization in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Perform inter module optimization in the Optimization Details category Example of use To perform inter module optimization on source files main c and sub c describe as gt ccrh Xintermodule Xwhole_ program Xcommon v850e3v5 main c sub c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 370 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xinline_strcpy This option performs inline expansion of standard library functions strcpy strcmp memcpy and memset calls Specification format Xinline_strcpy Interpretation when omitted Inline expansion of standard library functions strcpy strcmp memcpy and memset calls is not performed Detailed description This option performs inline expansion of standard library functions strcpy strcmp memcpy and memset calls This option can not be specified together with the Xpack option Inline expansion of strcpy is performed only when the second argument is a character string If this option is specified arrays and character strings are allocated automatically to 4 byte boundary area This improves the execution speed of the program to be generated but it increases the code size This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite
172. CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Reduce memory occupancy in the Others category From the Create Library Options tab Reduce memory occupancy in the Others category Example of use To reduce the memory occupancy describe as gt rlink a obj b obj memory low Remark In the following cases the specification of the memory low option will be invalid When the form absolute hexadecimal stype binary option and following options are specified at the same time Any of the compress delete rename map or stack options The list and show reference xreference options are specified at the same time When the formslibrary option and following options are specified at the same time Any of the delete rename extract hide or replace options When the form object relocate option and following options are specified at the same time extract option Some combinations of this option and the input or output file format are invalid See Table B 5 Relations Between Output Formats And Input Files Or Other Options for details R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 462 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE REName This option changes an external symbol name or a section name Specification format REName file namel name2 namel name2 module namel name2 namel name2 t file namel name2 namel name2 modul
173. EFERENCE Section start address Specify the start address of the section This corresponds to the STARt option of the rlink command Default VECT const text data 00000000 RESET 01000000 data R bss stack bss FEBF8000 How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Section Settings dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section that includes Specify the section including the startup function startup function Specify one section name per line When this property is specified the startup symbol called from the multi core boot loader is registered in the boot loader project This corresponds to the FSymbol option of the rlink command The section name is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed only for the project set in the Constituent application projects property from the Boot Loader tab for the Boot loader node Default Section that includes startup function number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65535 items can be specified Section that outputs Specify the section whose external defined symbols are output to a file external defined symbols Specify one section name per line to the file This corresponds to the FSymbol
174. ENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xprn_path option of the cerh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path Outputs the assemble list file No Does not output the assemble list file Output folder for Specify the folder which the assemble list file is output assemble list file The assemble list file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xprn_path option of the cerh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters
175. ENESAS Page 403 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output file specification The output file specification options are as follows 0 Xobj_path Xprn_path 0 This option specifies the output file name Specification format Interpretation when omitted The file is output to the current folder The output object file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by obj Detailed description This option specifies the object file name as file If file already exists it will be overwritten Even if this option is specified when a fatal error occurs the object file cannot be output An error will occur if two or more files are output An error will occur if file is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Individual Assemble Options tab Object file name in the Output File category Example of use To output the object file with sample obj as the file name describe as gt asrh osample obj Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 404 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xobj_path This option specifies the folder to save an object file generated during assembling Specification format Xobj_path path Interpretation when omitted The object file is saved under the source file name with the exte
176. ERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTRIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS WITH THE SOFTWARE R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 9 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 3 Features The features of CC RH are shown below High performance Advanced optimization is used applying inter module optimization as well as conventional optimization This allows you to generate code that has advantages in code size and execution speed and to reduce the compilation time High portability The C program check functions are provided to support migration from programs created for the existing compiler SuperH RISC engine C C compiler hereafter referred to as SHC Multifunctional Static analysis and other features are provided through linking to other components R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 10 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the build procedure using CubeSuite and about the main build functions 2 1 Overview This section describes how to create a load module and user library 2 1 1 Create a load module The procedure for creating a load module is shown below 1 C
177. Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel copied to the clipboard selected Copies the selected file or category node to the clipboard When the file name or category name is in editing the characters of the selection are Note that this menu is enabled when a file exclude the dependency files or category is inserted operation Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below the selected node on the project tree When the file name or category name is in editing the contents of the clipboard are Note that this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project when multiple files and category nodes are selected and when the build tool is in in operation When the file is selected the actual file name is also changed You can rename the selected project subproject file or category node Press the Enter key to confirm editing Press the ESC key to cancel editing When the selected file is added to other project that file name is also changed Note that this menu is enabled when a project subproject file exclude the dependency files or category node is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Apr 01 2013 Page 123 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu 1 When the Project node is selected Build active project Runs a build of the active pro
178. From the Compile Options tab Perform inline expansion of strcpy stremp memcpy memse t in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Perform inline expansion of strcpy stremp memcpy memset in the Optimization Details category Example of use To perform inline expansion of standard library functions strcpy strcmp memcpy and memset calls describe as gt ccrh Xinline_strcpy Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 371 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xmerge_string This option merges string literals Specification format Xmerge_ string Interpretation when omitted If the same string literals are included multiple times in the source file each will be allocated to a separate area Detailed description When the same string literals exist in the source file this option merges them and allocates to the one area The same string literals are allocated to the same area regardless of whether pragma section sconst const is specified However if a different section is specified the section to which the string literal is allocated will depend on the order of appearance in the source This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Merge string literals in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options
179. How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow Reference Outputs the number of symbol references No Does not output the number of symbol references Output cross reference Select whether to output the cross reference information information This corresponds to the SHow XReference option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Output link map file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow Xreference Outputs the cross reference information No Does not output the cross reference information Output total sizes of Select whether to output the total size of sections sections This corresponds to the SHow Total_size option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Output link map file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow Total_size Outputs the total sizes of sections separately for ROM allocated sections and RAM allocated sections Does not output the total size of sections 8 Section The detailed information on the section is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 191 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW R
180. Interpretation when omitted The structure packing is not performed Detailed description This option performs the structure packing If this option is specified struct members will not be aligned by their member types but rather code will be generated with alignment packed to the specified num bytes 1 2 or 4 can be specified as num An error will occur if any other item is specified This option can not be specified together with the Xinline_strcpy option If this option is specified when the structure packing is specified by the pragma directive in the C source the value specified by this option is applied to all structures until the first pragma directive appears After that the value of the pragma directive is applied Even after the pragma directive has appeared however the value specified by the option is applied if the default value is specified if the value of the packing by the pragma directive This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Structure packing in the Output Code category R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 376 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To generate code with struct member alignment packed to 1 byte describe as gt ccrh Xpack 1 Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 377 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B
181. M mapped section in the Section category Address range of memory type in the Verify category and Commands executed before link processing Commands executed after link processing in the Others category From the Hex Output Options tab Division output file in the Output File category From the Create Library Options tab Object file Binary file in the Input File category and Commands executed before create library processing Commands executed after create library processing in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options tab Include files at head of compiling units Macro definition Macro undefinition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before compile processing Commands executed after compile processing in the Others category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Macro definition Macro undefinition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before assemble processing Commands executed after assemble processing in the Others category From the File Information tab Memo in the Notes category From the Category Information tab Memo in the Notes category Description of each area 1 Text Edit texts in multiple lines By default the current value of the area that this dialog box is called from is reflected in this area Remark Up to 65535 lines and 65535 characters can be entered When the input violates any restri
182. NOP instructions are not inserted for a string of sections specified as being overlaid by the start option Examples 1 When option start A B E 400 C D F G 8000 is specified NOP instructions are not inserted between sections C D F and G and after the end code section because overlaid sections are specified 2 When a 128 byte or larger vacant area exists immediately after a section with size 0 NOP instructions are not inserted R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 447 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE End address 0x1100 Start address 0x1200 Start address 0x1300 ROM section texti Section with size 0 zero _ ROM section text2 A 256 byte vacant area exists NOP instructions are inserted immediately after ROM section text1 Although a 256 byte vacant area exists NOP instructions are not inserted immediately after section zero because its size is 0 3 NOP instructions are inserted when a 128 byte or larger vacant area including a section with size 0 exists immediately after a ROM section End address 0x1100 Start address 0x1100 ROM section texti Section with size 0 As a 256 byte vacant area including section zero with size 0 exists immediately after ROM section text1 zero 16 byte NOP instructions are inserted immediately after section text1 and Star address eer ee ROM section 1
183. Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category Description of each area 1 Path edit area Edit or add the path or file name including the path a Path One path per one line Edit or add the path or file name including the path by directly entering it The path or file name including the path can be designated in multiple lines Designate the path or file name including the path at a line By default the current contents of the text box that opened this dialog box are reflected in this area The path can be added by one of the following methods Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer The file names including the path can be added by one of the following methods Click the Browse button and then select the file in the Specify Far Jump File dialog box Click the Browse button and then select the file in the Add Excluding File dialog box Drag and drop the file using such as Explorer Caution If an extremely long absolute path is specified as a relative path an error could occur when clicking the OK button In this case designate the absolute path Remark Up to 10000 lines can be entered Up to the maximum characters that are limited by the Windows OS can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip Specify a path The line
184. Overlay dialog box These dialog boxes are used to set a section name when adding modifying or overlaying a section respectively Figure A 30 Add Section Dialog Box Add Section Section name 1 z i Function buttons Figure A 31 Modify Section Dialog Box Modify Section Section name TES 5 Function buttons 4 Figure A 32 Add Overlay Dialog Box Add Overlay Section name 1 ait ua The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 280 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open Add Section dialog box On the Section Settings dialog box select a section in the address section area and then click the Add button Modify Section dialog box On the Section Settings dialog box select a section in the address section area and then click the Modify button Add Overlay dialog box On the Section Settings dialog box click the New Overlay button Description of each area 1 Section name Specify the section name Directly enter the section name in the text box or select from the drop down list The following characters can be used only A Z a z 0 9 _ Wildcard characters can also be used Note that numeric characters 0 to 9 cannot be used at the beginning of a section name Th
185. ProjectName sample MicomT oolPath C Program Files Menta aire BAITTE ARTT lt Description n Absolute path of the active projec Active project name Build mode name a Absolute path of the main project Main project name Absolute path of the CubeSuite g aha T T INNA RE PENET BPN T PERPE PERENE A il gt Enter the include path per line in Path One path per one line You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 256 lines Remarks 1 This property supports placeholders If a line is double clicked in Placeholder the placeholder will be reflected in Path One path per one line 2 You can also specify the include path by one of the following procedures Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box Double click a row in Placeholder 3 Select the Include subfolders automatically check box before clicking the Browse button to add all paths under the specified one down to 5 levels to Path One path per one line If you click the OK button the entered include paths are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 33 Additional include paths Property After Adding Include Paths Additional include paths Additional include paths 2 0 1 System include paths Include files at head of compiling units LANC ProjectDir ystem include paths 0 Include files at head of compiling
186. RAM mapped section property in the Section category This reserves the RAM section with the same size as that of the ROM section and relocates the symbols defined in the ROM section to addresses in the RAM section Figure 2 49 ROM to RAM mapped section Property E Section Section start address VECT const text data 00000000 RESET 01000000 data F t Section that outputs external defined symbols to the Section that outputs external defined symbols to the file O ion alignmen ion alionmen aj ROM to RAM mapped section ROM to RAM mapped section 1 data data F If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 41 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 50 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Text data data R user01 text user01 text A user02 text user02 text A user03 text user03 text A user 1 text userl 1 text R user 2 text userl 2 text R user 3 text userl 3 text A user01 data user01 data R user02 data user02 data R user03 data user03 data R aK Cere tee Enter the section name in Text in the format of ROM section name RAM section name with one section name per line You can specify up to 32767 characters per line up to 65535 lines If you click the OK button the entered section names are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 51 ROM to RAM mapped section Property
187. ROM Sections Are Added Section Settings Address 0x00000000 Section VECT const text data 000001000 0x01 000000 OxFEBF8000 RESET data F bss stack bss For other ROM sections set addresses and section names in the same way Remark Click the Address column and click the Add button to open the Section Address dialog box allowing you to add a new address Figure 2 58 Section Settings Dialog Box After Multiple ROM Sections Are Added Section Settings Address Section data 000001000 userO1 text 000001100 user02 text 000001 200 user03 text 000001 300 user 1 text 0x00001 400 user 2 text 000001500 user 3 text 000001600 user01 data 000001700 000001800 001000000 user02 data user03 data RESET R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Page 45 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 2 gt Set RAM sections overlaid sections Click an added address and click the Add button to open the Section Address dialog box Figure 2 59 Section Address Dialog Box Section Address Address FEBF8000 Enter in Address the address of the RAM section to be added and click the OK button to add the entered address to Address in the Section Settings dialog box Figure 2 60 Section Settings Dialog Box After RAM Section Addresses
188. Save as type area This area displays the following file type a In the Link Order dialog box Link order specification file mtls Link order specification file b In the Section Settings dialog box Section information file hsi Section information file Function buttons Save Outputs the file with the designated name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 320 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE This section describes the detailed specifications of each command included in the build tool CC RH B 1 Overview CC RH generates files executable on the target system from source programs described in C language or assembly language CC RH consists of the following commands A single driver ccrh controls all phases from compilation to linking ccrh Compilation driver start command asrh Assembler start command asrh Optimizing linker start command Processing of each command is shown below 1 Compiler ccrh Performs processing of preprocess directives comment processing and optimization for a C source program and then generates an assembly source file 2 Assembler asrh Converts an assembly source program into machine language instructions and then generates a relocatable object file 3 Optimizing linker rlink Links an object file and library file and then generates an executable object file
189. Selects whether to output a hex file This option corresponds to the FOrm option of the rink command Common Options lt Compile Options Link Options Description of each category 1 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output hex file Select whether to output the hex file This corresponds to the FOrm option of the rlink command Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the hex file Default No Does not output the hex file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 199 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder Specify the folder which the hex file is output If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder o
190. This option defines undefined symbol symbol1 forcedly as external defined symbol symbol2 or numerical value value Specify value in hexadecimal If the specified value starts with a character from A to F symbols are searched first and if corresponding symbol is not found the value is interpreted as a numerical value Values starting with 0 are always interpreted as numerical values If the specified symbol name is a C variable name add _ at the head of the definition name in the program This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Symbol definition in the Input File category Example of use To define _sym1 as the same value as external defined symbol data describe as gt rlink define _syml data a obj b obj To define _sym2 as 0x4000 describe as gt rlink define _sym2 4000 a obj b obj Remark If the form object relocate library option is specified this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 428 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ENTry This option specifies the execution start address Specification format ENTry symbol address Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option defines execution start address with external defined symbol symbol or address address Specify address in hexadecimal If the specified value star
191. UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Specify the vector number of the fetrap instruction generated when the OV flag is 1 This corresponds to the Xcheck_div_ov option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xcheck_div_ov in the Generate OV flag check code in division operation property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 1 to 15 decimal number 2tENESAS Page 231 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Generate product sum operation instruction APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to generate product sum operation instructions fmaf s fmsf s fnmaf s and fnmsf s for single precision floating point product sum operations This corresponds to the Xuse_fmaf option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Generates product sum operation instructions for single Xuse_fmaf precision floating point product sum operations Specifying this option will accelerate the execution speed but change the operation precision No Does not generate product sum operation instructions Check invalid exception in cmpf instruction Select whether to generate code by using the comparison condition for generating an invalid operation exception when any of the comparison values is a not a number in float
192. UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 254 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add memos to the category of files Add one item in one line The specified memo is displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 255 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Editor panel This panel is used to display and edit text files and source files See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual RH850 Coding for details about this panel Figure A 18 Editor Panel f main c 3 BS anan Columns Line ti 1o o ee 12 13 Abstract 14 a This function implements main function 15 16 Parameters 17 None 18 e 19 Returns 20 e 21 22 sa 23 24 p main void 25 B 26 E Start user code Do not edit comment generated here 27 28 int local_a local_b local_c 29 int result 30 unsigned long i 21 lt gt R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 256 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output panel This panel is used to display
193. V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE DELete This option deletes an external symbol name or a library module Specification format DELete file symbol symbol module file symbol symbol module Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option deletes external symbol name symbol or library module module Symbol names or modules in specific file file can be deleted When a C variable name or C function name is specified add _ at the head of the definition name in the program If there are two or more files with the same name the priority depends on the input order When a symbol is deleted using this option the object is not deleted but the attribute is changed to the internal symbol Example of use To delete symbol name _sym1 in all the files describe as gt rlink a obj delete _sym1 To delete symbol name _sym2 in b obj describe as gt rlink a obj b obj delete b obj _sym2 Remark If this option is specified together with the extract option or strip option this option will be invalid When the form library option is specified library modules can be deleted When the form absolute relocate hexadecimal stype binary option is specified external symbols can be deleted Operation is not guaranteed if this option is used in combination with compile option Xmerge_files R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS P
194. ab Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from the Compile Options tab Paths displayed in the System include paths property from the Compile Options tab When No in the Build simultaneously property is selected the include paths are added by the following procedure Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from this tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from the Assemble Options tab Paths displayed in the System include paths property from the Assemble Options tab This corresponds to the l option of the ccrh command Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Assembles using the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used No Does not use the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used Macro definition Specify the name of the macro to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the ccrh command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble
195. acros DetaultBuild C sample BuildMode2 sub DefaultBuild C sub BuildMode2 In the dialog box the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project and their build modes and macro definitions is displayed Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and build modes that you wish to run a batch build and then click the Build Rebuild or Clean button Remark The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 77 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 5 Compile assemble link multiple files simultaneously If there are multiple build target files you can compile assemble and link all files simultaneously with a single ccrh command call hereafter referred to as simultaneous build An image of calling the ccrh command is shown below Example When build target files are aaa c bbb c and ccc c When a build is run simultaneously gt ccrh Xcommon v850e3v5 aaa c bbb c ccc c lt aaa abs is generated When a build is not run simultaneously gt ccrh Xcommon v850e3v5 aaa c lt aaa obj is generat
196. ad module file by compiling assembling linking multiple files simultaneously The files with the individual build options and files to be executed prior to the build are excluded from runing a build simultaneously See 2 12 5 Compile assemble link multiple files simultaneously for details about runing a build simultaneously Default How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Compiles assembles and links multiple files simultaneously The assembly source file except the file with the individual options is assembled using the settings of the Compile Options tab No Compiles assembles and links for each file Handling the source file Selects whether to recompile assemble the source file if there are no files that include it includes non existing file Default Re compile assemble the source file How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Re compile assemble the Recompiles assembles the source file if there source file are no files that include it Ignore re compiling Does not recompile assemble the source file assembling the source file even if there are no files that include it 12 Version Select The detailed information on the build tool version is displayed and the configuration can be changed Using compiler package The folder in which the compiler package to be used is installed is displayed install folder Default Install folder name
197. age 219 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Individual Compile Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on a C source file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Common Options tab and Compile Options tab When the settings are changed from these tabs the properties are displayed in boldface Debug Information Optimization Optimization Details Preprocess 5 C Language Character Encoding Output Code Output File Assemble List 0 MISRA C 2004 Rule Check 1 Error Output 2 Warning Message 3 Others Remark This tab is displayed only when Yes in the Set individual compile option property in the Build category from the Build Settings tab is selected R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 220 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 14 Property Panel Individual Compile Options Tab Property c main c Property E Debuginformation Add debug information Yes g E Optimization Level of optimization Default Optimization None E Optimization D etads Maximum number of loop expansions Remove unused static functions Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Perform pipeline optimization Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Use jr instruction to call a function at the end of the function Y
198. age 464 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE REPlace This option replaces library modules Specification format REPlace file module module file module module Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option replaces specified file file or library module module with the module having the same name in the library file specified by the library option Example of use To replace file1 obj with module file1 in library file lib1 lib describe as gt rlink library libl lib replace filel obj form library To replace module mdl1 with module mdl1 in library file lib1 lib describe as gt rlink library lib1 1lib 1lib2 lib replace lib1 lib mdl1 form library Remark If the form object relocate absolute hexadecimal stype binary option and the extract or strip option is specified this option will be invalid Operation is not guaranteed if this option is used in combination with compile option Xmerge_files R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 465 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE EXTract This option extracts library modules Specification format EXTract module module Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option extracts library module module from the library file specified by the library option E
199. age 58 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 When setting assemble options for an assembly source file Select the assembly source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel Select Yes in the Set individual assemble option property in the Build category The Message Dialog Box When A Build Is Run Simultaneously or Message Dialog Box When A Build Is Not Run Simultaneously will open Figure 2 82 Set individual assemble option Property E Build L i OLANE Set individual assemble option Yes v Question Q0293006 p Are you sure you want to set the current compile options to the individual P assemble options for all build modes If No is selected copy the current build mode options only Figure 2 84 Message Dialog Box When A Build Is Not Run Simultaneously Question Q0293004 Are you sure you want to set the current assemble options to the individual assemble options for all build modes If No is selected copy the current build mode options only Click Yes in the dialog box The Individual Assemble Options tab will be displayed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 59 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 85 Property Panel Individual Assemble Options Tab Property asm system s Property E Debug Information Add debug information Yes g El Preprocess Additional in
200. alid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 456 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Subcommand file specification The subcommand file specification option is as follows SUbcommand SUbcommand This option specifies options with a subcommand file Specification format SUbcommand file Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option specifies options with subcommand file file Option contents specified with a subcommand file are expanded to the location at which this option is specified on the command line and are executed See B 4 2 Subcommand file usage for details about a subcommand file Example of use Create subcommand file test sub with the following content input file2 obj file3 obj This is a comment library libl lib amp This is a line continued lib2 lib To specify subcommand file test sub describe as gt rlink filel obj subcommand test sub file4 obj The command line is expanded as follows and the file input order is file1 obj file2 obj file3 obj file4 obj gt rlink filel obj file2 obj file3 obj library lib1 1lib 1lib2 lib file4 obj R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 457 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Other options are as follows S9 STACk COmpress NOCOmpress MEMory REName DELete REPlace EXTract STRi
201. alog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 268 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Path Edit dialog box APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This dialog box is used to edit or add the path or file name including the path Figure A 25 Path Edit Dialog Box When Editing Path Function buttons Function buttons R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Path Edit Path One path per one line iF Browse C Permit non existent path C Include subfolders automatically Placeholder Placeholder ActiveProjectDir ActiveProjectN ame BuildModeN ame MainProjectDir MainProjectN ame Value D work sample sample DefaultBuild D work sample sample C Program Files eee FC T ee Path Edit Path One path per one line iF Description Absolute path of the active projec Active project name Build mode name Absolute path of the main project Main project name Absolute path of the CubeSuite ALw hae 2 at C a 222 ae P M EA gt Browse C Permit non existent path Placeholder Value D work sample sample DefaultBuild D work sample sample C Program Files D work sample Placeholder ActiveProjectDir ActiveProjectN ame BuildModeN ame MainProjectDir MainProjectName MicomT oolPa
202. alysis information file is only saved for the last source file to be specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Output cross reference information in the Output File Type and Path category Example of use To output the static analysis information file as file name info cref describe as gt ccrh Xcref info cref Xcommon v850e3v5 main cs R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 394 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error output control The error output control options are as follows Xerror_file Xerror_file This option outputs error messages to a file Specification format Xerror_ file file Interpretation when omitted Error messages are output to only the standard error output Detailed description This option outputs error messages to the standard error output and file file If file already exists it will be overwritten An error will occur if file is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Output error message file Error message file output folder Error message file name in the Error Output category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output error message file Error message file output folder Error message file name in the Error Output category Example of use To outpu
203. ame MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the option of the ccrh command The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed ztENESAS Page 159 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Include files at head of Specify the file that is included at the top of the compilation unit compiling units The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces w
204. ame per line If multiple section names are specified delimit them with a colon as in file name section name section name Specify the start address and end address in hexadecimal You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 65535 lines If you click the OK button the entered division output file names are displayed as subproperties R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 52 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 71 Division output file Property After Setting Division Output File Names E Output File Output hex file Yes Output folder BuildModeN ame s S I E e name Proecth ame mo file abs secl sec2 file2 abs 1 0000 1 ffff To change the division output file names you can use the button or enter them directly in the text box of the subproperty 2 Set the method for filling the vacant area Set the method for filling the vacant area in the output range a Fill the vacant area with random numbers Select Yes Random SPace Random in the Fill unused areas in the output ranges with the value property in the Hex Format category Figure 2 72 Fill unused areas in the output ranges with the value Property E Hex Format Hex file format Motorola S record file FOrm Stype b Specify data to fill the vacant area Select Yes Specification value SPace lt Numerical value gt in the Fill unused areas in the output ranges with the value property
205. ample p Clean sample p Clean sample ag Update Dependencies of sample ag Update Dependencies of sample T Build Mode Settings T Build Mode Settings T Batch Build El Batch Build TP Build Option List Ty Build Option List R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 76 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 After editing source files it is recommend to save frequently by pressing the Ctrl S key 2 Enable Disable setting of the rapid build applies to the entire project main project and subprojects 3 Ifyou disable a rapid build while it is running it will be stopped at that time Caution This function will also be enabled in an external text editor if the Observe registered files changing checkbox is selected in the Build Debug category of the Option dialog box 2 12 4 Run builds in batch with build modes You can run builds rebuilds and cleans in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has hereafter referred to as batch build Remark See the sections below for a build rebuild and clean Build See 2 12 1 Run a build of updated files Rebuild See 2 12 2 Runa build of all files Clean See 2 12 9 Delete intermediate files and generated files Select Batch Build from the Build menu The Batch Build dialog box will open Figure 2 111 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Project Build mode Defined m
206. ample below The file with a warning Remarks 1 The file with both an error and a warning is highlighted in red 2 The highlight is canceled when the build option general option or individual option or the build mode is changed lt 2 gt The names of the following files are displayed in boldface The source file that has not been compiled after editing The source file after a clean has been executed The source file after the build tool option has been changed The source file after the build mode has been changed Remark The file names are all displayed in boldface right after the project is opened The boldface display is canceled after a build is executed p Highlighting the non build target file The file that is set as non build target is highlighted as shown in the example below Build target file Non build target file q Highlighting overlay icons Overlay icons of Windows Explorer set in a project a file added to the project and a category only when a shortcut to the folder is set is displayed on the left side of the ordinal icon as the example below R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 121 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The project that has not been changed UR sample Project The project displaying an overlay icon x j main c al ioh Caution The above overlay icon is provided as a sample Note that an icon to be displayed differs depending on
207. ange Select from the drop down list Restriction Auto None Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS SJIS Xcharacter_set sjis Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS EUC Xcharacter_set euc_jp Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as EUC UFT 8 Xcharacter_set utf8 Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as UFT 8 Big5 Xcharacter_set big5 Interprets the Chinese character code in the source file as Traditional Chinese GB2312 Interprets the Chinese character code in Xcharacter_set gb231 2 the source file as Simplified Chinese No process Does not interpret the Japanese Chinese Xcharacter_set none character code in the source file 4 Output Code The detailed information on output codes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Use 32 bit branch Select whether to use the far jump function for the jarl and jr instructions instruction By using the far jump function it is assumed that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and assembling is performed This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xasm_far_jump option of the cerh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_option Assumes that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 Xasm_far_jump and jr32 instructions and performs assembling No Perfo
208. ange information and warning message to error message Number of information and warning message in the Message category From the Create Library Options tab Change warning message to information message Number of warning message Change information message to warning message Number of information message Change information and warning message to error message Number of information and warning message in the Message category Example of use To change E0561310 to a warning and continue the execution at the E0561310 output describe as gt rlink a obj b obj change_message warning 1310 To change all information and warning messages to error messages describe as If a message is output the execution will abort gt rlink a obj b obj change_message error R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 468 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Hide This option deletes local symbol name information from the output file Specification format Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option deletes local symbol name information from the output file Since the name information regarding local symbols is deleted local symbol names cannot be checked even if the file is opened with a binary editor This option does not affect the operation of the generated file Use this option to keep the local symbol names secret The follo
209. ar address Expanded linear address record Upper 16 bit address at bits 32 to 16 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 100 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Output Information Description Start address record Entry point address Expanded address record Paragraph value of load address Data record Value of code End record End of code Each record consists of the following fields XX XXXX XX DD 2 3 4 Description Record mark Number of bytes The number of bytes is expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number of 5 Location address Record type 05 Start linear address record 04 Expanded linear address record 03 Start address record 02 Expanded address record 00 Data record 01 End record Code Each byte of code is expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number Checksum This is the 2 digit two s complement value of a result of hexadecimal addition of all bytes in the record except for m SS and NL Newline n Remark The location address in the Intel HEX format is 2 bytes 16 bits Therefore only a 64 Kbyte space can be directly specified To extend this area the Intel HEX format adds the 16 bit expanded address so that a space of up to 1 Mbyte 20 bits can be used Specifically the record type that specifies the 16 bit expanded address is added This expanded address is shifted by four bits and added to the location a
210. ar attention Remark Supplementary information Numeric representation Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal 0xXXXX Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such Document Name Document No CubeSuite Start R20UT2444E Integrated Development Environment V850 Design R20UT2134E User s Manual R8C Design R20UT2135E RL78 Design R20UT2136E 78KOR Design R20UT2137E 78K0 Design R20UT2138E RH850 Coding R20UT2584E RX Coding R20UT2470E V850 Coding R20UT0553E Coding for CX Compiler R20UT2139E R8C Coding R20UT0576E RL78 78KOR Coding R20UT2140E 78KO Coding R20UT2141E RH850 Build This manual RX Build R20UT2472E V850 Build R20UT0557E Build for CX Compiler R20UT2142E R8C Build R20UT0575E RL78 78KOR Build R20UT2143E 78KO Build R20UT0783E RX Debug R20UT2350E V850 Debug R20UT2446E R8C Debug R20UT0770E RL78 Debug R20UT2445E 78KOR Debug R20UT0732E 78K0 Debug R20UT0731E Analysis R20UT2447E Message R20UT2448E Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice Be sure to use the latest edition of each document when designing All trademarks or registered trademarks in this document are the property of their respective owners TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 8 1 1 Overview 8 1 2 Cop
211. areas 4 Preprocess The detailed information on preprocessing is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 225 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during compiling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The specified include path is searched with higher priority than the standard include file folder of CC RH The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CC RH is searched This corresponds to the option of the ccrh command The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguis
212. art gt gt All programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt Utilities gt gt Call Walker Remark In Windows 8 double click on Call Walker on the start screen To exit from Call Walker select Call Walker File menu gt gt Exit See Call Walker Help menu gt gt Help Topics for Call Walker operations R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 82 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS This chapter explains the format and other aspects of lists output by a build via each command 3 1 Assemble List File This section explains the assemble list file The assemble list is the list formatted version of the code that is output when the source has been compiled and assembled It can be used to check the code resulting from compilation and assembly The methods for outputting the assemble list file are shown below 1 For CubeSuite Select the build tool node on the Project Tree panel and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To output the assemble list file select Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category Specify the output destination in the Output folder for assemble list file property The file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by prn When Yes Xpass_source in the Output comment to assembly source file property in
213. as been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Favorite Projects Displays a cascading menu to use to open or save your favorite project Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 1 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Projects is displayed Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 2 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Projects is displayed Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 3 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Projects is displayed Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 4 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Projects is displayed 1 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 1 path in Favorite Projects 2 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 2path in Favorite Projects 3 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 3path in Favorite Projects 4 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 4path in Favorite Projects Displays the cascading menu to add subprojects to the project Add Subproject Opens the
214. at FF Newline R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 104 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 6 Motorola S record File This section explains the Motorola S record file The methods for outputting the Motorola S record file are shown below 1 For CubeSuite Select the build tool node on the Project Tree panel and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel To output the Motorola S record file select Motorola S record file FOrm Stype in the Hex file format property in the Hex Format category Specify the output destination in the Output folder property and Output file name property in the Output File category It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node 2 Command line When the form stype option is specified the Motorola S record file is output to the current folder under the output file name with the extension replaced by mot 3 6 1 Structure of the Motorola S record file The Motorola S record file consists of seven recordsN 1 S0 record as the header record S1 S2 and S3 records as the data record and S9 S8 and S7 records as the end recordsNote 2 Notes 1 Each record is output in ASCII code 2 The Motorola S record files are divided into three types 16 bit address type 24 bit standard address type and 32 bit address type The format of the 16 bit address type consists of SO S1 and S9 records
215. at are classified as required is selected in the Apply rule property When Apply specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Rule number property When Ignore specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Rule number property When Apply rules that are classified as required and specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Check rule number besides required rule property When Ignore specified rule number from rules that are classified as required is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Exclusion rule number from required rule property When Apply rules that are described in the specified file is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number description file is specified in the Rule number description file property Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button gt Edit by the Add Excluding File dialog box which appears when clicking the Browse button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 238 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output message
216. at the head of the reference name in the program The section specified by this option can have its section attribute and number of alignment specified CODE or DATA can be specified as section attribute attribute If attribute is omitted the write read and execute attributes will be all valid by default The value that can be specified for number of alignment alignment is a power of 2 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 Other value cannot be specified If alignment is omitted 1 will be valid by default This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Binary file in the Input File category From the Create Library Options tab Binary file in the Input File category Example of use b bin is allocated from 0x200 as the D1bin section c bin is allocated after Dibin as the D2bin section with the number of alignment 4 The c bin data is linked as defined symbol _datab To perform the above operations describe as Remark If the form object library option or strip option is specified this option will be invalid If input object file is not specified this option cannot be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 427 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE DEFine This option defines an undefined symbol forcedly Specification format Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description
217. at the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the OUtput option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when No in the Divide load module file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output file name Specify the output file name If the extension is omitted abs is automatically added The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the OUitput option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when No in the Divide load module file property is selected Default ProjectName abs How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Use standard libraries Select whether to use the standard libraries provided by the compiler This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the standard libraries No Does not use the standard libraries R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 140 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Use Standard Library functio
218. atements in programs References a table indexed on the values in the case statements and selects and processes case labels from the switch statement values The code will branch to all the case statements with about the same speed However if case values are not used in succession an unnecessary area will be created Floating point calculating type R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Select whether to generate runtime library call instructions for floating point calculations or to generate floating point instructions for the floating point unit FPU This corresponds to the Xfloat option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Object for G3M Xcpu g3m in the Specify CPU core property in the Output File Type and Path category from the Common Options tab is selected Default Auto None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Auto None Generates floating point calculation instructions Software Calculating Xfloat soft Generates runtime library call instructions for floating point calculations FPU Calculating Xfloat fpu 2tENESAS Generates floating point calculation instructions of FPU for floating point calculations Page 164 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Generate div divu Select whether to generate the div and divu instructions instead of the divq and divqu instructions inst
219. ath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder This corresponds to the OUtput option of the rlink command The division output file name is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default Division output file aumber of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 65535 items can be specified Use object uniting Select whether to combine the hex files of the projects specified as constituent applications function into a file This corresponds to the FOrm option of the rlink command This property is displayed only in the following cases For the multi core boot loader project When Yes is selected in the Output hex file property and the same item is selected in the Hex file format property in the Hex Format category for the boot loader project and all component application projects Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Combines the hex fil
220. ath is searched with higher priority than the standard include file folder of CC RH The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CC RH is searched This corresponds to the I option of the ccrh command The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 244 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use whole include paths Select whether to assemble using the include path specified in the Additional include paths specified for build tool property in the Preprocess category from the Assemble Options tab of the build tool to be used The setting of the Compile Options tab is used when Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected When Yes in the Build simultaneously property is selected the include paths are added by the following procedure Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from this t
221. ation This corresponds to the COmpress and NOCOmpress options of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes Output to the output file DEBug in the Output debug information property is selected Default No NOCOmpress How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes COmpress Compresses debug information The loading speed of the debugger will be improved No NOCOmpress Does not compress the debug information The link time will be shorten Delete local symbol Select whether to delete local symbol name information name information This corresponds to the Hide option of the rlink command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Hide Deletes information of the local symbol name No Does not delete information of the local symbol name 2 Optimization Details The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output external symbol Select whether to output an external symbol allocation information file allocation information file This property is changed to Yes Map when Yes Optimizes the inter module Omap in the Optimize accesses to external variables property in the Optimization Details category from the Compile Options tab is selected This corresponds to the MAp option of the rlink command Default No How to change Selec
222. ault optimization Default Performs optimization that debugging is not affected optimization of expressions and register allocation and the like Optimization with the object size precedence Regards reducing the ROM RAM capacity as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Optimization with the execution speed precedence Regards shortening the execution speed as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs If level is omitted it is assumed that size has been specified The items that can be specified as item and value are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 365 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Optimization Item item unroll Parameter value 0 to 4294967295 Integer value APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description Loop expansion When 0 or 1 is specified the expansion is suppressed If 2 or more is specified the number of executions is converted into N loops Nis a constant and a loop including code expanded value times If the code size after expansion is too great or if the number of times of execution of the loop is too few the number of times of expansion may decrease or the loop may not be expanded at all In addition a loop having a complicated structure such as having inner loops may not be expanded If
223. ayed by default Note however that the folder path set in the category is displayed when this dialog box is opened from the context menu of the category node only when the shortcut to the folder has been set and the folder exists a Button Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box If a folder is selected the path will be added in the text box Remarks 1 If the text box is blank it is assumed that the project folder is designated 2 Ifthe relative path is designated the reference point of the path is the project folder Remark Up to 259 characters path and file name combined can be specified in the File name area and File location area When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown on the File name area in the tooltip Message Description The file name including the path is too long Make it The file name with the path is more than 259 characters within 259 characters The specified path contains a folder that does not exist The path contains a folder that does not exist The file name or path name is invalid The following The file name with the invalid path is designated characters cannot be used lt gt The following characters cannot be used for the file name and folder name lt gt Function buttons Button Function OK Creates the file with the entered file name adds it to the project and opens with the Edit
224. ayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default ProjectName mot How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Division output file Specify the division output files Specify in the format of file name start address end address or file name section name with one entry per line If multiple section names are specified delimit them with a colon as in file name section name section name example file1 mot sec1 sec2 Specify the address in hexadecimal example file2 mot 400 4ff If the extension is omitted it is automatically added according to the selection in the Hex file format property When Intel HEX file FOrm Hexadecimal is selected hex When Motorola S record file FOrm Stype is selected mot When Binary file FOrm Binary is selected bin The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces wit
225. be set The number of build modes exceed 20 per project subproject is 20 Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 290 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to run builds rebuilds and cleans in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has Remark The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run Figure A 38 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Project Build mode Defined macros DefaultBuild C sample BuildMode2 sub DefaultBuild C sub BuildMode2 Function buttons Rebuild The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Batch Build Description of each area 1 Build mode list area This area displays the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project their build modes and their macro definitions a Project This area display
226. bj and file3 obj are linked by rlink and then link map file sample map and load module file sample abs are generated gt rlink filel obj file2 obj file3 obj output sample abs list c Performing compilation assembly and linking separately C source file file1 c is compiled by ccrh and then assembly source file file1 asm is generated gt ccrh S filel c Xcommon v850e3v5 Assembly source file file1 asm and file2 asm are assembled by asrh and then object file file1 obj and file2 obj are generated Assemble list file sample prn are also output gt asrh c filel asm file2 asm Xprn_path sample prn Xcommon v850e3v5 Object file file1 obj file2 obj and file3 obj are linked by rlink and then link map file sample map and load module file sample abs are generated gt rlink filel obj file2 obj file3 obj output sample abs list R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 327 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 4 2 Subcommand file usage A subcommand file is a file that options and file names specified for a command are described The command treats the contents of a subcommand file as if they were command line arguments Use a subcommand file when the arguments will not fit on the command line or when same options are specified repeatedly each time the command is executed 1 Using a subcommand file for the compiler and assembler a Cautions about de
227. ble list file you can set the output folder and output file name 1 Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder for assemble list file property by directly entering in the text box or by the button This property supports the following placeholder BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name BuildModeName is set by default The file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by prn Remark See 3 1 Assemble List File for details about the assemble list file 2 4 3 Output map information The map information the information of the link result is output to the link map file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel To output the link map file set the Output link map file property in the List category 1 Output information according to the output format Select Yes List contents not specify LISt SHow or Yes List contents ALL LISt SHow ALL in the Output link map file property Figure 2 24 Output link map file Property When Information According To Output Format Is Output Remark See Remark in SHow for differences between the SHow and SHow ALL options 2 Specify information to be output Select Yes List contents specify LISt in the Output link map file property The following property will be displayed Output symbol information property Output number
228. bols are searched in the library file after the link processing between files specified as the input files are executed The symbols are searched in the library file in the following sequence User library files specified by this option in the specified order System library files specified by this option in the specified order Default library environment variables HLNK_LIBRARY1 HLNK_LIBRARY2 and HLNK_LIBRARY3 Note in that order Note See B 3 Environment Variable for details about environment variables This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Using libraries Use standard libraries Use Standard Library function Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Use Non local jump Library function in the Frequently Used Options for Link category Use standard libraries Use Standard Library function Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Use Non local jump Library function in the Frequently Used Options for Create Library category From the Link Options tab Using libraries System libraries Use standard libraries Use Standard Library function Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Use Non local jump Library f
229. brary Options tab 2 10 2 Set build options at the file level You can individually set compile and assemble options for each source file added to the project 1 When setting compile options for a C source file Select the C source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel Select Yes in the Set individual compile option property in the Build category The Message Dialog Box will open Figure 2 79 Set individual compile option Property E Build Set individual compile option Yes v Figure 2 80 Message Dialog Box Question Q0293003 Are you sure you want to set the current compile options to the individual compile options for all build modes If No is selected copy the current build mode options only Click Yes in the dialog box The Individual Compile Options tab will be displayed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 57 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 81 Property Panel Individual Compile Options Tab Property c main c Property E Debug Information Add debug information Yes g E Optimization Level of optimization Default Optimization None E Optimization D etads Maximum number of loop expansions Remove unused static functions Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Perform pipeline optimization Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Use jr instruction to call a function at the end of th
230. brary Options tab Output file format in the Output File category Remark The relations between output formats and input files or other options are shown below Output Format Absolute Specified Option strip specified File Format That Can Be Input Load module file Table B 5 Relations Between Output Formats And Input Files Or Other Options Specifiable Option Note 1 input output Other than above Object file Relocatable file Binary file Library file input library binary debug nodebug cpu start rom entry output map hide compress rename delete define fsymbol stack memory msg_unused show symbollreference xreference aligned_section overrun_fetch Relocate extract specified Library file library output Other than above Object file Relocatable file Binary file Library file input library debug nodebug output hide rename delete show symbol xreference Object extract specified Library file library output Hexadecimal Stype Binary Object file Relocatable file Binary file Library file input library binary cpu start rom entry output map space rename delete define fsymbol stack record sgNote 2 byte _countNote 3 memory msg_unused show symbollreference xreference aligned_section overrun_fetchNote 4 Load module file input output re
231. build target project 1 When running a clean of the entire project From the Build menu select Clean Project Figure 2 117 Clean Project Item Build m Build Project F7 Shift F7 Rapid Build ag Update Dependencies a Build sample H Rebuild sample b Clean sample ag Update Dependencies of sample Kg Stop Build trl F7 Build Mode Settings gt EL Batch Build TH Build Option List 2 When running a clean of the active project Select the project and then select Clean active project from the context menu Figure 2 118 Clean active project Item a LR sample Project i E R7F7o10352arP Build sample Ay CC RH Build Tool _ Rebuild sample RH850 E1 LPD 4 A Clean sample Ce Program nalyz rs iB File Bp Open Folder with Explorer E E sub Subproject E Windows Explorer Menu Add gt n Save Project and Development Tools as Package bey Paste trl a Rename F2 Z Property R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 81 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 13 Estimate the Stack Capacity To estimate the stack capacity use Call Walker Call Walker performs a static analysis and displays the symbols and their callers in a tree format as well as stack information for each symbol symbol name attribute address size stack size and file name in list format To start Call Walker select Windows St
232. category node to the clipboard When the category name is in editing the characters of the selection are copied to the clipboard Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project When the category name is in editing the contents of the clipboard are inserted Rename You can rename the selected category node Property Displays the selected category node s property on the Property panel R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 128 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property panel This panel is used to display the detailed information on the Build tool node file or category node that is selected on the Project Tree panel by every category and change the settings of the information Figure A 3 Property Panel Property Ay CC RH Property El Build Mode Build mode Output File Type andPath Output file type Output common object file for various devices Specify CPU core Output cross reference information Intermediate file output folder E Frequently Used Options for Compie Level of optimization Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition E Frequently Used Options for Link Using libraries Output folder Output file name Use standard libraries Use Standard Library function Use Mathematical Library Double precision funct
233. cations Specification format EXIt Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option specifies the end of option specifications Caution This option can be used only in a subcommanid file Example of use Create subcommand file test sub with the following content input a obj b obj start P C D 100 B 8000 output a abs exit To specify subcommand file test sub describe as gt rlink subcommand test sub nodebug Processing from 1 to 3 are executed and a abs is output The nodebug option specified on the command line after this option is executed is invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 475 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 6 Specifying Multiple Options This section describes the operation when two or more options are specified for the ccrh command at the same time B 6 1 Priority The following options disable other options V h All options will be invalid At this time a warning will not be output P Since execution is terminated at preprocess processing options related to the following processing will be invalid At this time a warning will be output S Since execution is terminated at compile processing options related to the following processing will be invalid At this time a warning will be output C Since execution is terminated at assemble processing options related
234. check box is selected Cautions 1 The rapid build will not finish if this item is selected and the files to be built have been reg istered for automatic editing or overwriting e g by commands executed before or after the build If the rapid build does not finish unselect this item and stop the rapid build 2 If this item is selected a file that is registered in the project but does not exist a file grayed out will not be observed even if it is registered again by the Explorer etc To observe the file reload the project file or select this item again after unselecting this item and closing this dialog box 3 Show dependency files in project tree Displays the file group on which the source file depends on the project tree Does not display the file group on which the source file depends on the project tree default 4 Output quality report file when build is successful Output the quality report file when a build is successful Does not output the quality report file when a build is successful default Remarks 1 The quality report file is not output when a rapid build is executed a debug dedicated project is built and compiling or assembling is executed in file units 2 The following information item is output to the quality report file Time and date on which the file is created Log of the build results Information on the command file which is used during building Information on the detailed
235. clude paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 Character Encoding Error Output Warning Message Others Add debug information Specifies whether to generate the debug information Such information is generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option corresponds to the g optio ore ile Information You can set assemble options for the assembly source file by setting the necessary properties in this tab Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Common Options tab and Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab by default except the properties shown below Additional include paths and Use whole include paths specified for build tool in the Preprocess category Object module file name in the Output File category R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 60 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 Make Settings for Build Operations This section explains operations on a build Import the build options of other project Set the link order of files Change the build order of subprojects Display a list of build options Change the build target project Add a build mode Change the build mode Delete a build mode Set the current build options as the standard for the
236. command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Create jarl32 and jr32 Generates the jarl32 and jr32 instructions for the instructions branch to the function Xcall_jump 32 Create jarl and jr Generates the jarl and jr instructions for the branch instructions None to the function R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 232 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Far Jump file names Specify the Far Jump file name The code that uses the jarl32 and jr32 instruction for branch instructions of functions described in a file is output to the Far Jump file The ccrh command outputs an error if the function is in a range that cannot be branched to by the jarl or jr directive t2MB or more in which case the Far Jump file is used to recompile Use the extension fjp This corresponds to the Xfar_jump option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify Far Jump File dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Type of a generating program 8 Output File Select the type of the program to be generated This corresponds to the Xmulti_level option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only for the multi core project Default Co
237. command Default Yes List contents specify LISt How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes List contents not Outputs information according to the output specify LISt SHow format to the link map file Yes List contents ALL Outputs all information according to the output LISt SHow ALL format to the link map file Yes List Outputs the specified information to the link map contents specify LISt file No Does not output the link map file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 190 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output symbol Select whether to output the symbol information symbol address size type and optimization information contents This corresponds to the SHow SYmbol option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Output link map file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow SYmbol Outputs the symbol information No Does not output the symbol information Output number of Select whether to output the number of symbol references symbol reference This corresponds to the SHow Reference option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Output link map file property is selected Default No
238. command txt as a subcommand file describe as gt ccrh command txt Xcommon v850e3v5 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 399 of 485 Apr 01 2013 B 5 2 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Assemble options APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE This section explains options for the assemble phase Caution about options are shown below Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are distinguished for options When numerical values are specified as parameters decimal or hexadecimal numbers which starts with Ox 0X can be specified Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the alphabet of hexadecimal numbers When a file name is specified as a parameter it can include the path absolute path or relative path When a file name without the path or a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the current folder When a parameter includes a space such as a path name enclose the parameter in a pair of double quotation marks When the Xprn_path or Xasm_far_jump option is specified for ccrh command the Xasm_option option must be used The types and explanations for options are shown below Classification Version help display specification Table B 3 Assemble Options Description This option displays the version information of asrh This option displays the descriptions of asrh options Output file specification This option specifies t
239. cord sQNote 2 pyte_countNote 3 show symbollreference xreference Intel HEX fileNote 5 input output Motorola S record fileNote 5 input output sgNote 2 Library Notes 1 2 3 4 strip specified Library file library output memoryN e 6 show symbol section extract specified Library file library output Other than above Object file Relocatable file input library output hide rename delete replace memoryNote 6 show symbol section The following options can always be specified message nomessage change_message logo nologo form list subcommand The s9 option is valid only when the form stype option is specified The byte_count option is valid only when the form hexadecimal option is specified The overrun_fetch option is valid only when the form hexadecimal or form stype option is specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 stENESAS Page 431 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 5 Ifan Intel HEX file is specified as an input file only the form hexadecimal option can be specified Ifa Motorola S record file is specified only the form stype option can be specified 6 The memory option cannot be specified when the hide option is specified Example of use To output relocatable file c rel from a obj and b obj describe as gt rlink a obj b obj form relocate o
240. ct the individual options set in the file are retained 2 f you drop the file between the different projects or onto the main project or subproject in same project the file is copied not moved Note that the individual option set in the file are not retained R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 118 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d e Adding a category You can add a category node by one of the following procedures The category node is added below the File node Select Add New Category from the Project menu Select Add New Category from the context menu of either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node Remarks 1 The default category name is New category 2 You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node Moving a category You can move a category node by the following procedure The category node is moved below the File node Drag the category node you want to move and then drop it onto the destination Remarks 1 If you drop the category node in the main project or subproject the individual options set in the file in the category node are retained 2 If you drop the category node between the different projects or onto the main project or subproject in same project the category node is copied not moved Note that the individual option set in the file in the category node are not retained f Adding a f
241. ct tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel The macro definition setting is made with the Macro definition property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 42 Macro definition Property El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 pain ath erp ine hell Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 43 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Text TEST 1 TIME 10 Enter the macro definition in Text in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line You can specify up to 256 characters per line up to 256 lines The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value If you click the OK button the entered macro definitions are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 44 Macro definition Property After Setting Macros El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Faf Macro definition Macro definition 2 0 TEST 1 1 TIME 10 Macro undefinition 0 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 37 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS To change the macro definitions you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Macro definition property in the Frequently Used Options for Ass
242. ction the following message will be shown in the tooltip R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 267 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Message Description More than maximum number of restriction in the The numbers of input characters exceeds the property that called this dialog box characters cannot be maximum number of restriction in the property that specified The current number of characters is called this dialog box displayed between brackets at the beginning of the line in excess of the limit 2 Placeholder area The list of placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed ascending order Double click a row to surround the placeholder with percentage signs and display it in Text a Placeholder This area displays the placeholder b Value This area displays the string after replacement with the placeholder c Description This area displays the description of the placeholder Caution This area is displayed only when the caller of this dialog box supports placeholders Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this di
243. cy files in project tree checkbox in the General Build Debug category of the Option dialog box is selected 2 Information on the dependency files displayed on the project tree is not saved in the project file Cautions 1 When checking for dependences on include files CubeSuite does not support cases of include files to which conditional statements such as if apply or for which the include directive is commented out Therefore there is a case where this product regards an include file unnecessary for a build as a necessary file In the example below header1 h and header5 h are judged as required for build if 0 include headerl Dependence relationship judged to exist else zero include header2 Dependence relationship to exist endif define AAA ifdef AAA include header3 Dependence relationship to exist else include header4 Dependence relationship to exist endif include header5 Dependence relationship judged to exist wh R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 22 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS When checking for dependences on include files CubeSuite does not support include statements that follow comments or comment marks that are on the same line Therefore there is a case where this product regards an include file necessary for a build as a unnecessary file In the example below header6 h and header7 h are judged as no required f
244. d tool node on the Project Tree panel and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel To output the Intel Hex file select Intel HEX file FOrm Hexadecimal in the Hex file format property in the Hex Format category Specify the output destination in the Output folder property and Output file name property in the Output File category It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node 2 Command line When the form hexadecimal option is specified the Intel HEX file is output to the current folder under the output file name with the extension replaced by hex 3 5 1 Structure of the Intel HEX file The Intel HEX file 20 bits consists of four recordsN te start address record expanded address record data record and end record The Intel HEX file 32 bits consists of six records start linear address record expanded linear start address record start address record expanded address record data record and end record Note Each record is output in ASCII code The structure and contents of the Intel HEX file are shown below Figure 3 1 Structure of Intel HEX File Start address record Expanded address recordNote Data recordNote Data record Expanded address record Data record Data record End record Note The expanded address record and data record are repeated Start linear address record Line
245. dard and outputs an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard Compatibility with the conventional C language specifications is conferred and processing continues after warning is output Handle external variables as if they are volatile qualified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Select whether t This correspond o handle all external variables as if they were volatile declared s to the Xvolatile option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xvolatile Handles all external variables as if they were volatile declared No Handles only the volatile qualified variables as they were volatile declared 2tENESAS Page 228 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Check C program Select whether to check the compatibility of a C program compatibility This corresponds to the Xcheck option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes for SuperH RISC Checks the compatibility with the SuperH family engine C C C C compiler compiler Xcheck shc No Does not check the compatibility with existing programs 6 Character Encoding The detailed information on character encoding is displayed and the configuration can be changed
246. ddress to express a 20 bit address R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 101 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 5 2 Start linear address record This indicates the linear address 04 0000 05 XXXXXXXX SS NL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Record mark Fixed at 04 Fixed at 0000 Record type Fixed at 05 Linear address value Checksum Newline 3 5 3 Expanded linear address record This indicates the upper 16 bit address at bits 32 to 16 Description Record mark Fixed at 02 Fixed at 0000 Record type Fixed at 04 Upper 16 bit address at bits 32 to 16 Checksum Newline Note The location address of the data record is used as the lower 16 bits 3 5 4 Start address record This indicates the entry point address 03 PPPP XXXX SS 5 6 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 102 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Fixed at 0000 Record type Fixed at 03 Paragraph value of entry point addressNote Offset value of entry point address Checksum Newline Note The address is calculated by paragraph value lt lt 4 offset value 3 5 5 Expanded address record This indicates the paragraph value of the load addressNote Note This is output at the beginning of the segment when the data record is output or
247. ded from the C language standard Disables MISRA C 2004 rule check is disabled which are partially suppressed by the extended language specifications 11 Others Other detailed information on compilation is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 172 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before compile processing before compile Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling InputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the
248. details of each optimization items Xintermodule This option performs inter module optimization Xinline_strcpy This option performs inline expansion of standard library functions strcpy strcmp memcpy and memset calls Xmerge_string This option merges string literals Xalias This option performs optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by the pointer Xmerge_files This option merges two or more C source files and compiles them Xwhole_program 2tENESAS This option performs optimization assuming that the files to be compiled comprise the entire program Page 332 of 485 Classification Generated code control CubeSuite V2 01 00 Xpack APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description This option performs the structure packing Xbit_order This option specifies the order of bit field members Xpass_source This option outputs a C source program as a comment to the assembly source file Xswitch This option specifies a mode in which the code of a switch statement is to be output Xreg_mode This option specifies the register mode Xreserve_r2 This option reserves the r2 register Xep This option specifies how to handle the ep register Xfloat This option controls generating floating point calculation instructions Xcall_jump This option controls generating function call branch
249. dialog box 294 General Build Debug category 296 OUtput Link option 437 Output an assemble list 27 Output library information 28 Output map information 27 Output panel 257 OVERRUN_FETCH Link option 446 P P Compile option 344 PADDING Link option 445 Path Edit dialog box 269 Progress Status dialog box 293 Project Tree panel 116 Property panel 129 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 479 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Assemble Options tab 175 Build Settings tab 217 Category Information tab 254 Common Options tab 132 Compile Options tab 153 Create Library Options tab 205 File Information tab 252 Hex Output Options tab 199 Individual Assemble Options tab 243 Individual Compile Options tab 220 Link Options tab 182 R Rapid build 73 76 Rebuild 73 75 RECord Link option 435 REName Link option 463 REPlace Link option 465 ROm Link option 436 Run a build 73 S S Compile option 345 S9 Link option 458 Save As dialog box 313 Save Settings dialog box 285 Section Address dialog box 282 Section Settings dialog box 277 Select Export File dialog box 319 Select Import File dialog box 317 Set assemble options 35 Set compile options 30 Set create library options
250. displayed as the subproperty Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of the compile option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the compile option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the compile options group Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 242 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Individual Assemble Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on an assemble source file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Common Options tab Compile Options tab and Assemble Options tab When the settings are cha
251. e lbp Library list file Intel Hex file hex Intel HEX file Motorola S record file mot Motorola S record file Text file txt Text format b In the Output panel This area displays the following file type Text file txt Text format Function buttons Saves the file as the designated name Closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 314 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open with Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the application to open the file selected in Project Tree Figure A 50 Open with Program Dialog Box Open with Program 1 B Program Files O amp adobe NEC Electronics CubeSuite common Files NetMeeting My Recent O ComPlus Applications Online Services Documents Internet Explorer E Outlook Express McAfee Reference Assemblies Messenger Uninstall Information Microsoft Windows Desktop Search 2 gt microsoft frontpage Windows Live Microsoft Silverlight windows Live SkyDrive Microsoft SQL Server Compact Edition Windows Media Connect 2 Microsoft Sync Framework Windows Media Player Movie Maker windows NT MSBuild WindowsUpdate B MSN B xerox MSN Gaming Zone 3 4 dy Network i Program exe Cancel Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons
252. e namel name2 namel name2 Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option changes an external symbol name or a section name Specify the symbol name or section name to be changed as name1 Specify the symbol name or section name after changing as namez2 Symbol names or section names in specific file file or a module in specific library module can be changed When a C variable name is specified add _ at the head of the definition name in the program When a function name is changed the operation is not guaranteed If the specified name matches both section and symbol names the symbol name is changed If there are two or more files or modules with the same name the priority depends on the input order Example of use To change symbol name _sym1 to data describe as gt rlink a obj b obj rename _syml data To change section text in library module lib1 to data to section P describe as gt rlink library lib lib rename lib1 text P form library Remark If this option is specified together with the extract option or strip option this option will be invalid When the form absolute option is specified the section name of the input library cannot be changed Operation is not guaranteed if this option is used in combination with compile option Xmerge_files R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 463 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite
253. e General Font and Color category in the Option dialog box Normal message AaBbCc Character color Information on something Background color R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 257 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Message Type Example Default Description Warning message Character color Blue Warning for the operation Background color Normal color Error message Character color Red Fatal error or operation disabled because of an error in operation Background color Light gray This area has the following functions a Tag jump When the output message is double clicked or the Enter key is pressed with the caret over the message the Editor panel appears and the destination line number of the file is displayed You can jump to the line of the source file that generated the error from the error message output when build ing b Display help If you select the Help for Message from the context menu or press the F1 key when the cursor is on a line displaying the warning or error message the help related to that line s message is displayed c Save log The contents displayed on the currently selected tab can be saved in a text file txt by selecting Save Output tab name As from the File menu to open the Save As dialog box messages on the tab that is not selected will not be saved 2 Tab selection area Select tabs that message
254. e MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project MainProjectName sample Main project name E MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite ProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the project folder gt lt gt Co to te Enter the library file including the path per line in Path One path per one line You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 65536 lines Remarks 1 This property supports placeholders If a line is double clicked in Placeholder the placeholder will be reflected in Path One path per one line 2 You can also specify the library file by one of the following procedures Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Specify Using Library File dialog box Double click a row in Placeholder R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 40 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS If you click the OK button the entered library files are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 48 Using libraries Property After Setting Library Files Using libraries 1 0 M ainProjectDir user lib ystem libraries ystem libranes U Use standard libraries Yes Use Standard Library function Yes LIBrary libc Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Yes LIBrary libm Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Yes LIBrary libmf U
255. e OK button the entered macro definitions are displayed as subproperties R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 33 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 36 Macro definition Property After Setting Macros El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 AS ysiem include pin System include paths 0 Macro o definition Fa a TIME 1 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 To change the macro definitions you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Macro definition property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 5 Change the register mode Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select the register mode to on the Register mode property in the Register Mode category Figure 2 37 Register mode Property 32 aa mode None eserve ep register treatment Trea as callee save None You can select from the following register modes Register Mode Working Registers Registers for Register Variables 32 register mode None r10 to r19 r20 to r29 22 register mode Xreg_mode 22 r10 to r14 r25 to r29 Universal register mode Xreg_mode common r10 to r14 r25 to r29 Remark See CubeSuite Integrated Development En
256. e property in the Optimization Details category is selected When any one of the conditions below is met 1 When No in the Output link map file property in the List category is selected 2 When Yes List contents not specify LISt SHow in the Output link map file property in the List category is selected 3 When Yes List contents specify LISt in the Output link map file property No in the Output number of symbol reference property and No in the Output cross reference information property in the List category are selected When No in the Output stack information file property is selected Default No MEMory High How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes MEMory Low Reduces the memory capacity Select this item if processing is slow because a large project is linked and the memory size occupied by the linker exceeds the available memory in the machine used No MEMory High Executes the same processing as usual R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 196 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Display total size of Select whether to display the total size of sections after the linking sections This corresponds to the Total_size option of the rlink command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Total_size Displays the total size of sections after the
257. e property with the extension replaced by map Command line Specify one or more Intel HEX files or Motorola S record files as the input files Caution The input files should have the same type an Intel HEX file and a Motorola S record file cannot be combined together When the list option is specified the link map file is output to the current folder At this time specify the form hexadecimal option when Intel HEX files are specified or the form stype option when Motorola S record files are specified The output file name is first input file name_combine map Structure of link map The structure and contents of the link map are shown below Output Information Description Header information Version information of the optimizing linker and time of linkage Option information Option strings specified by a command line or subcommand file Error information Error message Entry information Execution start address Combined address Combined source files and start and end addresses and size of continuous range data information Address overlap information Overlapped combine source files and start and end addresses and size of overlapped range data R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 92 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 3 2 Header information The version information and the time of linkage are output The output example of the header infor
258. e see 2 11 6 Add a build mode 3 Set build target files Add or remove build target files and update the dependencies see 2 3 Set Build Target Files 4 Set build options Set the options for the compiler assembler librarian and the like see 2 5 Set Compile Options 2 6 Set Assemble Options 2 9 Set Create Library Options Remark To create a library common to various devices set the Output common object file for various devices property in the Output File Type and Path category from the Common Options tab on the Property panel 5 Run a build Run a build see 2 12 Runa Build The following types of builds are available Build see 2 12 1 Runa build of updated files Rebuild see 2 12 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build see 2 12 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations Batch build see 2 12 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remark If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process on the Property panel from the Common Options tab in the Others category set the Commands executed before build processing and Commands executed after build processing properties If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process at the file level you can set R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 12 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS them from the Individual Compile Options tab for a C source file a
259. e 217 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 13 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting Library File Property ib user lib Property E Build Set as build target Set as build target Selects whether to build this file File Information Description of each category 1 Build The detailed information on the build is displayed and the configuration can be changed Set as build target Select whether to run a build of the selected file Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Runs a build of the selected file No Does not run a build of the selected file Set individual compile Select whether to set the compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected C option source file If Yes Level 3 Perform with assuming it the whole program Xwhole_program is selected in the Perform inter module optimization property in the Optimization Details category from the Compile Options tab this property will be grayed out and changed to No This property is displayed only when a C source file is selected on the project tree and Yes in the Set as build target property from this tab is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Sets the option that differs from the project settings to the selected C source file No Does not
260. e 302 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select the folder and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 44 Browse For Folder Dialog Box Browse For Folder 1 Select the Folder to add file Desktop My Documents 4 My Computer a My Network Places g Recycle Bin H HK C Unused Desktop Shortcuts 2 O work O sample Function buttons Make New Folder The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Inthe Add File dialog box click the Refer button in the File location area Inthe Path Edit dialog box click the Browse button in the path edit area On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Intermediate file output folder in the Output File Type and Path category Output folder in the Frequently Used Options for Link category Output folder in the Frequently Used Options for Hex Output category Output folder in the Frequently Used Options for Create Library category and Error message file output folder in the Error Output category From the Compile Options tab Output folder for assembly source file in the Output File category and Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble
261. e Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 247 characters The detailed information on the hex format is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property in the Output File category is selected Hex file format Select the format of the hex file to be output This corresponds to the FOrm option of the rlink command Default Motorola S record file FOrm Stype How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Intel HEX file FOrm Hexadecimal Outputs an Intel HEX file Motorola S record file FOrm Stype Outputs a Motorola S record file Binary file FOrm Binary Outputs a binary file Unify record size Intel HEX file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Select whether to output a specified data record regardless of the address range This corresponds to the RECord option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Intel HEX file FOrm Hexadecimal in the Hex file format property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Intel hex record REcord H16 Outputs the Intel hex record Yes Intel expanded hex record REcord H20 Outputs the Intel expanded hex record Yes Intel 32 bit hex record REcord H32 Outputs the Intel 32 bit hex record
262. e Build tool node file or category node on the Project Tree panel is selected while the Property panel has been opened the detailed information of the selected item is displayed Description of each area 1 Detailed information display change area In this area the detailed information on the Build tool node file or category node that is selected on the Project Tree panel is displayed by every category in the list And the settings of the information can be changed directly Mark E indicates that all the items in the category are expanded Mark indicates that all the items are collapsed You can expand collapse the items by clicking these marks or double clicking the category name Mark HEX indicates that only a hexadecimal number is allowed to input in the text box See the section on each tab for the details of the display setting in the category and its contents 2 Tab selection area Categories for the display of the detailed information are changed by selecting a tab In this panel the following tabs are contained see the section on each tab for the details of the display setting on the tab a When the Build tool node is selected on the Project Tree panel Common Options tab Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab Link Options tab Hex Output Options tab Create Library Options tab b When a file is selected on the Project Tree panel Build Settings tab for C source file assembly source file
263. e an object for G3M describe as gt asrh Xcpu g3m c Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 409 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Preprocessor control The preprocessor control options are as follows This option defines assembler symbols Specification format Dname def name def Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option defines name as an assembler symbol This is equivalent to adding name SET def at the beginning of the assembly source program If name contains characters that are allowed in an assembler symbol but which cannot be used in a preprocessor macro and a warning will be output and it is defined as an assembler symbol only An error will occur if name is omitted If def is omitted defis regarded as 1 This option can be specified more than once If both this option and U option are specified for the same assembler symbol the option specified last will be valid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category From the Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category Example of use To define sample 256 as an a
264. e and Motorola S record file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 51 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 2 Fill the vacant area Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel 1 Set the hex file output range The setting of the hex file output range is made with the Division output file property in the Output File category Figure 2 69 Division output file Property E Output File Output hex file Yes Output folder BuildModeN ame x YD 5 If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 70 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Iert file1 abs sec1 sec2 file2 abs 1 0000 1 fff Placeholder Placeholder Value Description ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active project folde ActiveProjectName sample Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite install lt M gt C cet ee Specify the division output file name in Text in the format of file name start address end address start address end address The start address and end address of the output range or file name section name section name The name of the output section with one file n
265. e file name specified in the property with the extension replaced by cref This property is changed to Yes Xcref when Yes in the Compulsorily output cross reference file property of the analyze tool is selected If this property is changed to No when Yes in the Compulsorily output cross reference file property is selected this property will be changed to Yes Xcref during a build This corresponds to the Xcref option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xcref Outputs the cross reference information The build processing speed slows down but jump to function can be used No Does not output the cross reference information Intermediate file output Specify the folder which the intermediate file is output folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xobj_path option of the ccrh command Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clic
266. e following reserved sections are set in the drop down list bss const data text Function buttons Button Function Add Section dialog box Closes this dialog box and adds the specified section to the address section area in the Section Settings dialog box When there is no empty column in the section group an address and the sections allocated to the address where the specified section is to be included a new section row is added to the bottom of the section group When there is an empty column the section is added there Modify Section dialog box Closes this dialog box and replaces the section name selected in the address section area in the Section Seitings dialog box with the one specified Add Overlay dialog box Closes this dialog box and adds the Overlayn column n number starting with 1 to the address section area in the Section Settings dialog box Sets the specified section in the column that corresponds to the selected section group Cancel Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 281 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Section Address dialog box This dialog box is used to set an address when adding or modifying a section Figure A 33 Section Address Dialog Box Section Address Address Funcion outers The following i
267. e from Project Removes the selected subproject from the project The subproject file itself is not deleted from the file system When the selected subproject is the active project it cannot be removed from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected subproject Property Displays the selected subproject s property on the Property panel 3 When the Build tool node is selected Build Project Runs a build the selected project main project or subproject A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Runs a rebuild the selected project main project or subproject A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Runs a clean of the selected project main project or subproject A clean of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 125 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Set to Default Build Option for Project APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Sets the current build options as the standard for the project When a subproject is added its setting is not made When
268. e function Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Optimize accesses to external variables No Perform inter module optimization No Perform optimization considering type of data indicated by pointer No Perform inline expansion of strepy stremp memepy memset No Merge string literals No E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Include files at head of compiling units Include files at head of compiling units 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 C Language Character Encoding Output Code Output File Assemble List MISRA C 2004 Rule Check Error Output Warning Message Others Add debug information Specifies whether to generate the debug information Such information is generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option conesponds to the g optio Build Settings i ions File Information You can set compile options for the C source file by setting the necessary properties in this tab Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Common Options tab and Compile Options tab by default except the properties shown below Additional include paths and Use whole include paths specified for build tool in the Preprocess category Object module file name in the Output File category R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS P
269. e item that can be specified as series is shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified v850e3v5 It is possible to link to the model with the V850E3V5 instruction set architecture which is specified as a target device rh850 The result is the same as when v850e3v5 is specified An error will occur if series is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Output common object file for various devices in the Output File Type and Path category Example of use To embed the magic number common to models with the instruction set architectures superior to V850E3V5 into the object file to be generated describe as gt ccrh Xcommon v850e3v5 c main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 342 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xcpu This option specifies that an object for the specified core is generated Specification format Xcpu core Interpretation when omitted If the Xcommon option is specified an object for G3M is generated Detailed description This option specifies that an object for core core is generated The items that can be specified as core are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified Generates an object for G3M Generates an object for G3K An error will occur if core is omitted This option is equival
270. e macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the ccrh command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 5 Frequently Used Options for Link The detailed information on frequently used options during linking is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for the library project Using libraries Specify the library files to be used The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute
271. e onto the node see 2 3 4 Classify a file into a category for a category node R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 15 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Creating and adding an empty file On the project tree select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box will open Figure 2 4 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type C source file c Header file h inc Assembly source file asm s fsy Python script file py Text file txt Empty C source file File name main c File location D work sample Reter In the dialog box specify the file to be created and then click the OK button The file is added below the File node The project tree after adding the file and folder will look like the one below Figure 2 5 Project Tree Panel After Adding File main c Project Tree B Er sample Project R7F7O103524FP Microcontroller A CC RH Build Tool S gt RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File Build tool generated files R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 16 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 6 Project Tree Panel After Adding Folder src Project Tree UR sample Project FJ R7F701035
272. e optimization Specification format Xintermodule Interpretation when omitted Inter module optimization is not performed Detailed description This option performs inter module optimization The main optimization contents are shown below Optimization using inter procedural alias analysis The example of the output code is shown below C source extern int x 2 static int funcl int a int b a 0 b 1 return a func2 return funcl amp x 0 amp x 1 Output assembler source _funcl 1 Stack _func1 1 0 mov x r2 st w ro 0x00000000 r2 0x00000001 r5 st w r5 0x00000004 r2 mov 0x00000000 r10 O is assigned directly because a and b point to different types jmp r31 _func2 Stack _func2 mov x r6 addi 0x00000004 r6 r7 br9 _funcl 1 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 369 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Constant propagation of parameters and return values The example of the output code is shown below C source static int func int x int y int z return xX y Z int func2 return func 3 4 5 Output assembler source fune d Stack _func 1 0 mov 0x00000000 r10 4 3 4 5 is assigned directly jmp r31 _func2 Stack _func2 0 mov 0x00000005 r8 mov 0x00000004 r7 mov 0x00000003 r6 br9 _func 1 This option is equivalent to the following property in
273. e options of the rlink command Default No NOMessage How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Message Outputs information messages No NOMessage Suppresses the output of information messages Suppress number of Specify the number of the information message of which output is to be suppressed information message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also a range of message numbers can be specified using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the NOMessage option of the rlink command This property is displayed when No NOMessage in the Enable information message output property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters Change warning Select whether to change the type of warning messages to information message to information This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command message Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All Changes the type of all warning CHange_message lInformation messages to information Yes Specify message number Specifies the number of warning CHange_message lInformation message of which type is to be changed lt Messa
274. e preprocessed file information to This corresponds to the Xpreprocess option of the ccrh command preprocessed file This property is displayed only when Yes P in the Output preprocessed source file property in the Output File category is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xpreprocess line Outputs the line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file No Does not output the line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file 5 C Language The detailed information on C language is displayed and the configuration can be changed Compile strictly Select whether to process as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard according to ANSI and output an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard standards This corresponds to the Xansi option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xansi Processes as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard and outputs an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard Compatibility with the conventional C language specifications is conferred and processing continues after warning is output Enumeration type Select which integer type the enumeration type handles This corresponds to the Xenum_type option of the ccrh command
275. e the non local jump library functions This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default No How to change Restriction Select from the drop down list Yes LIBrary libsetjmp Uses the non local jump library functions No Does not use the non local jump library functions The detailed information on output codes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Specify execution start address Select whether to specify the execution start address with the external defined symbol or address This corresponds to the ENTry option of the rlink command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes ENTry Specifies the execution start address with the external defined symbol or address No Does not specify the execution start address with the external defined symbol or address R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 189 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Execution start address Specify the execution start address Specify in the format of symbol name or address Specify the address in hexadecimal This corresponds to the ENTry option of the rlink command The execution start address is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed only when Yes ENTry in t
276. eSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual RH850 Coding about declarations that take assignment into account This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Check C program compatibility in the C Language category From the Individual Compile Options tab Check C program compatibility in the C Language category Example of use To check the C source file that has been coded for the SH compiler describe as gt ccrh Xcheck she Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 359 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xmisra2004 This option checks source code against the MISRA C 2004 rules Specification format Xmisra2004 string Interpretation when omitted The source code is not checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules Detailed description This option checks source code against the MISRA C 2004 rules A message is output if the item specified for the check is string The items that can be specified as string are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Check Item Parameter Description string value all None The source code is checked against all of the rules which are supported apply num nun The source code is checked against the rules with the numbers specified by num among the rules which are supported ignore num nun The so
277. ease License Copyrights of other software components are owned by Renesas Electronics Corporation University of Illinois NCSA Open Source License Copyright c 2003 2012 University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign All rights reserved Developed by LLVM Team University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign http llvm org Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal with the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimers Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the names of the LLVM Team University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF M
278. ebugging with the debugger by outputting information for source debugging to the output file This corresponds to the g option of the ccrh command Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes g Generates the debug information No Does not generate the debug information The detailed information on preprocessing is displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during assembling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The specified include p
279. ecification format PADDING Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option fills in data at the end of a section so that the section size is a multiple of the alignment of the section This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Fill with padding data at the end of a section in the Output Code category Example of use In the following case 2 bytes of padding data are filled in the P section and linking is performed with a size of 0x08 Alignment of the P section 4 bytes Size of the P section 0x06 bytes Alignment of the C section 1 byte Size of the C section 0x03 bytes gt rlink a obj b obj start P C 0 padding In the following case if 2 bytes of padding data are filled in the P section and linking is performed with a size of 0x08 then an error will be output because it overlaps with the C section Alignment of the P section 4 bytes Size of the P section 0x06 bytes Alignment of the C section 1 byte Size of the C section 0x03 bytes gt rlink a obj b obj start P 0 C 7 padding Remark The value of the generated padding data is 0x00 Since padding is not performed to an absolute address section the size of an absolute address section should be adjusted by the user R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 445 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE OVERRUN_FETCH Th
280. ect only show Valid Valid Invalid Invalid Invalid show all Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid form hexadecimalNote 2 only show Valid Valid Invalid Invalid Invalid stypeNote 3 pinary show all Valid Valid Invalid Valid ValidNote 1 Notes 1 If a load module file is input this combination will be invalid 2 Ifa input file is an Intel Hex file the show option cannot be specified 3 If a input file is a Motorola S record file the show option cannot be specified The limitations on the output of the cross reference information are shown below When a load module file is input the referrer address information is not output The information about references to constant symbols within the same file is not output When optimization is specified during compilation information about branches to immediate subordinate functions is not output Both show total_size option and total_size option output the same information R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 451 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Section specification The section specification options are as follows STARt FSymbol ALIGNED_SECTION STARt This option specifies the start address of the section Specification format STARt section section section address section section L f section address Interpr
281. ect tree To change the display order of the subprojects on the project tree drag the subproject to be moved and drop it on the desired location R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 65 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 4 Display a list of build options You can display the list of build options set currently on the Property panel for the project main project and subproject Select Build Options List from the Build menu The current settings of the options for the project will be displayed on the Build Tool tab from the Output panel in the build order Remark You can change the display format of the build option list Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Set the Format of build option list property in the Others category Figure 2 92 Format of build option list Property ommands executed before build processing ommands executed before build processing U Commands executed after build processing Commands executed after build processing 0 Other additional options The following placeholders are supported Program Replaces with the program name under execution Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution TargetFiles Replaces with the file name being compile assemble or making link TargetFiles Program Options is set by default 2 11 5 Change the build target project When
282. ect tree and then select Remove from Project from the context menu Figure 2 7 Remove from Project Item Dy File Fall Build tool generated files Franca 2 Compile T Open A Open with Internal Editor E Open with Selected Application Open Folder with Explorer a Windows Explorer Menu Add gt a Copy Ctrl C 3 aP Rename F2 afe Change Extension Property 2 3 3 Remove a file from the build target You can remove the specific file from the build target out of all the files added to the project Select the file to be removed from the build target on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel Select No on the Set as build target property in the Build category Figure 2 8 Set as build target Property R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 18 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark The files that this function can be applied to are C source files assembly source files object files and library files 2 3 4 Classify a file into a category You can create a category under the File node and classify files by the category This makes it easier to view files added to the project on the project tree and makes it easier to manage files according to function To create a category node select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add N
283. ected 2 6 1 Add an include path Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel The include path setting is made with the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 39 Additional include paths Property Macro definition Macro definition 0 E Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 If you click the button the Path Edit dialog box will open R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 35 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 40 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line Fe Aine ProjectDir Browse C Permit non existent path C Include subfolders automatically Placeholder Placeholder Value ActiveProjectDir D work sample ActiveProjectName sample Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name b MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite 3 Menta aire A PERET Wee I Ab wah te math af ila menie nt Cot lt ii Description n Absolute path of the active projec Enter the include path per line in Path One path per one line You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 256 lines Remarks 1 This property supports placeholders If a line is double clicked in Plac
284. ed gt ccrh Xcommon v850e3v5 bbb c lt bbb obj is generated gt ccrh Xcommon v850e3v5 ccc c lt ccc obj is generated gt ccrh Xcommon v850e3v5 aaa obj bbb obj ccc obj lt aaa abs is generated Whether to run a build simultaneously is made with the property Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category Figure 2 112 Build simultaneously Property At this time the Assemble Options tab is hidden The assembly source file except the file with the individual options is assembled using the settings of the Compile Options tab Remarks 1 The build of the files with the individual build options and files to be executed prior to the build is run simultaneously A build of the file that is not targeted for a simultaneous build is run separately 2 Ifthe source file is older than the generated object module file or related properties and project or the like the object module file will be used for the build instead of the source file 3 Ifthe Build simultaneously property is changed from Yes to No the following message dialog box will open R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 78 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 113 Message Dialog Box Question Q0293005 p Are you sure you want to copy the current compile options t
285. ed The output file name will be the input file name with the extension replaced by i When the S option is specified The output assembly source file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by asm When the c option is specified The output object file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by obj Other than above The output load module file name will be the first input file name with the extension replaced by abs Detailed description This option specifies the output file name as file If file already exists it will be overwritten This option is valid when processing is interrupted by specifying the P S or c option If this option is specified with the P option It is assumed that is the name of the file containing the results of preprocessing performed on the input file has been specified as file If this option is specified with the S option It is assumed that an assembly source file name has been specified as file If this option is specified with the c option It is assumed that an object file name has been specified as file Other than above It is assumed that a load module file name has been specified as file An error will occur if two or more files are output An error will occur if file is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Individual Compile Options tab Object file name in the Output Fi
286. ed as path If one preprocessed file is output it will be saved with path as the file name If two or more preprocessed files are output an error will occur An error will occur if a nonexistent file is specified If two or more files with the same name even if they are in different folders are specified as source files then a warning is output and a preprocessed file is only saved for the last source file to be specified If two or more files with the same name even if they are in different folders are specified as source files then a warning is output and a preprocessed file is only saved for the last source file to be specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output folder for preprocessed source file in the Output File category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output folder for preprocessed source file in the Output File category Example of use To save the preprocessed file to folder D sample describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 340 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Source debugging control The source debugging control option is as follows 9 g This option outputs information for source debugging Specification format Interpretation when omitted Information for source debugging will not be output Detailed description This option output
287. ed description This option specifies output format format The items that can be specified as format are shown below Absolute Outputs a load module file Relocate Outputs a relocatable file Object Outputs an object file Use this when a module is extracted as an object file from a library by the extract option Library S U Outputs a library file When library s is specified a system library file is output When library u is specified a user library file is output If only library is specified it is assumed that library u has been specified Hexadecimal Outputs an Intel HEX file See 3 5 Intel HEX File for details Stype Outputs a Motorola S record file See 3 6 Motorola S record File for details Binary Outputs a binary file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 430 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If format is omitted it is assumed that Absolute has been specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Output hex file Hex file format in the Frequently Used Options for Hex Output category Output file format in the Frequently Used Options for Create Library category From the Hex Output Options tab Output hex file Use object uniting function in the Output File category Hex file format in the Hex Format category From the Create Li
288. ed files Bem system asm Assemble 7 E Open Open with Internal Editor Open with Selected Application Open Folder with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Add gt Remove from Project Shift Del Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Rename F2 Change Extension f Property 2 12 7 Stop running a build To stop running a build rebuild or batch build click on the toolbar 2 12 8 Save the build results to a file You can save the execution results of the build output messages of the build tool that displayed on the Output panel Select the Build Tool tab on the panel and then select Save Output Build Tool As from the File menu The Save As dialog box will open Figure 2 116 Save As Dialog Box Save in sample a DefaultBuild 4 4 ysub My Recent Documents e Desktop My Documents My Computer File name 0 utput Build Tool txt My Network Save as type Text file txt In the dialog box specify the file to be saved and then click the Save button R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 80 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 9 Delete intermediate files and generated files You can delete all the intermediate files and generated files output by running a build hereafter referred to as clean Running a clean is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 11 5 Change the
289. eholder the placeholder will be reflected in Path One path per one line 2 You can also specify the include path by one of the following procedures Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box Double click a row in Placeholder 3 Select the Include subfolders automatically check box before clicking the Browse button to add all paths under the specified one down to 5 levels to Path One path per one line If you click the OK button the entered include paths are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 41 Additional include paths Property After Adding Include Paths Additional include paths 2 Anc ProjectDir ystem include paths U Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition 0 Macro definition Macro undefinition To change the include paths you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties automatically R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 36 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Additional include paths property in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab 2 6 2 Set a macro definition Select the build tool node on the proje
290. ely after creating a project the main project is the active project 2 When you remove a subproject that set as the active project from a project the main project will be the active project Caution When a build is started by a button on the tool bar the build is run for the entire project To run a build only for the active project start it from the context menu of the active project R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 67 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 6 Adda build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the build you can collectively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and macro definition settings every time The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild Add a build mode according to the purpose of the build The method to add a build mode is shown below 1 Create a new build mode Creating a new build mode is performed with duplicating an existing build mode Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open Figure 2 95 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode DefaultBuild Apply to All Build mode list DefaultBuild If Dupicate Select
291. em with comma example 4 200 Also a range of message numbers can be specified using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes Specify message number CHange_message Error lt Message numbers gt in the Change warning message to information message property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters 11 Others Other detailed information on linking is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output stack information Select whether to output the stack information file file This corresponds to the STACk option of the rlink command Default How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes STACk Outputs the stack information file Does not output the stack information file Reduce memory Select whether to reduce the memory capacity occupancy This corresponds to the MEMory option of the rlink command This property is displayed only in the following cases When No NODEBug in the Output debug information property or No NOCOmpress in the Compress debug information property in the Debug Information category is selected When No in the Output external symbol allocation information fil
292. emble category on the Common Options tab R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 38 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 Set Link Options To set options for the link phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various link options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure 2 45 Property Panel Link Options Tab Property Ay CC RH Property E Debug Information Output debug information Compress debug information Delete local symbol name information E Optimization D etads Output external symbol allocation information file E Input File Object file Binary file Symbol definition E Output File Output folder Output file name E Library Using libraries System libraries Use standard libraries Use Standard Library function Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Use Non local jump Library function E Output Code Specify execution start address Fill with padding data at the end of a section Work around overrun fetch Yes Output to the output file DEBug Nof NOCOmpress No No Object file 0 Binary file 0 Symbol definition 0 BuildModeN ame ProjectN ame abs Using libraries 0 System libraries 0 Yes Yes LIBrary libc Yes LIBrary libm
293. ems How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 14 Others Other detailed information on the build tool is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 149 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output message format Specify the format of the message under build execution This applies to the messages output by the build tool to be used and commands added by plugins It does not apply to the output messages of commands specified in the Commands executed before build processing or Commands executed after build processing property The following placeholders are supported Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution Program Replaces with the program name under execution TargetFiles Replaces with the file name being compile assemble or making link If this is blank Program Options will be set automatically Default TargetFiles How to change Directly enter in the text box up to 256 characters or select from the drop down list Restriction TargetFiles Displays the file name in the output message TargetFiles Options Displays the file name and command line options in the output message
294. en Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libc Uses the standard library functions No Does not use the standard library functions R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 209 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Use Mathematical Library Double precision function APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to use the mathematical library double precision functions This property is changed to No when No in the Use standard libraries property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libm Uses the mathematical library double precision functions No Does not use the mathematical library double precision functions Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Select whether to use the mathematical library single precision functions This property is changed to No when No in the Use standard libraries property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default No How to change Se
295. ent environment for developing applications and systems for RH850 family and provides an outline of its features CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE for RH850 family integrating the necessary tools for the development phase of software e g design implementation and debugging into a single platform By providing an integrated environment it is possible to perform all development using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Readers Purpose Organization How to Read This Manual Conventions This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the CubeSuite and design software and hardware application systems This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the CubeSuite to use for reference in developing the hardware or software of systems using these devices This manual can be broadly divided into the following units CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE APPENDIX C INDEX It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electricity logic circuits and microcontrollers Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation XXX overscore over pin or signal name Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution Information requiring particul
296. ent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Specify CPU core in the Output File Type and Path category Example of use To generate an object for G3M describe as gt ccrh Xcpu g3m c Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 343 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Processing interrupt specification The processing interrupt specification options are as follows This option executes only preprocessing for the input file Specification format Interpretation when omitted Processing is continued after preprocessing The preprocessed file are not output Detailed description This option executes only preprocessing for the input file and outputs the results to a file The output file name will be the input file name with the extension replaced by i The output file name can be specified by specifying this option and the o option The contents of the output file can be controlled by specifying the Xpreprocess option This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output assembly source file in the Output File category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output preprocessed source file in the Output File category Example of use To execute only preprocessing for the input file and output the results to file main i describe as
297. enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters 5 Library The detailed information on the library is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 187 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Using libraries Specify the library files to be used The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command The library file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Using libraries number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button gt Edit by the Specify Using Library File dialog box which appears when clicking the Browse button For the subproperty you
298. entered in the dialog box and added to the main project and all the subprojects in the currently opening project When the build mode with mark does not exist in the main project or subproject and duplicate the build mode DefaultBuild will be duplicated Up to 20 build modes can be added Delete Deletes the selected build mode Note that DefaultBuild cannot be deleted Rename Renames the selected build mode Rename the build mode with entered name in the opening the Character String Input dia log box Caution When duplicating or renaming the build mode the existing build mode name cannot be used Remarks 1 Up to 127 characters can be specified as a build mode name When the input violates any restric tion the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description A build mode with the same name already exists The entered build mode name already exists More than 127 characters cannot be specified Build mode name is too long more than 128 charac ters The build mode name is invalid The following charac Invalid build mode name is entered The characters ters cannot be used lt gt 1 lt gt cannot be used because the build mode name is used for the folder name 2 Up to 20 build modes can be added When the input violates any restriction the following mes sages are shown in the tooltip The maximum number of build modes that can
299. epended project is run before the target project 2 If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a build rebuild or batch build then all these files are saved 2 Displaying execution results The execution results of the build output messages of the build tool are displayed in each tab on the Output panel Build rebuild or batch build gt All Messages tab and Build Tool tab Rapid build gt Rapid Build tab Figure 2 105 Build Execution Results Build Rebuild or Batch Build Start build all Friday February 15 Z013 1 39 38 PM Start build sample DefaultBuild sre main cel Renesas Optimizing Linker Completed Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 Ended Success 1 Projects Failed 0 Projects Friday February 15 2013 1 39 39 PM J EOF All Messages A Rapid Build J Build Tool R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 73 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 106 Build Execution Results Rapid Build gt sre main cal gt De faultBuildisample abs DefaultBuild sample mot Renesas Optimizing Linker C ompleted EOF Remarks 1 The text in the Rapid Build tab becomes dimmed 2 Whena file name or line number can be obtained from the output messages if you double click on the message you can jump to the relevant line in the file 3 If you press the F1 key when the cursor is on a line displaying the warning or error
300. eplaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before assemble processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before assemble processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 180 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after assemble processing after assemble Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file
301. er Opens the folder that contains the subproject file of the selected subproject with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Displays the context menu in Windows Explorer corresponding to the subproject file of the selected subproject Add Displays the cascading menu to add subprojects files and category nodes to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to the project The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to the project The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a category node directly below the File node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Set selected subproject as Sets the selected subproject to the active project Active Project Remov
302. er in decimal This corresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Apply specified rule number Xmisra2004 apply in the Apply rule property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify Rule Number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Exclusion rule number Specify the rule number to be excluded from the check Specify at least one rule number in decimal This corresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Ignore specified rule number Xmisra2004 ignore in the Apply rule property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify Rule Number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Check rule number Specify the rule number to be checked besides the required rules besides required rule Specify at least one rule number in decimal This corresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Apply rules that are classified as required and specified rule number Xmisra2004 required_add in the Apply rule property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Direct
303. ernal variable access optimization do not specify it for the first linking and specify it only for the second linking The symbol names in the debug information are not deleted by this option R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 470 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Total_ size This option displays the total size of sections after the linking to the standard error output Specification format Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option displays the total size of sections after the linking to the standard error output The sections are categorized as follows with the overall size of each being displayed Executable program sections Non program sections allocated to the ROM area Sections allocated to the RAM area This option makes it easy to see the total sizes of sections allocated to the ROM and RAM areas This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Display total size of sections in the Others category From the Create Library Options tab Display total size of sections in the Others category Example of use To display the total size of sections after the linking to the standard error output describe as gt rlink a obj b obj total_size Remark The showstotal_size option must be specified in order to output the total sizes to the link map file W
304. es To adjust the level of optimization None Optimize accesses to external variables No Perform inter module optimization No Perform optimization considering type of data indicated by pointer No Perform inline expansion of strcpy strcmp memcpy memset No Merge string literals No E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Include files at head of compiling units Include files at head of compiling units 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 C Language Character Encoding Output Code Output File Assemble List MISRA C 2004 Rule Check Error Output Warning Message Others Add debug information Specifies whether to generate the debug information Such information is generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option corresponds to the g optio Build Settings y File Information Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information Select whether to generate the debug information It is possible to perform source debugging with the debugger by outputting information for source debugging to the output file This corresponds to the g option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change
305. es not exist has been set the project folder is selected by default b Path Edit dialog box and Property panel The project folder is selected Function buttons Button Function Make New Folder Creates a new folder directly below the root of the selected folder The default folder name is New Folder OK Sets the designated folder path to the area that this dialog box is called from Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 304 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify Far Jump File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the Far Jump file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 45 Specify Far Jump File Dialog Box Specify Far Jump File 1 Look in sample e DefaultBuild 4 sub My Recent fl Func Fip Documents Lg Desktop My Documents My Cane 3 s ile name E on _ Far Jump file fip Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Compile Options tab Far Jump file names in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Far Jump file names in the Output Code category Description of each area 1 Lo
306. es of the projects specified as constituent applications into a file No Outputs the hex file for each project R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 201 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Output folder for united hex file 2 Hex Format Specify the folder which the combined hex file is output APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the OUtput option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use object uniting function property is selected Default BuildModeName _merged How to change Restriction Directly enter in the text box or edit by th
307. es with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after library generation processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Default Commands executed after library generate processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters
308. ess and end address of the output range in hexadecimal as address and address2 The output range including is always interpreted as addresses Specify the section to be output as section If multiple files are specified delimit them with a colon If this option and the form absolute hexadecimal stype binary option are specified at the same time two or more files can be specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Output folder Output file name in the Frequently Used Options for Link category Output folder Output file name Division output file in the Frequently Used Options for Hex Output category Output folder Output file name in the Frequently Used Options for Create Library category From the Link Options tab Output folder Output file name in the Output File category From the Hex Output Options tab Output folder Output file name Division output file Output folder for united hex file in the Output File category From the Create Library Options tab Output folder Output file name in the Output File category Example of use To output the range from 0 to Oxffff to file1 albs and the range from 0x10000 to Ox 1ffff to file2 abs describe as gt rlink a obj b obj output filel abs 0 ffff file2 abs 10000 1ffff To output the seci and sec2 sections to file1 abs and the sec3 section to file
309. essage If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also a range of message numbers can be specified using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes Specify message number CHange_message Information lt Message number gt in the Change warning message to information message property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters Change information Select whether to change the type of information messages to warning message to warning This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command message Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All Changes the type of all information CHange_message Warning messages to warning Yes Specify message number Specifies the number of information CHange_message Warning lt message of which type is to be changed Message number gt to warning Does not change the type of information messages Number of information Specify the number of the information message message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also a range of message numbers can
310. et during assembling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the option of the ccrh command The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed ztENESAS Page 138 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Macro definition Specify the name of the macro to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with on
311. etation when omitted Absolute address sections are allocated from smallest to largest and then relative address sections starting at the end of the absolute address sections are allocated in the order of appearance of the input files Detailed description This option specifies start address address of section section Specify address in hexadecimal Wildcard characters can also be used for section The section specified with wildcard characters are expanded in the input order Two or more sections specifing by delimiting them with a comma can be allocated to the same address i e sections are overlaid by delimiting them with a colon Sections specified at a single address are allocated in their specified order Sections to be overlaid can be changed by enclosing them by parentheses Objects in a single section are allocated in the specified order of the input file and the input library If the specification of an address is omitted the section is allocated from address 0 A section that is not specified by the start option is allocated after the last allocation address This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Section start address in the Section category Example of use The example below shows how sections are allocated when the objects are input in the following order The names enclosed by parentheses are sections in each object tp1 obj
312. etrrork i Link order specification file mtls Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Link Order dialog box click the Import button In the Section Settings dialog box click the Import button Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be imported to the area that this dialog box is called from exists The project folder is selected when the file is selected for the first time The previously selected folder is selected after the second time 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 317 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Select the name of the file to be imported to the area that this dialog box is called from 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be imported to the area that this dialog box is called from a In the Link Order dialog box Link order specification file mtls Link order specification file b In the Section Settings dialog box Section information file hsi Section information file All Files All the formats Function buttons Open Imports the designated file to the area that this dialog box is called from
313. ew File from the context menu Figure 2 9 Add New Category Item For File Node Leashes Efri Add Ee SS Addi Property Figure 2 10 Project Tree Panel After Adding Category Node Project Tree gt 8 sample Project R7F70103524FP Microcontroller A CC RH Build Tool S RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool amp Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Ej A File _ Tee category Remarks 1 The default category name is New category To change the category name you can use Rename from the context menu of the category node You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node 3 Categories can be nested up to 20 levels You can classify files into the created category node by dragging and dropping the file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 19 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 5 Change the file display order You can change the display order of the files and category nodes by the buttons on the project tree Figure 2 11 Toolbar Project Tree Panel Proiect Tree Q fsample Project a R7F7010352AFP Microcontroller A CC RH Build Tool RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool D Ce Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File tl Build tool generated files abs sample abs map sample map mot sample mot e main c Select any of the buttons below on the toolbar of the Project Tree panel Butt
314. expanded before lowercase characters Files that can be specified as input files are object files output from the compiler or the assembler and relocatable files load module files Intel HEX files and Motorola S record files output from the optimizing linker In addition a module in a library can be specified using the format of ibrary module Specify the module name without the extension If no extension is specified for the input filename then if no module name is specified it is assumed to be obj if a module name is specified it is assumed to be lib This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Object file in the Input File category From the Create Library Options tab Object file in the Input File category Caution This option can be used only in a subcommand file An error will occur if this option is specified on the command line When input files are specified on the command line specify them without the input option Example of use To input a obj and module e in lib1 lib describe as lt Command line gt gt rlink subcommand sub txt R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 423 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE lt Subcommand file sub txt gt input a obj libi e To input all obj files beginning with c describe as lt Command line gt gt rlink subcommand sub txt lt S
315. f options depend on the command that is used See B 5 1 Compile options B 5 2 Assemble options and B 5 3 Link options for cautions about options of each command A file name supported by Windows can be specified However cannot be used at the beginning of a file name because it is regarded as the subcommand file specification cannot be also used at the beginning of a file name because it is regarded as the option specification and cannot be also used for a file name because they are regarded as the part of link options The length that can be specified for a file name depends on Windows up to 259 characters Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the alphabet of a file name Two or more files can be specified as input Files which have different types C source file and assembly source file or object file and the like can be mixed Note that two or more files having the same source file name except for the extension cannot be specified even when they are stored in separate folders In this case even if there is an error in one file processing of the remaining files will continue if processing is possible The generated object file is not deleted after linking R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 326 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Example of operations The examples of operations on the command line are shown below Rema
316. f the current project to the project file with another name Remove from Project Removes the selected project or subproject from the project The subproject files or the file themselves are not deleted from the file system Save Project and Development Tools as Package b Build Saves a set of this product and the project by copying them in a folder It is also possible to pack and save the project only The Build menu shows menu items for the build process and others Build Project Runs a build of the project A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Clean Project Runs a rebuild of the project A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Runs a clean of the project A clean of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rapid build Toggles the rapid build function between enabled default and disabled Update Dependencies Updates the dependency of a file in the project to build The dependency of a file in the subproject to be build is also updated when the subproject is added to the project Build active project Runs a build of the active project If the active project is the main project
317. f the compile result for the C source file This corresponds to the Xasm_path option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_path Outputs the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source Does not output the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source Output folder for Specify the folder which the assembly source file is output assembly source file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name The assembly source file is saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by asm If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xasm_path option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_path in the Output assembly source file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 167 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2
318. f the entry information is shown below Entry address 00000100 1 Execution start address The execution start address is output However if the execution start address is 00000000 it is not output 3 3 6 Combined address information The combined source files and the start and end addresses and size of the continuous range data are output The output example of the combined address information is shown below Combine information 2 FILE samplel 00000100 00000127 samplel 00000200 00000227 sample2 00000250 00000263 sample2 00000300 0000033b Combined source file name The combined source file name is output R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 94 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Number Description Start addresses of continuous range data The start addresses of the continuous range data are output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number End addresses of continuous range data The end addresses of the continuous range data are output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number Size of continuous range data The size of the continuous range data is output in byte units This is expressed in a hexadecimal number 3 3 7 Address overlap information The overlapped combine source files and the start and end addresses and size of the continuous range data are output The output example of the address overlap information is sho
319. f the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The specified include path is searched with higher priority than the standard include file folder of CC RH The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CC RH is searched This corresponds to the option of the ccrh command The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Change the specified order of the include paths which the system set during compiling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode n
320. f this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the OUitput option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output file name Specify the hex file name Be sure to specify this property If the extension is omitted it is automatically added according to the selection in the Hex file format property in the Hex Format category When Intel HEX file FOrm Hexadecimal is selected hex When Motorola S record file FOrm Stype is selected mot When Binary file FOrm Binary is selected bin The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the OUitput option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected
321. f use To handle all external variables as if they were volatile declared describe as gt ccrh Xvolatile Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 357 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xcheck This option checks the compatibility of a C source file Specification format Interpretation when omitted The compatibility of a C source file is not checked Detailed description This option checks the C source file coded for the compiler specified as comp It checks for option specifications and source code that will impact compatibility when compiled with this compiler and outputs warnings or errors about any impacts found The items that can be specified as comp are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified shc Checks the C source file that has been coded for the SH compiler An error will occur if comp is omitted The main check items are shown below Options Xbit_order pos The settings which are not defined in the language specification and depend on implementation differ in each compiler Confirm the selections of the options which were output in the message Extended functions pragma section pragma entry pragma stacksize pragma address pragma global_register There is a possibility that extended specifications will affect program operation Confirm the descriptions on the extended specifications which
322. file The items that can be specified as info are shown below Output Information When form library When Other Than form library Option Is Specified info Option Is Specified SYmbol Outputs symbol names Outputs the symbol address size type and optimization contents within a module Reference Not specifiable Outputs the symbol address size type optimization contents and number of symbol references SEction Outputs section names Not specifiable in a module Xreference Not specifiable Outputs cross reference information Total_size Not specifiable Outputs the total sizes of sections separately for ROM allocated sections and RAM allocated sections ALL Outputs symbol names When the form relocate option is specified and section names ina Outputs the same information as when the module show symbol xreference total_size option is specified When the form absolute option is specified Outputs the same information as when the show symbol reference xreference total_size option is specified When the form hexadecimal stype binary option Outputs the same information as when the show symbol reference xreference total_size option is specified When the form object option is specified Not specifiable Remark See 3 2 Link Map File and 3 4 Library List File for details about output information See Remark for details about when the specification of output information is omitted If t
323. file lib Object file obj R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 262 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Relocatable file rel Python script file py Text file txt 2 Subfolder level to search area Directly enter the number of levels of the subfolder to be added to the project 1 is displayed by default Remark Up to 10 decimal number can be specified When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip Message Description Fewer than 0 or more than 10 values cannot be Fewer than 0 or more than 10 subfolder levels have been specified specified Specify in decimal A number in other than decimal or a string has been specified Function buttons Button Function OK Adds the folder that was dragged and dropped and the files in that folder to the project And then closes this dialog box Cancel Does not add the folder and files and then closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 263 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Figure A 22 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input 1 Function buttons The following items are explained here How t
324. g box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters Notify unused symbol Select whether to notify the defined symbol that is not referenced This corresponds to the MSg_unused option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes Message in the Enable information message output property is selected or the Suppress number of information message property is specified Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Notifies the defined symbol that is not referenced MSg_unused No Does not notify the defined symbol that is not referenced Change warning Select whether to change the type of warning messages to information message to information This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command message Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All Changes the type of all warning CHange_message lInformation messages to information Yes Specify message number Specifies the number of warning CHange_message lInformation message of which type is to be changed lt Message number gt to information No Does not change the type of warning messages R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 194 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Number of warning Specify the number of the warning message m
325. g control The source debugging control options are as follows 9 g This option outputs information for source debugging Specification format Interpretation when omitted Information for source debugging will not be output Detailed description This option outputs information for source debugging to the output file Source debugging can be performed by specifying this option This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Add debug information in the Debug Information category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Add debug information in the Debug Information category Example of use To output information for source debugging to the output file describe as gt asrh g Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 407 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device specification The device specification options are as follows Xcommon Xcpu Xcommon This option specifies that an object file common to the various devices is generated Specification format Xcommon series Interpretation when omitted An error will occur However an error will not occur if the V or h option is specified Detailed description This option specifies that an object file common to the various devices is generated When this option is specified only inst
326. ge number gt to information No Does not change the type of warning messages Number of warning Specify the number of the warning message message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also a range of message numbers can be specified using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes Specify message number CHange_message Information lt Message number gt in the Change warning message to information message property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 212 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Change information message to warning message APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to change the type of information messages to warning This corresponds to the CHange_message option of the rlink command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All CHange_message Warning Changes the type of all information messages to warning Yes Specify message number CHange_message Warning lt Message number gt Specifies the number of information message of which
327. gory name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Open Folder with Explorer This menu is always disabled Windows Explorer Menu This menu is always disabled Remove from Project This menu is always disabled Copy This menu is always disabled Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project Rename This menu is always disabled Property 5 When a file is selected Compile R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Displays this node s property on the Property panel Compiles the selected C source file Note that this menu is only displayed when a C source file except a non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation 2tENESAS Page 126 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Assemble Assembles the selected assembly source file Note that this menu is only displayed when an assembly source file except a non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Opens the selected file with the application corresponds to
328. h the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder This corresponds to the OUitput option of the rlink command The division output file name is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default Division output file number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 65535 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 143 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 7 Frequently Used Options for Create Library The detailed information on frequently used options during library generation is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only for the library project Output file format Select the format of the output file This corresponds to the FOrm option of the rlink command Default User libraries FOrm Library U How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction User libraries Outputs a user library file FOrm Library U System libraries Outputs a system library file FOrm Library S Relocatable file Outputs a relocatable file FOrm Relocate Output folder Specify the output
329. h the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after compile processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty
330. hat are classified of the required type except for the rules as required with the specified numbers among the Xmisra2004 required_remov_ rules which are supported e Apply rules that are described Checks the source code against the rules in the specified file with the numbers described in specified file Xmisra2004 lt file name gt among the rules which are supported Not apply rule None Does not apply the MISRA C 2004 rules R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 169 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Rule number description Specify the rule number description file MISRA C 2004 rule file file The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Apply rules that are described in the specified file Xmisra2004 lt file name gt in the Apply rule property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify MISRA C 2004 Rule File dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Rule number Specify the rule number to be checked Specify at least one rule number in decimal This co
331. he Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Generate product sum operation instruction in the Output Code category Example of use To generate product sum operation instructions for single precision floating point product sum operations describe as gt ccrh Xuse_fmaf Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 390 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xunordered_cmpf This option detects invalid operation exceptions in floating point comparison Specification format Xunordered_cmpf Interpretation when omitted Invalid operation exceptions in floating point comparison are not detected Detailed description This option generates code by using the comparison condition for generating an invalid operation exception when any of the comparison values is a not a number in floating point comparison This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Check invalid exception in cmpf instruction in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Check invalid exception in cmpf instruction in the Output Code category Example of use To detect invalid operation exceptions in floating point comparison describe as gt ccrh Xunordered_cmpf Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 391 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite
332. he Output File category is selected Default No MEMory High How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes MEMory Low Reduces the memory capacity Select this item if processing is slow because a large project is linked and the memory size occupied by the linker exceeds the available memory in the machine used No MEMory High Executes the same processing as usual Display total size of sections Select whether to display the total size of sections after the linking This corresponds to the Total_size option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Relocatable file FOrm Relocate in the Output file format property in the Output File category Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Total_size Displays the total size of sections after the linking No Does not display the total size of sections after the linki4ng Display copyright information Select whether to display copyright information This corresponds to the LOgo and NOLOgo options of the rlink command This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Default No NOLOgo How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LOgo Displays copyright information No NOLOgo Suppresses t
333. he Specify execution start address property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Fill with padding data at Select whether to fill with padding data at the end of a section the end of a section This corresponds to the PADDING option of the rlink command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes PADDING Fills in data at the end of a section so that the section size is a multiple of the alignment of the section No Does not fill with padding data at the end of a section Work around overrun Select whether to prevent reading of vacant areas due to overrun fetch fetch This corresponds to the OVERRUN_FETCH option of the rlink command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Inserts 128 byte NOP instructions in a vacant area OVERRUN_FETCH when a 128 byte or larger vacant area exists between sections or immediately after the end code section Does not prevent reading of vacant areas due to overrun fetch 7 List The detailed information on the list is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output link map file Select whether to output the link map file This corresponds to the LISt and SHow options of the rlink
334. he extract option is specified output information info cannot be specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Output link map file Output symbol information Output number of symbol reference Output cross reference information Output total sizes of sections in the List category From the Create Library Options tab Output link map file Output symbol information Output section list in a module Output cross reference information Output total sizes of sections in the List category R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 450 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To output the symbol address size type optimization contents and number of symbol references describe as gt rlink a obj b obj list show symbol reference Remark The following table shows whether output information info will be valid or invalid by the combinations of the form option and the show or show all option Reference Section Xreference Total_size form absolute only show Valid Valid Invalid Invalid Invalid show all Valid Valid Invalid Valid Valid form library only show Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Invalid show all Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Invalid form relocate only show Valid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid show all Valid Invalid Invalid ValidNote 1 Valid form obj
335. he ascending order of allocation address for each section Symbol allocation address The symbol allocation address is output When the form relocate option is specified this is a relative value from the start of the section Address of external symbol that has been referenced The address of the external symbol that has been referenced is output Unit number address or offset in section section name R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 91 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 3 Link Map File When Objects Are Combined This section explains the link map file that is output when the object combine function see 2 8 3 Combine multiple objects is used in a multi core project The link map file has detailed information regarding object combining The methods for outputting the link map file are shown below 1 2 3 3 1 For CubeSuite The settings for outputting the link map file should be made in the boot loader project Select the build tool node on the Project Tree panel and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel To output the link map file select Yes in the Output link map file property in the List category The file is output to the folder specified in the Output folder for united hex file property in the Output File category from the Hex Output Options tab The output file name will be the file name specified in the Output file nam
336. he main project or subproject When a new file is added an empty file is created in the location specified in the Add File dialog box By double clicking the file name on the project tree you can open the Editor panel and edit the file The files that can be opened with the Editor panel are shown below C source file c Assembly source file asm s Symbol address file fsy Header file h inc List file for assembly program Ist lis Preprocessor expanded file for assembly program exp Assemble list file prn Link order specification file mtls Link map file map Library list file lbp Intel Hex file hex R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 17 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Motorola S record file mot Text file txt Remarks 1 You can use one of the procedures below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag a file and drop it onto the Editor panel Select a file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu 2 When the environment is set to use an external text editor on the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external text editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS 2 3 2 Remove a file from a project To remove the file added to a project select the file to be removed from the project on the proj
337. he object file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Object file number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1024 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 206 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Binary file Specify the binary files Specify in the format of file name section name number of alignment section attribute symbol name with one entry per line number of alignment section attribute and symbol name can be omitted The value that can be specified for number of alignment is 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 If the specification is omitted it is assumed that 1 has been specified CODE or DATA can be specified as section attribute If the specification is omitted all attributes such as the ability to write read and execute will be all valid The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the
338. he output file name Xobj_path This option specifies the folder to save an object file generated during assembling Xprn_path This option specifies the folder to save the assemble list file Source debugging control 9 This option outputs information for source debugging Device specification Xcommon This option specifies that an object file common to the various devices is generated Xcpu This option specifies that an object for the specified core is generated Preprocessor control D This option defines assembler symbols U This option deletes the assembler symbol definition by the D option This option specifies the folder to search include files Japanese Chinese character control Xcharacter_set This option specifies the Japanese Chinese character code Generated code control Xreg_mode This option specifies the register mode Xreserve_r2 This option reserves the r2 register Xep This option specifies how to handle the ep register Assembler control specification Xasm_far_jump This option controls outputting far jump for an assembly source file Error output control Xerror_file This option outputs error messages to a file Warning message output control Xno_warning This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 ztENESAS
339. he output of copyright information R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 214 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed before create library processing Specify the command to be executed before library generation processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LibraryFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under the library generation processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python
340. he text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered path to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 272 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE System Include Path Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer the system include paths specified for the compiler and set their specified sequence Figure A 27 System Include Path Order Dialog Box System Include Path Order The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile cate gory and System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category From the Compile Options tab System include paths in the Preprocess category From the Assemble Options tab System include paths in the Preprocess category Description of each area 1 Path list display area This area displays the list of the system include paths specified for the compiler a Path This area displays the list of the system include paths in the specified sequence for the compiler The default order is
341. hecks the source code against the rules of the required type except for the rules with the specified numbers among the rules which are supported Apply rules that are described in the specified file Xmisra2004 lt file name gt Checks the source code against the rules with the numbers described in specified file among the rules which are supported Not apply rule None Does not apply the MISRA C 2004 rules Rule number description file The following placeholders are supported Specify the rule number description file MISRA C 2004 rule file BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Apply rules that are described in the specified file Xmisra2004 lt file name gt in the Apply rule property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify MISRA C 2004 Rule File dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Up to 259 characters 2tENESAS Page 236 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Rule number Specify the rule number to be checked Specify at least one rule numb
342. hed for the include paths Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Use whole include paths Select whether to compile using the include path specified in the Additional include paths specified for build tool property in the Preprocess category from the Compile Options tab of the build tool to be used The include paths are added by the following procedure Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from this tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from the Compile Options tab Paths displayed in the System include paths property from the Compile Options tab This corresponds to the option of the ccrh command Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Compiles using the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used No Does not use the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 226 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Include files at head of Specify the file that is included at the top of the compilation unit compiling units The following placeh
343. hem R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 446 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Insert immediately after the end section NOP instructions are inserted immediately after the end ROM section ROM section texti ROM section End ROM section text2 NOP instructions are inserted immediately after ROM section text2 When an address range is specified by the cpu option if the vacant area between the end address of the end section and the end address of the specified range is smaller than 128 bytes NOP instructions will not be inserted If the vacant area between the end address of the end section and an 8 Mbyte address boundary is smaller than 128 bytes NOP instructions will not be inserted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Work around overrun fetch in the Output Code category Example of use To prevent reading of vacant areas due to overrun fetch decsribe as gt rlink a obj b obj overrun_fetch Remark When no address range is specified by the cpu option and the end section is a ROM section NOP instructions are always inserted immediately after the end ROM section If a load module file is input this option will be invalid If the form object relocate library option is specified this option will be invalid When overlaid sections are specified by the start option
344. hematical Library Double precision function Select whether to use the mathematical library double precision functions This property is changed to No when No in the Use standard libraries property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libm Uses the mathematical library double precision functions No Does not use the mathematical library double precision functions Use Mathematical Library Single precision function R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Select whether to use the mathematical library single precision functions This property is changed to No when No in the Use standard libraries property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libmf Uses the mathematical library single precision functions No Does not use the mathematical library single precision functions 2tENESAS Page 145 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use Non local jump Select whether to use the non local
345. hen the ROM support function rom option has been specified for a section the section will be used by both the source ROM and destination RAM of the transfer The sizes of sections of this type will be added to the total sizes of sections in both ROM and RAM R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 471 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE LOgo This option outputs the copyright notice Specification format Interpretation when omitted This option outputs the copyright notice Detailed description This option outputs the copyright notice This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Display copyright information in the Others category From the Create Library Options tab Display copyright information in the Others category Example of use To output the copyright notice describe as gt rlink a obj b obj logo R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 472 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE NOLOgo This option suppresses the output of the copyright notice Specification format NOLOgo Interpretation when omitted The copyright notice is output It is the same result as when the logo option is specified Detailed description This option suppresses the output of the copyright notice This option is equivalent to the following propert
346. his is the name of this file Change the file name in the project tree panel Build Settings Description of each category 1 File Information The detailed information on the file is displayed and the configuration can be changed File name The file name is displayed Change the file name on the project tree Default file name How to change Changes not allowed Relative path The relative path from the project folder is displayed Default The relative path from the project folder How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path The absolute path of the file is displayed Default The absolute path of the file How to change Changes not allowed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 252 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Save with absolute path Select whether t APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE o save the file location with the absolute path This property is not displayed if the Property panel being displayed while a dependency file is selected on the project tree Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Saves the file location with the absolute path No Saves the file location with the relative path Last update The time and da te on which this file was changed last is displayed Default File updated time and date How to change Changes not allowed Writable 2
347. iction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Macro definition Specify the name of the macro to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the ccrh command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 4 Frequently Used Options for Assemble The detailed information on frequently used options during assembling is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category is selected R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 137 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Additional include paths System include paths R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the additional include paths during assembling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the act
348. ied this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 459 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE COmpress This option compresses the debug information Specification format Interpretation when omitted The debug information is not compressed It is the same result as when the nocompress option is specified Detailed description This option compresses the debug information By compressing the debug information the loading speed of the debugger is improved This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Compress debug information in the Debug Information category Example of use To compress the debug information describe as gt rlink a obj b obj compress Remark If the form object relocate library hexadecimal stype binary option or strip option is specified this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 460 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE NOCOmpress This option does not compress the debug information Specification format NOCOmpress Interpretation when omitted The debug information is not compressed Detailed description This option does not compress the debug information Link time when specifying this option is shorter than when the compress option is specified This option i
349. ific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the entered characters to the area that this dialog box is called from and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered characters to the area that this dialog box is called from and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 265 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Figure A 23 Text Edit Dialog Box When Caller Supports Placeholders Text Edit Placeholder Placeholder Value Description A ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active project folde ActiveProjectName sample Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite install YW lt gt Function buttons Help Figure A 24 Text Edit Dialog Box When Caller Does Not Support Placeholders Text Edit Function buttons R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 266 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The following items are exp
350. ile Output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectName abs E Library Using libraries Using libraries 0 System libraries System libraries 0 Use standard libraries Yes Use Standard Library function Yes LIBrary libe Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Yesf LlBrary libm Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Yes LIBrary libmf Use Non local jump Library function No E Output Code Specify execution start address No Fill with padding data at the end of a section No Work around overrun fetch No Others Output debug information Specify whether to output debug information This option coresponds to the NODEBug and DEBug option of the rink command R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 183 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output debug Select whether to output debug information information This corresponds to the DEBug and NODEBug options of the rlink command Default Yes Output to the output file DEBug How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Output to the Outputs debug information output file DEBug No NODEBug Does not output debug information Compress debug Select whether to compress debug information inform
351. ile for the optimizing linker a Cautions about description of a subcommand file The leading hyphen on option names can be omitted A space can be used in place of the equals sign as the delimiter between the option and parameter Specify one option per one line If the command line cannot fit on a single line you can use the ampersand amp to span multiple lines The subcommand option cannot be specified in a subcommand file The following characters are treated as special characters These special characters themselves are not included in the command line of the rlink command and deleted amp and The following line will be treated as a continuation semicolon The characters on that line before the end of the line are interpreted as a comment b Example of subcommand file specification Create subcommand file sub txt using an editor input file2 obj file3 obj This is a comment library libl lib amp This is a line continued lib2 1lib Specify sub txt by subcommand file specification option subcommand on the command line gt rlink filel obj subcommand sub txt file4 obj The command line is expanded as follows gt rlink filel obj file2 obj file3 obj library lib1 lib lib2 lib file4 obj B 4 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set options from CubeSuite On the CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property f
352. ile format property You can select any of the formats below Format Configuration User libraries FOrm Library U Outputs a user library file System libraries FOrm Library S Outputs a system library file The system library file is linked after the user library file Select this item to create a library that is to be linked after the user library file Relocatable file FOrm Relocate Outputs a relocatable file Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 247 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholder ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder NWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder BuildModeName is set by default Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with
353. ile into a category This node is always created below the File node Subproject name Subproject hereafter referred to as Subproject node Subprojects added to the project When each component the node or file is selected the detailed information property is displayed on the Property panel You can change the settings Remark When multiple components are selected only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed When multiple files are selected and the values of their common properties are different then the corresponding value fields are displayed blank R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 stENESAS Page 117 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This area has the following functions a Adding a file You can add a file by one of the following procedures The files are added below the File node lt 1 gt Adding an existing file Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add File from the File menu The Add Existing File dialog box will open Select the file to be added Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node Then select Add gt gt Add File from the context menu The Add Existing File dialog box will open Select the file to be added Copy the file using such as Explorer and then point the mouse to this area Select Paste from the Edit menu
354. ile output during assembling as path If an existing folder is specified as path the assemble list file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn to path An error will occur if a nonexistent folder is specified An existing file can be specified as path The assemble list file is saved with path as the file name An error will occur if a nonexistent file is specified If path is omitted the assemble list file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output assemble list file Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category From the Assemble Options tab Output assemble list file Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output assemble list file Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Output assemble list file Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category Example of use To save the assemble list file output during assembling to foler D sample describe as gt asrh Xprn_path D sample Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 406 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Source debuggin
355. imultaneously property is selected when this item is selected this item will be changed to No No Does not optimize accesses to external variables Perform inter module optimization selected Specify the level of inter module optimization such as function merging Only Yes Level 1 Perform Xintermodule and No are displayed when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is This corresponds to the Xwhole_program Xmerge_files and Xintermodule options of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Level 3 Perform with assuming it the whole program Xwhole_program Performs inter module optimization assuming that the source files comprise the entire program However operation is not guaranteed if the preconditions are not met See Xwhole_program for details about the preconditions Yes Level 2 Perform with merging files Xmerge_files Xintermodule Merges two or more C source files and performs inter module optimization This item is displayed only when two or more source files are added to the project Yes Level 1 Perform Xintermodule Performs inter module optimization for each file No Does not perform inter module optimization R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 157 of 485 CubeSui
356. in Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is granted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from such alteration modification copy or otherwise misappropriation of Renesas Electronics product Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following two quality grades Standard and High Quality The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots etc High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems and safety equipment etc Renesas Electronics products are neither intended no
357. in the Hex Format category The Output padding data property will be displayed Figure 2 73 Fill unused areas in the output ranges with the value and Output padding data Property E Hex Format Hex file format Motorola S record file FOrm Stype Fill unused areas in the output ranges with the value Yes Specification yalue SPace lt Numerical yalue gt Output padding data Fes 00 a Yo record Enter the fill value for the vacant area directly in the text box The range that can be specified for the value is 00 to FFFFFFFFFF hexadecimal number FF is set by default R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 53 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 3 Combine multiple objects For a multi core project the Intel HEX files or Motorola S record files in the projects specified as constituent applications can be combined into a single hex file This is called the object combine function Note that Intel HEX files and Motorola S record files cannot be mixed 1 Set the output of a hex file Set the output of a hex file and the hex file format in the boot loader project and each application project Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel Select Yes in the Output hex file property in the Output File category Figure 2 74 Output hex file Property Output file name ProjectName mot Division output file Division ou
358. ined here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Compile Options tab Rule number description file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category From the Individual Compile Options tab Rule number description file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 307 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Select the name of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from MISRA C 2004 rule file rde MISRA C 2004 rule file default All files All the formats Function buttons Open Sets the designated file to the area that this dialog box is called from Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 308 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Excluding File dialog box Th
359. ing point comparison This corresponds to the Xunordered_cmpf option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Generates code by using the comparison condition Xunordered_cmpf for generating an invalid operation exception when any of the comparison values is a not a number in floating point comparison No Does not detect invalid operation exceptions in floating point comparison Use 32 bit branch instruction Select whether to use the far jump function for the jarl and jr instructions By using the far jump function it is assumed that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and assembling is performed This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xasm_far_jump option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_option Assumes that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 Xasm_far_jump and jr32 instructions and performs assembling No Performs assembly as a jarl or jr instruction Specify jump instruction Specify the instruction to be generated for function call branches This corresponds to the Xcall_jump option of the ccrh
360. ing structure members according to the type of each member This corresponds to the Xpack option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction 1 byte Xpack 1 Aligns structure members on a 1 byte boundary 2 bytes Xpack 2 Aligns structure members on a 2 byte boundary 4 bytes Xpack 4 Aligns structure members on a 4 byte boundary No Does not perform structure packing Order of bit field members Select the order of bit field members This corresponds to the Xbit_order option of the ccrh command Default Allocates from right None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Allocates from left Allocates the members from the upper bit Xbit_order left Allocates from Allocates the members from the lower bit right None Output comment to assembly source file Select whether to output a C source program as a comment to the assembly source file to be output This corresponds to the Xpass_source option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_path in the Output assembly source file property in the Output File category is selected or when Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xpass_ source Outputs a C source
361. install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder This corresponds to the Binary option of the rlink command The binary file name is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed only when Relocatable file FOrm Relocate in the Output file format property in the Output File category Default Binary file number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1024 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 3 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output file format Select the format of the output file This corresponds to the FOrm option of the rlink command Default User libraries FOrm Library U How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction User libraries FOrm Library U Outputs a user library file System libraries FOrm Library S Outputs a system library file Relocatable file FOrm Relocate Outputs a relocatable file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 207 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 0
362. instructions Xfar_jump This option controls outputting far jump Xdiv This option generates the div and divu instructions for division Xcheck_div_ov This option checks the OV flag at division Xuse_fmaf This option generates product sum operation instructions Xunordered_cmpf This option detects invalid operation exceptions in floating point comparison Xmulti_level This option specifies the generation of a multi core program Xpatch This option applies a patch Information file output control Xcref This option outputs the static analysis information file Error output control Xerror_file This option outputs error messages to a file Warning message output control Xno_warning This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Phase individual option specification Xasm_option This option specifies assemble options Xlk_option This option specifies link options Subcommand file specification This option specifies a subcommand file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 333 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Version help display specification The version help display specification options are as follows V h V This option displays the version information of ccrh Specification format 1 Interpretation when
363. instructions and assembling is performed This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xasm_far_jump option of the ccrh command Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_option Assumes that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 Xasm_far_jump and jr32 instructions and performs assembling No Performs assembly as a jarl or jr instruction The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Object file name 6 Assemble List Specify the name of the object file generated after assembling The extension other than obj cannot be specified If the extension is omitted obj is automatically added If this is blank the file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by obj This corresponds to the o option of the ccrh command Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters The detailed information on the assemble list is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xprn_path option of the ccrh command
364. ion Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Use Non local jump Library function E Frequently Used Options for Hex Output Output hex file Hex file format Output folder Output file name Division output file Register Mode Error Output Warning Message Build Method Version Select Notes Others DefaultBuild Execute Module Load Module File Yes RH850 architecture common common h850 Object for G3M cpu g3m No BuildModeN ame Default Optimization None Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Using libraries 0 BuildModeN ame ProjectName abs Yes Yes LIBrary libc Yes LIBrary libm Yes LIBrary libmf No Yes Motorola S record file FOrm Stype BuildModeN ame ProjectName mat Division output file 0 Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu only available for the Property panel Context menu Link Options Hex Output Options e m y ions Compile Options R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 129 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node file or category node and then select Property from the View menu or Property from the context menu Remark When either one of th
365. ion definition and inline expansion is performed This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Compile strictly according to ANSI standards in the C Language category From the Individual Compile Options tab Compile strictly according to ANSI standards in the C Language category Note This is a standard specified by ISO IE C9899 1990 C90 Although ccrh also accepts some of the specifications added by ISO IE C9899 1999 C99 if this option is specified code in violation of the standard will cause an error R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 354 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To process as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard and output an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard describe as gt ccrh Xansi Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 355 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xenum_type This option specifies which integer type the enumeration type handles Specification format Xenum_type string Interpretation when omitted The enumeration type is handled as signed int Detailed description This option specifies which integer type the enumeration type handles The items that can be specified as string are shown below An error will occur if any o
366. ion is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Character encoding in the Character Encoding category From the Individual Compile Options tab Character encoding in the Character Encoding category Example of use To specify EUC as the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the input file describe as gt ccrh Xcharacter_set euc_jp Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 364 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Optimization specification The optimization specification options are as follows O Xintermodule Xinline_strcpy Xmerge_string Xalias Xmerge_files Xwhole_program O This option specifies the optimization level or the details of each optimization items Specification format O level O item value item value Interpretation when omitted Only optimization that debugging is not affected is performed It is the same result as when Odefault option is specified Detailed description This option specifies the optimization level or the details of each optimization items The items that can be specified as evel are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified nothing Optimization with debugging precedence Regards debugging as important and suppresses all optimization including def
367. ion on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Maximum number of Specify the maximum number of times to expand the loops such as for and while loop expansions If O or 1 is specified expansion is suppressed If this is blank it is assumed that 4 has been specified This corresponds to the Ounroll option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 0 to 999 decimal number or blank Remove unused static Select whether to remove the static functions which are not called functions This corresponds to the Odelete_static_func option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes To adjust the level Performs optimization according to the Level of of optimization None optimization property Yes Removes the unused static functions which are Odelete_static_func not called No Does not remove the unused static functions Odelete_static_func off which are not called R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 222 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Perform inline expansion Maximum increasing rate of inline expansion size APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify whether to perform inline expansion at the location calling functions This corresponds to the Oinline option of
368. is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before library generation processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Default Commands executed before library generate processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 215 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after library generation processing after create library Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LibraryFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under the library generation processing MainProjectDir Replac
369. is dialog box is used to select the file that will not be checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 47 Add Excluding File Dialog Box Add Excluding File O sample DefaultBuild sub My Recent 2 user_define h Documents Desktop 2 My Documents My Computer 3 PFile name gt i 8 iy Heterorh iles of type Ic header file h Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel after selecting the following properties open the Path Edit dialog box by clicking the button From the Compile Options tab Rule check exclusion file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category From the Individual Compile Options tab Rule check exclusion file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category And then click the Browse button in the dialog box Page 309 of 485 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown 3 File name area Select
370. is option prevents reading of vacant areas due to overrun fetch Specification format OVERRUN_ FETCH Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description 128 byte NOP instructions are inserted in a vacant area when a 128 byte or larger vacant area exists between sections or immediately after the end code section NOP instructions are inserted according to the allocation specified by the start option and output with the following section name obtained from the name of the section immediately before the inserted NOP instructions Ssss_fetch sss Name of the section immediately before the inserted NOP instructions 0199 1 Insert between sections NOP instructions are inserted when a 128 byte or larger vacant area exists between two ROM sections executable program sections or sections except program sections allocated to the ROM area or between a ROM section and a RAM section a section allocated to the RAM area ROM section End address 0x1100 text _ _ A 512 byte vacant area exists NOP instructions are inserted immediately after ROM section text1 Start address 0x1300 ROM section text2 For insertion between a ROM section and RAM section NOP instructions are inserted only when the RAM section is allocated to larger addresses than the ROM section addresses When the RAM section addresses are smaller than the ROM section addresses NOP instructions are not inserted between t
371. is specified a code is generated without using the Id dw and st dw instructions Example of use To generate a code without using the Id dw and st dw instructions describe as gt ccrh Xpatch dw_access Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 393 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Information file output control The information file output control option is as follows Xcref Xcref This option outputs the static analysis information file Specification format Interpretation when omitted The static analysis information file is not output Detailed description This option specifies the location where the static analysis information file to be generated during compilation as path If an existing folder is specified as path the static analysis information file is saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by cref to path If an existing file name is specified or a non existing folder or file name is specified the static analysis information file is output with path as the file name when one static analysis information file is output If two or more static analysis information files are output an error will occur An error will occur if path is omitted If two or more files with the same name even if they are in different folders are specified as source files then a warning is output and a static an
372. isplayed only when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 248 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Error message file name 8 Warning Message Specify the error message file name The extension can be freely specified The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName err has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters The detailed information on warning messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed Undisplayed warning message 9 Others Specify the number of the warning message not to be displayed If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with
373. it dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1024 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 185 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Binary file Specify the binary files Specify in the format of file name section name number of alignment section attribute symbol name with one entry per line number of alignment section attribute and symbol name can be omitted The value that can be specified for number of alignment is 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 If the specification is omitted it is assumed that 1 has been specified CODE or DATA can be specified as section attribute If the specification is omitted all attributes such as the ability to write read and execute will be all valid The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the projec
374. ith the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the Xpreinclude option of the ccrh command The specified include file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Include files at head of compiling units number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 247 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Macro definition Specify the name of the macro to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the ccrh command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty
375. itted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the ccrh command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Macro undefinition Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the U option of the ccrh command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro undefinition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 3 Character Encoding The detailed information on character encoding is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 177 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Character encoding Select the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the source file This corresponds to the Xcharacter_set option of the ccrh command Default Auto None How to ch
376. ive project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before build processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before build processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 151 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFEREN
377. ive project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The specified include path is searched with higher priority than the standard include file folder of CC RH The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CC RH is searched This corresponds to the option of the ccrh command The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Change the specified order of the include paths which the system s
378. ject If the active project is the main project a build of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Runs a rebuild of the active project If the active project is the main project a rebuild of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Runs a clean of the active project If the active project is the main project a clean of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the project file of the selected project with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Displays the context menu in Windows Explorer corresponding to the project file of the selected project Add Add Subproject Displays the cascading menu to add subprojects and files to the project Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to the project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension
379. jectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the OUitput option of the rlink command Default ProjectName lib How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 144 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Use standard libraries APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to use the standard libraries provided by the compiler This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the standard libraries No Does not use the standard libraries Use Standard Library function Select whether to use the standard library functions This property is changed to Yes LIBrary libc when Yes in the Use Mathematical Library Double precision function or Use Mathematical Library Single precision function property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libc Uses the standard library functions No Does not use the standard library functions Use Mat
380. king the button Restriction Up to 247 characters 3 Frequently Used Options for Compile The detailed information on frequently used options during compilation is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 135 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Level of optimization APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select the level of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the O option of the ccrh command Default Default Optimization None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Default Performs optimization that debugging is not Optimization None affected optimization of expressions and register allocation and the like Code Size Performs optimization with the object size Precedence Osize precedence Regards reducing the ROM RAM capacity as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Speed Precedence Performs optimization with the execution speed Ospeed precedence Regards shortening the execution speed as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Debug Precedence Performs optimization with the debug precedence Onothing Regards debugging as important and suppresses all optimization including default optimization Additional include paths R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Specify the additio
381. l folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the OUitput option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 142 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output file name Specify the hex file name If the extension is omitted it is automatically added according to the selection in the Hex file format property When Intel HEX file FOrm Hexadecimal is selected hex When Motorola S record file FOrm Stype is selected mot When Binary file FOrm Binary is selected bin The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the OUitput option of the rlink command This property is displ
382. l symbol allocation information file in the Optimization Details category Example of use To output external variable allocation information file file bls describe as Remark This option is valid only when the form absolute hexadecimal stype binary option is specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 439 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE SPace This option fills the vacant area of the output range Specification format Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option fills the vacant area of the output range with user specified data data The items that can be specified as data are shown below Numerical Value Hexadecimal value Random Random number The following vacant areas are filled with the value according to the output range specification in the output option When the section is specified as the output range The specified value is output to vacant areas between the specified sections When the start address and end address is specified as the output range The specified value is output to vacant areas within the specified range Output data sizes in units of 1 2 or 4 bytes are valid The size is determined by the hexadecimal number specified using this option If a 3 byte value is specified the upper digit is extended with 0 to handle it as a 4 byte value If an odd number of digits is specified
383. lained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category Division output file in the Frequently Used Options for Link category Division output file in the Frequently Used Options for Hex Output category Memo in the Notes category and Commands executed before build processing Commands executed after build processing in the Others category From the Compile Options tab Include files at head of compiling units Macro definition Macro undefinition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before compile processing Commands executed after compile processing in the Others category From the Assemble Options tab Macro definition Macro undefinition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before assemble processing Commands executed after assemble processing in the Others category From the Link Options tab Object file Binary file Symbol definition in the Input File category Division output file in the Output File category Section that includes startup function Section that outputs external defined symbols to the file Section alignment ROM to RA
384. layed and the configuration can be changed Character encoding 7 Output Code Select the character code to be used for Japanese Chinese comments and character strings in the source file This corresponds to the Xcharacter_set option of the ccrh command Default Auto None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Auto None Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS SJIS Xcharacter_set sjis Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS EUC Xcharacter_set euc_jp Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as EUC UFT 8 Xcharacter_set utf8 Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as UFT 8 Big5 Xcharacter_set big5 Interprets the Chinese character code in the source file as Traditional Chinese GB2312 Xcharacter_set gb231 2 Interprets the Chinese character code in the source file as Simplified Chinese No process Xcharacter_set none Does not interpret the Japanese Chinese character code in the source file The detailed information on output codes is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 162 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Structure packing Select whether to perform structure packing The specified alignment can be used without align
385. ld mode does not exist the build mode is duplicated from DefaultBuild with the selected build mode name and the build mode is changed to the duplicated build mode Remarks 1 The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild See 2 11 6 Add a build mode for the method of adding a build mode 2 You can change the name of the build mode by selecting the build mode from the build mode list and clicking the Rename button However you cannot change the name of DefaultBuild R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 70 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 8 Delete a build mode Deleting a build mode is performed with the Build Mode Settings dialog box Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The dialog box will open Figure 2 100 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to All Build mode list DefaultBuild BuildMode2 Select the build mode to be deleted from Build mode list and click the Delete button The Message dialog box below will open Figure 2 101 Message Dialog Box Question Q0232001 2 Delete build mode BuildMode2 ox tances tee To continue with the operation click the OK button in the dialog box The selected build mode is deleted from the project Caution You cannot delete DefaultBuild R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 71 of 485 Apr
386. le category R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 336 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To output the load module file with sample abs as the file name describe as gt ccrh osample abs Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 337 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xobj_path This option specifies the folder to save an object file generated during compilation Specification format Xobj_path path Interpretation when omitted The object file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by obj to the current folder Detailed description This option specifies the folder to save an object file generated during compilation as path If an existing folder is specified as path the object file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by obj to path An error will occur if a nonexistent folder is specified An existing file can be specified as path If one object file is output it will be saved with path as the file name If two or more object files are output an error will occur An error will occur if a nonexistent file is specified If path is omitted the object file is saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by obj If two or more files with the same name even if they are in different folders are s
387. le is output to the current folder under the output file name with the extension replaced by map The output information for the link map file can be specified by specifying the show option at the same time See 3 2 1 Structure of link map for details 3 2 1 Structure of link map The structure and contents of the link map are shown below Output Information Description show Option When show Option Specification Is Omitted Option information Option strings specified by a command line or Output subcommand file Error information Error message Output Link map information Section name start end addresses size and Output type Total section size Total sizes of RAM ROM and program show total_size No output sections Symbol information Static defined symbol name address size type show symbol No output in the order of address and whether show reference optimization is applied When the show reference is specified the reference count of each symbol is also output Cross reference information Symbol reference information show xreference No output Caution The show option is valid when the list option is specified See SHow for details about the show option R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 86 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 2 2 Option information Option strings specified by a command line or subcommand file are output The output examp
388. le of the option information when the following command line and subcommand file are specified is shown below lt Command line gt gt rlink subcommand test sub list show lt Subcommand file test sub gt input sample obj Options subcommand test sub 1 input sample obj 2 list 2 show 1 Options specified by command line The options specified by the command line are output in their specified order 2 Options specified in subcommand file The options specified in subcommand file test sub are output 3 2 3 Error information Error messages are output The output example of the error information is shown below Error Information E0562310 Undefined external symbol func_02 referenced in sample obj Description Error message Error messages are output R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 87 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 2 4 Link map information Start end addresses size and type of each section are output in the order of address The output example of the link map information is shown below Mapping List 1 SECTION SIZE ALIGN 00000000 0000003b fe600006 fe600003 fe600004 fe60000b Number Description Section name The name of the section is output Start address The start address is output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number End address The end address is outpu
389. lect from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libmf Uses the mathematical library single precision functions No Does not use the mathematical library single precision functions Use Non local jump Library function 5 List Select whether to use the non local jump library functions This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default No How to change Restriction Select from the drop down list Yes Uses the non local jump library functions LIBrary libsetjmp No Does not use the non local jump library functions The detailed information on the list is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output link map file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Select whether to output the library list file This corresponds to the LISt and SHow options of the rlink command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes List contents not specify LISt SHow Outputs information according to the output format to the library list file Yes List contents ALL LISt SHow ALL Outputs all information according to the output format to the library list file Yes List contents specify LISt Outputs the specified information to the library list file No 2tENESAS Does n
390. led description This option outputs data with data record record regardless of the address range The items that can be specified as record are shown below HEX record Expanded HEX record 32 bit HEX record S1 record S2 record S3 record If there is an address that is larger than the specified data record the appropriate data record is selected for the address This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Unify record size Unify record size in the Hex Format category Example of use To output 32 bit HEX record regardless of the address range Remark If the form hexadecimal stype option is not specified this option will be invalid An error will occur if the record S1 S2 S3 option is specified when the form hexadecimal option is specified or if the record H16 H20 H32 option is specified when the form stype option is specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 435 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ROm This option specifies the section that maps symbols from ROM to RAM Specification format ROm ROMsection RAMsection ROMsection RAMsection Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option reserves ROM and RAM areas in the initialized data area and relocates defined symbols in the ROM section with the addres
391. licking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the ccrh options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 152 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Compile Options tab APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This tab shows the detailed information on the compile phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Debug Information 2 Optimization 3 Optimization Details 4 Preprocess 5 C Language Character Encoding Output Code Output File Assemble List MISRA C 2004 Rule Check Others Figure A 5 Property Panel Property Aa CC RH Property Compile Options Tab E Debug Information Add debug information E Optimization Level of optimization E Optimization D etads Maximum number of loop expansions Remove unused static functions Perform pipeline optimization Use jr instruction to call a function at the end of the function Optimize accesses to external variables Perform inter module optimization Perform optimizatio
392. lude file folder Detailed description This option specifies the folder to search include files that are read by assembler control instruction INCLUDE BINCLUDE as path Include files are searched according to the following sequence 1 Path specified by the I option 2 Folder with source file 3 Folder of original C source file 4 Current folder If path does not exist a warning will be output An error will occur if path is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Additional include paths System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category From the Assemble Options tab Additional include paths System include paths in the Preprocess category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Additional include paths Use whole include paths specified for build tool in the Preprocess category Example of use To search include files from folder D include D src and the current folder in that order describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 412 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Japanese Chinese character conirol The Japanese Chinese character control option is as follows Xcharacter_set Xcharacter_set This option specifies the Japanese Chinese character code Specification format Xcharacter_set code Interpretatio
393. ly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify Rule Number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Exclusion rule number Specify the required rule number to be excluded from the check from required rule Specify at least one rule number in decimal This corresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Ignore specified rule number from rules that are classified as required Xmisra2004 required_remove in the Apply rule property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify Rule Number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 237 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Rule check exclusion file Specify files that will not be checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the Xignore_files_misra option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only in the following cases When Apply all rules is selected in the Apply rule property When Apply rules th
394. m with comma example 02042 02107 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 02222 02554 02699 02782 This corresponds to the Xno_warning option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters 13 Others Other detailed information on compilation is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 240 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before compile processing before compile Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling InputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Re
395. mat Interpretation when omitted The divq and divqu instructions are generated for division Detailed description This option generates the div and divu instructions instead of the divq and divqu instructions for division Although the divq and divau instructions are fast the number of execution cycles will differ depending on the values of the operands For this reason specify this option if it is necessary to maintain a constant number of execution cycles at all times e g in order to guarantee real time performance This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Generate div divu instructions in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Generate div divu instructions in the Output Code category Example of use To generate the div and divu instructions for division describe as gt ccrh Xdiv Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 388 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xcheck_div_ov This option checks the OV flag at division Specification format Xcheck_div_ov num Interpretation when omitted Code that does not check the OV flag at division is generated Detailed description This option generates code fetrap instruction that checks the OV flag after division instructions and generate an FE level software exception when the OV flag i
396. mat Xfar_jump file Interpretation when omitted The instructions in accordance with the Xcall_jump option are generated Detailed description This option generates the code that uses the jarl32 and jr32 instruction for the branch to functions including interrupt functions described by C language specified in far jump calling function list file file fjp is recommended as the extension of file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted An error will occur during linking if the function is in the range that cannot be branched to by the jarl or jr directive 2MB or more when the Xcall_jump 22 option is specified In this case recompile by using this option If this option is specified more than once the option specified last will be valid The example of the output code is shown below C source far_func jarl _far_func lp is output by default Output assembly source jarl32 _far func lp This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Far Jump file names in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Far Jump file names in the Output Code category Remark Cautions about are the format of the far jump calling function list file as follows Describe with one function name per line If two or more function name is described the first name will be valid Describe
397. mation is shown below Renesas Optimizing Linker VX XX XX XX XxxX XXXX XX XX XX 1 Version information of the optimizing linker and time of linkage The version information of the optimizing linker and the time of linkage are output 3 3 3 Option information Option strings specified by a command line or subcommand file are output The output example of the option information when the following command line and subcommand file are specified is shown below lt Command line gt gt rlink subcommand test sub list lt Subcommand file test sub gt input samplel mot input sample2 mot form stype output result Options subcommand test sub input samplel mot input sample2 mot form stype output result list Description Options specified by command line The options specified by the command line are output in their specified order Options specified in subcommand file The options specified in subcommand file test sub are output R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 93 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 3 4 Error information Error messages are output The output example of the error information is shown below Error Information E0562420 samplel mot overlap address sample2 mot 00000100 Error message Error messages are output 3 3 5 Entry information The execution start address is output The output example o
398. me How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters 10 MISRA C 2004 Rule Check The detailed information on the MISRA C 2004 rule check are displayed and the configuration can be changed Apply rule Select the MISRA C 2004 rules to be applied This corresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command Default Not apply rule None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Apply all rules Checks the source code against all of the Xmisra2004 all rules which are supported Apply specified rule number Checks the source code against the rules Xmisra2004 apply with the specified numbers among the rules which are supported Ignore specified rule number Checks the source code against the rules Xmisra2004 ignore that do not match the specified numbers among the rules which are supported Apply rules that are classified Checks the source code against the rules as required of the required type Xmisra2004 required Apply rules that are classified Checks the source code against the rules as required and specified of the required type and the rules with the rule number specified numbers among the rules which Xmisra2004 required_add are supported Ignore specified rule number Checks the source code against the rules from rules t
399. message you can display the help related to that line s message Files generated by the build tool appear under the Build tool generated files node on the Project Tree panel Figure 2 107 Build Tool Generated Files Project Tree 2 SRE zj sample Project mE R7F70103524FP Microcontroller Ay CC RH Build Tool i RH850 E1 LPD Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 4 tl Build tool generated files abs sample abs map sample map mot sample mot Remark Files displayed under the Build tool generated files node are as follows For other than the library project Load module file abs Intel Hex file hex Motorola S record file mot Binary file bin Link map file map Library file lib Library list file lbp Error message file err R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 74 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS For the library project Library file lib Error message file err Caution The Build tool generated files node is created during build This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after building 2 12 1 Run a build of updated files Out of build target files a build of only updated files is run hereafter referred to as build Running a build is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 11 5 Change the build target project 1 When running a build of the entire project
400. mmand file usage 328 B 4 3 Set options in CubeSuite 329 B 5 Option 330 B 5 1 Compile options 331 B 5 2 Assemble options 400 B 5 3 Link options 421 B 6 Specifying Multiple Options 476 B 6 1 Priority 476 B 6 2 Incompatible features 476 B 6 3 Dependencies 476 B 6 4 Relationship with pragma directives 477 APPENDIX C INDEX 478 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 1 GENERAL This chapter explains the overview of the build tool CC RH 1 1 Overview CC RH is comprised of components provided by this product It enables various types of information to be configured via a GUI tool enabling you to generate the load module file or library file and the like from your source files according to your objectives Figure 1 1 Operation Flow of CC RH C source file Assembly source file 3 oes CC RH Stack information file Compiler Object file Assembler Call Walker Optimizing linker Library file Load module file Relocatable file Motorola S record file Intel HEX file Binary file Remark See APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE for details about the commands that comprises CC RH See 2 13 Estimate the Stack Capacity for Call Walker R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 8 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 Copyrights This LLVM based software was developed in compliance with the LLVM Rel
401. n 13 BYte_count Link option 444 Cc c Compile option 346 category 19 Change the build mode 69 Change the output file name 24 CHange_message Link option 468 APPENDIX C INDEX Character String Input dialog box 264 Clean 81 COmpress Link option 460 CPu Link option 456 D D Compile option 347 410 DEBug Link option 433 DEFine Link option 428 DELete Link option 464 Delete a build mode 71 E Editor panel 256 END Link option 474 ENTry Link option 429 EXIt Link option 475 EXTract Link option 466 F File dependencies 20 File display order 20 FOrm Link option 430 FSymbol Link option 454 G g Assemble option 407 g Compile option 341 General Build Debug category 296 H h Assemble option 403 h Compile option 335 Hide Link option 469 I I Assemble option 412 I Compile option 349 Import Build Options dialog box 301 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 478 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Input Link option 423 Intel HEX file 100 Data record 103 End record 104 Expanded address record 103 Expanded linear address record 102 Start address record 102 Start linear address record 102 Structure of the Intel HEX file 100 L LI
402. n APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to use the standard library functions This property is changed to Yes LIBrary libc when Yes in the Use Mathematical Library Double precision function or Use Mathematical Library Single precision function property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default Yes LIBrary libc How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libc Uses the standard library functions No Does not use the standard library functions Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Select whether to use the mathematical library double precision functions This property is changed to No when No in the Use standard libraries property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default Yes LIBrary libm How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libm Uses the mathematical library double precision functions No Does not use the mathematical library double precision functions Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Select whether to use the mathematical library single precision function
403. n Information According To Output Format Is Output Remark See Remark in SHow for differences between the SHow and SHow ALL options 2 Specify information to be output Select Yes List contents specify LISt in the Output link map file property The following property will be displayed Output symbol information property Output section list in a module property Output cross reference information property Output total sizes of sections propertyNote 2 Note 1 Note 2 Notes 1 This property is displayed only when User libraries FOrm Library U or System libraries FOrm Library S in the Output file format property in the Output File category is selected 2 This property is displayed only when Relocate file FOrm Relocate in the Output file format property in the Output File category is selected Select Yes for each output information property R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 28 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 27 Output link map file Property When Information To Be Output Is Specified Output link map file Yes List contents specify LISt Uutput symbol information Output section list in a module No The library list file is output to the project folder It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node The file name will be the project file name with the extension replaced by lbp Remark
404. n Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters 7 Error Output The detailed information on the error output is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output error message Select whether to output the error message file file This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the cerh command Error messages are displayed on the Output panel regardless of this property s Default Configuration of the common option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xerror_file Outputs the error message file No Does not output the error message file Error message file output Specify the folder which the error message file is output folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the ccrh command This property is d
405. n considering type of data indicated by pointer Perform inline expansion of strepy stremp memepy memset Merge string literals El Preprocess Additional include paths System include paths Include files at head of compiling units Macro definition Macro undefinition C Language Character Encoding Output Code Output File Assemble List MISRA C 2004 Rule Check Yes g Default Optimization None Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Yes To adjust the level of optimization None No No No No No Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Include files at head of compiling units 0 Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition 0 Add debug information Specifies whether to generate the debug information Such information is generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option corresponds to the g optio Common Options Link Options R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Hex Output Options Page 153 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information Select whether to generate the debug information It is possible to perform source debugging with the debugger by outputting info
406. n of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add New File On the Project Tree panel select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or Category node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu Description of each area 1 File type area Select the type of the file to be created When the file type is selected the description is displayed at the lower box The file types to be displayed are as follows C source file c Header file h inc Assembly source file asm s fsy Python script file py Text file txt R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 260 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 File name area Directly enter the name of the file to be created txt is displayed by default Remark _ If any extension is not designated the one selected in the File type area will be added Also if the extension different from the one selected in the File type area is designated the one selected in the File type area will be added for example if you designate aaa txt as the file name and select C source file c as the file type the file is named as aaa txt c 3 File location area Designate the location to be created the file by directly entering its path or selecting from the Refer button The path of the project folder is displ
407. n the Library category And then click the Browse button in the dialog box Page 311 of 485 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown 3 File name area Select the name of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from Library file lib Library file Function buttons Open Sets the designated file to the area that this dialog box is called from Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 312 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name Figure A 49 Save As Dialog Box a O sample B DefaultBuild sub My Recent Documents 3 ile name Output Build Tool txt 4 vy Network gt Text file tt Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description
408. n the subproperty How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65535 items can be specified 9 Verify The detailed information on verification is displayed and the configuration can be changed Check section larger Select whether to check the consistency of the address to which the section is allocated than specified range of This corresponds to the CPu option of the rlink command address Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes CPu Checks the consistency of the address to which the section is allocated Default No Does not check the consistency of the address to which the section is allocated Address range of Specify the address range of the memory type memory type Specify in the format of memory type start address end address with one entry per line Any of ROm RAm or FIX can be specified as memory type Specify start address and end address in hexadecimal This corresponds to the CPu option of the rlink command The address range of the memory type is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed only when Yes CPu in the Check section larger than specified range of address property is selected Default Address range of memory type number of defined items
409. n when omitted Processing of Japanese Chinese character encoding is not performed Detailed description This option specifies the character code to be used for Japanese Chinese comments and character strings in the source file The items that can be specified as code are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Operation is not guaranteed if the specified character code differs from the character code of the source file none Does not process the Japanese and Chinese character code euc_jp EUC Japanese sjis SJIS utf8 UTF 8 big5 Traditional Chinese gb2312 Simplified Chinese An error will occur if code is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Character encoding in the Character Encoding category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Character encoding in the Character Encoding category Example of use To specify EUC as the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the input file describe as gt asrh Xcharacter_set euc_jp Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 413 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Generated code control The generated code control options are as follows Xreg_mode Xreserve_r2 Xep Xreg_mode This option specifies the register mode
410. nable All Selects all the checkboxes in Select items Disable All Clears all the checkboxes in Select items Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 276 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Section Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add modify or delete sections Figure A 29 Section Settings Dialog Box Section Settings Address Section Overlay Overlay2 Tg user01 text user02 text user03 text OxFEBFS000 user01 text A userl2textR user03 text A Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following property and then click the button From the Link Options tab Section start address in the Section category Description of each area 1 Address section area This area displays the list of currently configured section allocations a Address This area displays the start addresses of the sections b Section This area displays the names of the sections c Overlayn This area displays the names of the sections to be overlaid n number starting with 1 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 277 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d Button When selecti
411. nal include paths during compiling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The specified include path is searched with higher priority than the standard include file folder of CC RH The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CC RH is searched This corresponds to the l option of the ccrh command The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For
412. nd Individual Assemble Options tab for an assembly source file 6 Save the project Save the setting contents of the project to the project file Remark See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start for details about saving the project 2 2 Change the Build Tool Version You can change the version of the build tool compiler package used in the project main project or subproject Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select Always latest version which was installed or the version in the Using compiler package version property in the Version Select category Figure 2 1 Using compiler package version Property E Yersion Select Remarks 1 When the build tool used in the main project and subprojects is the same you can collectively change the build tool version by selecting all of the Build tool nodes and setting the property 2 Ifyou have selected a compiler package that has not been installed e g if you open a project created in another execution environment then that version is also displayed 3 Ifthe options change depending on the compiler package then the display of the build tool s properties will change according to the selected version Properties that are hidden when the version is changed are saved in the project file s settings and the values will be reproduced when the properties are displayed again Options
413. nfiguration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Generate a program Generates a single core program for single core None The pragma pmodule directives in the program are ignored Generate a program Generates a multi core program for multi core The pragma pmodule directives in the program Xmulti_level 1 become valid and the PM number is added to the end of the section name The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Object file name Specify the name of the object file generated after compilation The extension other than obj cannot be specified If the extension is omitted obj is automatically added If this is blank the file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by obj This corresponds to the o option of the ccrh command Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Output assembly source file Select whether to output the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source This corresponds to the Xasm_path option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_path Outputs the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source No Does not output the assembly source file
414. ng Message category and Other additional options property in the Others category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Undisplayed warning message in the Warning Message category and Other additional options property in the Others category R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 264 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 String area Input characters in one line By default the current value of the area that this dialog box is called from is reflected to this area You cannot start a new line Remark Up to 32767 characters can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip More than maximum number of restriction in the The numbers of input characters exceeds the property that called this dialog box characters cannot be maximum number of restriction in the property that specified called this dialog box a Button The placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed in a popup ascending order If a placeholder is selected the string will be surrounded with percentage signs and displayed in String Caution This button is displayed only when the caller of this dialog box supports placeholders Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the spec
415. ng an address in this area Opens the Section Address dialog box Adds the address specified in the dialog box to this area so that the addresses are listed in the ascending order the section column remains empty When selecting a section in this area Opens the Add Section dialog box Adds the section specified in the dialog box to this area When there is no empty column in the section group an address and the sections allocated to the address where the specified section is to be included a new section row is added to the bottom of the section group When there is an empty column the section is added there When selecting an address in this area Opens the Section Address dialog box Moves the section group according to the address specified in the dialog box so that the addresses are listed in the ascending order in this area When selecting a section in this area Opens the Modify Section dialog box Replaces the section name selected in this area with the one specified in the dialog box Note that this button is disabled when the selected sell is blank New Overlay Opens the Add Overlay dialog box Adds the Overlayn column in this area and sets the section specified in the dialog box in the column that corresponds to the selected section group Remove When selecting an address in this area Opens the Unassigned Section dialog box Deletes the section selected in the dialog box from this area If no
416. ng the editor The file with the specific extension is opened in the Editor panel When an external text editor is set to be used in the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external text editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 122 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Caution The file with the extension that is not associated with the host OS is not displayed You can open the editor by one of the following procedures Double click the file Select a file and then select Open from the context menu Select a file and then press the Enter key The files that can be opened with the Editor panel are shown below C source file c Assembly source file asm s Symbol address file fsy Header file h inc List file for assembly program Ist lis Preprocessor expanded file for assembly program exp Assemble list file prn Link order specification file mtls Link map file map Library list file llbp Intel Hex file hex Motorola S record file mot Text file txt Remark You can use one of the procedures below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag a file and drop it onto the Editor panel Select a file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu
417. nged from these tabs the properties are displayed in boldface Debug Information 1 2 Preprocess 3 Character Encoding 4 Output Code 5 Output File 6 Assemble List 7 Error Output 8 Warning Message 9 Others Remark This tab is displayed only when Yes in the Set individual assemble option property in the Build category from the Build Settings tab is selected Figure A 15 Property Panel Individual Assemble Options Tab Property asm system s Property E Debuginformation Add debug information Yesl g E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 Character Encoding Add debug information Specifies whether to generate the debug information Such information is generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option corresponds to the g optio R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 243 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information 2 Preprocess Select whether to generate the debug information It is possible to perform source d
418. ns the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified f The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Open Folder with Explorer Opens the shortcut destination to the folder set in the selected category by Explorer Note that this menu is disabled when the shortcut to the folder is not set Windows Explorer Menu Remove from Project Displays the context menu in Windows Explorer corresponding to the shortcut destination in the folder set in the selected category Note that this menu is disabled when the shortcut to the folder is not set Removes the selected category node from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copy Copies the selected
419. nsion replaced by obj to the current folder Detailed description This option specifies the folder to save an object file generated during assembling as path If an existing folder is specified as path the object file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by obj to path An error will occur if a nonexistent folder is specified An existing file can be specified as path If one object file is output it will be saved with path as the file name If two or more object files are output an error will occur An error will occur if a nonexistent file is specified If path is omitted the object file is saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by obj If two or more files with the same name even if they are in different folders are specified as source files then a warning is output and an object file is only saved for the last source file to be specified Example of use To save the object file generated during assembling to foler D sample describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 405 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xprn_path This option specifies the folder to save the assemble list file Specification format Xprn_path path Interpretation when omitted An assemble list file will not be output Detailed description This option specifies the folder to save the assemble list f
420. o The compiler uses the r2 register without reserving it ep register treatment Select how to handle the ep register Specify Fix in project Xep fix when any of the following attribute strings in a pragma section in the project is used ep_auto ep_disp4 ep_disp5 ep_disp7 ep_disp8 ep_disp16 ep_disp23 Only Treat as callee save None is displayed when Yes in the Optimize accesses to external variables property in the Optimization Details category from the Compile Options tab is selected This corresponds to the Xep option of the ccrh command Default Treat as callee save None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Treat as callee save None Fixes the value of the ep register for the entire project Fix in project Xep fix Treats the ep register as a register guaranteeing the value before and after the function call R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 146 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note The register modes provided by CC RH are shown below Register Mode Working Registers Registers for Register Variables common r10 to r14 r25 to r29 22 register mode r10 to r14 r25 to r29 32 register mode r10 to r19 r20 to r29 9 Error Output The detailed information on the error output is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output error message Select whether to output the erro
421. o open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select a file and then select Change Extension from the context menu to open a message dialog box And then click the Yes button in the dialog box On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Undisplayed warning message in the Warning Message category Format of build option list Other additional options in the Others category From the Compile Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Assemble Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Link Options tab Execution start address in the Output Code category Suppress number of information message Number of warning message Number of information message Number of information and warning message in the Message category and Other additional options in the Others category From the Hex Output Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Create Library Options tab Suppress number of information message Number of warning message Number of information message Number of information and warning message in the Message category and Other additional options in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options tab Undisplayed warning message in the Warni
422. o the FOrm option of the rink command Common Options Compile Options Link Options y Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Hex Output category on the Common Options tab 2 8 1 Set the output of a hex file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel 1 Set the output of a hex file The setting to output a hex file is made with the Output hex file property in the Output File category To output a hex file select Yes to not output a hex file select No Figure 2 67 Output hex file Property i 1 tle Uutput folder 7 Output file name Division output file ProjectN ame mat Division output file 0 When outputting a hex file you can set the output folder and output file name R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 50 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 247 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholder ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main
423. o the assemble ej options for all build modes If No is selected copy the current build mode options only Ee e Cen Ce _ When Yes is clicked in the dialog box the same Compile Options tab settings are copied to the Assemble Options tab in all build modes When No is clicked the same Compile Options tab settings are copied to the Assemble Options tab in the current build mode If Cancel is clicked the state before the Assemble Options tab was hidden will be displayed 2 12 6 Compile assemble individual files You can just compile or assemble for each source file added to the project 1 When compiling a C source file Select the C source file on the project tree and select the Compile from the context menu Figure 2 114 Compile Item 3 g File Fall Build tool generated files c in s e ETES 5 e Open Open with Internal Editor Open with Selected Application Open Folder with Explorer iii SG bey Windows Explorer Menu Add gt i Remove From Project Shift Del t Copy Ctrl C ay Paste ap Rename F2 aje Change Extension Property 2 When assembling an assembly source file Select the assembly source file on the project tree and select the Assemble from the context menu R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 79 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 115 Assemble Item Bi File 4 Fall Build tool generat
424. of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select Save file name As from the File menu Focus the Output panel and then select Save tab name As from the File menu Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder to save the panel contents in the file The following folders are selected by default a In the Editor panel The folder that currently editing file is saved is selected R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 313 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b In the Output panel The project folder is selected when the file is saved for the first time The previously selected folder is selected after the second time 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Save in area and Save as type area 3 File name area Designate the name of the file to be saved 4 Save as type area a In the Editor panel This area displays any of the following file types depend on the type of the currently editing file Remark The following strings are displayed only for the files registered in the project tree C source file c C source file Header file h inc Header file Assembly source file asm s Assembly source file Link order specification file mtls Link order specification file Link map file map Link map file Library list fil
425. of symbol reference property Output cross reference information property Output total sizes of sections property Select Yes for each output information property R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 27 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 25 Output link map file Property When Information To Be Output Is Specified Output link map file Yes List contents specify LISt Uutput symbol information No Output number of symbol reference No Output cross reference information No Output total sizes of sections No The link map file is output to the project folder It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node The file name will be the project file name with the extension replaced by map Remark See 3 2 Link Map File for details about the link map file 2 4 4 Output library information The library information information from the library creation result is output to the library list file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel To output the library list file set the Output link map file property in the List category 1 Output information according to the output format Select Yes List contents not specify LISt SHow or Yes List contents ALL LISt SHow ALL in the Output link map file property Figure 2 26 Output link map file Property Whe
426. of the Select whether to output the message of the enhanced key word and extended specifications enhanced key word and This corresponds to the Xcheck_language_extention option of the cerh command extended specifications This property is displayed only in the following cases When Apply all rules is selected in the Apply rule property When Apply rules that are classified as required is selected in the Apply rule property When Apply specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Rule number property When Ignore specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Rule number property When Apply rules that are classified as required and specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Check rule number besides required rule property When Ignore specified rule number from rules that are classified as required is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Exclusion rule number from required rule property When Apply rules that are described in the specified file is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number description file is specified in the Rule number description file property Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes
427. ok in area Select the folder where the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 305 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Select the name of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from Far Jump file fjp Far Jump file Function buttons Open Sets the designated file to the area that this dialog box is called from Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 306 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify MISRA C 2004 Rule File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the MISRA C 2004 rule file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 46 Specify MISRA C 2004 Rule File Dialog Box Specify MISRA C 2004 Rule File 1 Look in sample DefaultBuild S 4 sub My Recent El rule rde Documents Lg Desktop My Documents My ere 3 TE l B Co 4 Arteta Fi MISRA C 2004 rule file de Function buttons The following items are expla
428. older You can add a folder using such as Explorer by the following procedure The folder is added below the File node The folder is added as a category Drag the folder using such as Explorer and drop it onto the destination The Add Folder and File dialog box will open Specify the file types and subfolder levels in the folder to be added Caution You cannot drag and drop a folder and file onto this area simultaneously g Editing the display of the subproject build order Subprojects are displayed in order of build from the top Therefore the build order can be changed by changing the display order of subprojects Builds of the project are run from the subprojects then the main project h Setting the standard build options On the Property panel if you add a change to the settings for the standard build options the value of the property will be displayed in boldface You can change the current build options to the standard setting cancel boldface by the following procedure Select the Build tool node and then select Set to Default Build Option for Project in the context menu Remark The setting of the standard build options takes effect to the whole project main project and subprojects i Sorting files and categories You can sort files and category nodes in order of the file name time stamp or user definition by the following procedure Select one of the buttons on the toolbar R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 119 of 485 A
429. olders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the Xpreinclude option of the ccrh command The specified include file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 247 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Macro definition Specify the name of the macro to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the ccrh command The
430. on Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 170 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Exclusion rule number Specify the required rule number to be excluded from the check from required rule Specify at least one rule number in decimal This corresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Ignore specified rule number from rules that are classified as required Xmisra2004 required_remove in the Apply rule property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify Rule Number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Rule check exclusion file Specify files that will not be checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the Xignore_files_misra option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only in the following cases When Apply all rules is selected in the Apply rule property When Apply rules that are classified as required is selected in the Apply rule property When Apply specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule
431. on user01 text user02 text user03 text Cancel Unassign All Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Section Settings dialog box select an address in the address section area and then click the Remove button Description of each area 1 Select sections This area displays the name of all sections allocated to the address selected in the Section Settings dialog box Select sections to be deleted by clicking their names You can select multiple sections by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box and deletes the selected section from the address section area in the Section Settings dialog box Deletes the section group when the section group an address and the sections allocated to the address includes no section If no sections are left in the Overlayn column in the address section area the column itself is deleted Cancel Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 283 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Unassign All Closes this dialog box and deletes all the sections the section group selected in the address section area in the Section Settings dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box
432. on Description Sorts category nodes and files in order of their names Bd Ascending order Su Descending order Lal Ascending order Sorts category nodes and files in order of their timestamp lo Descending order Et Ascending order E Descending order Displays category nodes and files in order of the user definition default You can change the display order of category nodes and files arbitrarily by dragging and dropping them 2 3 6 Update file dependencies When you perform a change changing include file paths adding the include statement of the header file to the source file etc that effects the file dependencies in the compile option settings or assemble option settings you must update the dependencies of the relevant files Updating file dependencies is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 20 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 For the entire project From the Build menu select Update Dependencies Figure 2 12 Update Dependencies Item Build Em Build Project F7 GJE Rebuild Project Shift F7 ed Clean Project Rapid Build ag Update Dependencies ral Build sample H Rebuild sample p Clean sample ag Update Dependencies of sample Kg Stop Build Ctrl F T Build Mode Settings E Batch Build Ty Build Option List 2 For the active
433. on and D option are specified for the same preprocessor macro and assembler symbol the option specified last will be valid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category From the Individual Compile Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category Example of use To delete the definition of preprocessor macro test by the D option describe as gt ccrh Utest Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 348 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE This option specifies the folder to search include files Specification format Ipath path Interpretation when omitted The include file is searched from the standard include file folder Detailed description This option specifies the folder to search include files which are read by preprocessor directive include or assembler control instruction INCLUDE BINCLUDE as path Include files are searched according to the following sequence 1 include a Folder with source files When files are specified by using b Path specified by the I option c Standard include file folder Note product install folde CubeSuite ccrh V x xx inc 2 INCLUDE BINCLUDE a Path specified by the I option b Folder with source file c Folder of original C source file d Current folde
434. on existent path When this check box is selected the existence of the path specified in Path One path per one line or the validity of the character string specified in the path is not checked d Include subfolders automatically Select this check box and then click the Browse button to specify the path The path will be added including subfolders to Path One path per one line up to five levels deep Caution This item is displayed only when adding the path 2 Placeholder area The list of placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed ascending order Double click a row to surround the placeholder with percentage signs and display it in the path edit area a Placeholder This area displays the placeholder b Value This area displays the string after replacement with the placeholder c Description This area displays the description of the placeholder Caution This area is displayed only when the caller of this dialog box supports placeholders Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 ztENESAS Page 271 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the entered path to t
435. on under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before assemble processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 250 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after assemble processing after assemble Use the call instruction to specify a batch
436. ons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add File On the Project Tree panel select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or file and then select Add gt gt Add File from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the file to be added to the project exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 299 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Designate the name of the file to be added to the project 4 Files of type area Designate the type of the file to be added to the project C source file c C source file default Header file h inc Header file Assembly source file asm s fsy Assembly source file Library file lib Library file Object file obj Object file Relocatable file rel Relocatable file Text file txt Text format All Files All the formats Function buttons Open Adds the designated file to the project Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 300 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Import Build Options dialog box This dialog box is used to
437. option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 245 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Macro undefinition 3 Character Encoding Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the U option of the ccrh command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified The detailed information on character encoding is displayed and the configuration can be changed Character encoding 4 Output Code Select the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the source file This corresponds to the Xcharacter_set option of the ccrh command Default When Yes in
438. option of the rlink command The section name is displayed as the subproperty Default Section that outputs external defined symbols to the file number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65535 items can be specified Section alignment Specify the name of the section to change the number of alignment to 16 bytes Specify one section name per line This corresponds to the ALIGNED_SECTION option of the rlink command The section name is displayed as the subproperty Default Section alignment number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65535 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 192 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE ROM to RAM mapped Specify the section that maps symbols from ROM to RAM section Specify in the format of ROM section name RAM section name with one section name per line This corresponds to the ROm option of the rlink command The section name is displayed as the subproperty Default ROM to RAM mapped section number of defined items data data R is specified i
439. or build comment include header6 h Dependence relationship judged not to exist comment include header7 h Dependence relationship judged not to exist R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 23 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File Set the type of the file to be output as the product of the build Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select the file type in the Output file type property in the Output File Type and Path category Figure 2 15 Output file type Property Uutput common object tile tor various Specify CPU core Object for G3M Xcpu g3m Output cross reference information No Intermediate file output folder BuildModeN ame 1 When Execute Module Load Module File is selected Default A load module file is generated The load module file will be the debug target 2 When Execute Module Hex File is selected A hex file is generated The hex file will be the debug target Caution For the library project this property is always Library and cannot be changed 2 4 1 Change the output file name The names of the load module file hex file and library file output by the build tool are set as follows by default Load module file name ProjectName abs Hex file name ProjectName mot Library file name lib ProjectName lib Remark
440. or panel And then closes this dialog box Cancel Does not create a file and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 261 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project The folder is added as a category Figure A 21 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file c Header file h inc Assembly source file asm s fsy Library file lib Object file obj Relocatable file rel Python script file py 4 Text file txt 2 4 Subfolder level to search Function batons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it on the Project Tree panel Description of each area 1 File type area Select the type of the file to be added to the project You can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected The file types to be displayed are as follows C source file c Header file h inc Assembly source file asm s fsy Library
441. orresponds to the Xcheck_language_extention option of the cerh command extended specifications This property is displayed only in the following cases When Apply all rules is selected in the Apply rule property When Apply rules that are classified as required is selected in the Apply rule property When Apply specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Rule number property When Ignore specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Rule number property When Apply rules that are classified as required and specified rule number is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Check rule number besides required rule property When Ignore specified rule number from rules that are classified as required is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number is specified in the Exclusion rule number from required rule property When Apply rules that are described in the specified file is selected in the Apply rule property and a rule number description file is specified in the Rule number description file property Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Enables MISRA C 2004 rule check and Xcheck_language_extension outputs messages when the rule check is partially suppressed by the unique language specifications exten
442. ot output the library list file Page 210 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output symbol Select whether to output the symbol information symbol names within a module information This corresponds to the SHow SYmbol option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Output link map file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow SYmbol Outputs the symbol information No Does not output the symbol information Output section list in a Select whether to output the list of the section names within the module module This corresponds to the SHow SEction option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Output link map file property is selected and User libraries FOrm Library U or System libraries FOrm Library S in the Output file format propertry in the Output File category is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow SEction Outputs the list of the section names within the module No Does not output the list of the section names within the module Output cross reference Select whether to output the cross reference information information This corresponds to the SHow XReference option of the rlink command Thi
443. output This is expressed in a decimal number and also expressed in hexadecimal number in parentheses 3 Section name The name of the section is output 3 1 4 Command line information The character string of the command line of the assembler is output The output example of the command line information is shown below Command Line Parameter a asm Xcommon v850e3v5 Xprn_path L Character string of command line The character string of the command line specified for the assembler is output R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 85 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 2 Link Map File This section explains the link map file The link map has information of the link result It can be referenced for information such as the section s allocation addresses The methods for outputting the link map file are shown below 1 For CubeSuite Select the build tool node on the Project Tree panel and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel To output the link map file select Yes in the Output link map file property in the List category Specify the output destination in the Output folder property in the Output File category It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node e extension replaced by map 2 Command line When the form library or extract option is not specified and the list option is specified the link map fi
444. output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before compile processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 173 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after compile processing after compile processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces wit
445. p CHange_message Hide Total_size LOgo NOLOgo END EXIt S9 This option outputs the S9 record at the end Specification format 59 Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option outputs the S9 record at the end even if the entry address exceeds 0x10000 This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Output S9 record at the end in the Hex Format category Example of use To output the S9 record at the end even if the entry address exceeds 0x10000 describe as gt rlink a obj b obj form stype s9 Remark If the form stype option is not specified this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 458 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE STACk This option outputs the stack information file Specification format STACk Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option outputs the stack information file The file name is output file name sni This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Output stack information file in the Others category Example of use To output stack information file c sni describe as gt rlink a obj b obj stack Remark If the form object relocate library option or strip option is specif
446. p function for the jarl and jr instructions By using the far jump function it is assumed that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and assembling is performed This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xasm_far_jump option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_option Assumes that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 Xasm_far_jump and jr32 instructions and performs assembling No Performs assembly as a jarl or jr instruction Specify jump instruction Specify the instruction to be generated for function call branches This corresponds to the Xcall_jump option of the ccrh command Default Create jarl and jr instructions None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Create jarl32 and jr32 Generates the jarl32 and jr32 instructions for instructions function call branches Xcall_jump 32 Create jarl and jr Generates the jarl and jr instructions for function instructions None call branches Far Jump file names Specify the Far Jump file name The code that uses the jarl32 and jr32 instruction for branch instructions of functions described in a file is output to the Far Jump file The ccrh command outputs an error if the
447. p to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the assemble option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the assemble options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 181 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the link phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Debug Information 2 Optimization Details 3 Input File 4 Output File 5 Library 6 Output Code 7 List 8 Section 9 Verify 10 Message 11 Others Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 182 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 7 Property Panel Link Options Tab Property A CC RH Property E Debug Information Output debug information Yes Output to the output file DEBug Compress debug information Nof NOCOmpress Delete local symbol name information No E Optimization D etais Output external symbol allocation information file No Object file 0 Binary file Q Symbol definition Symbol definition 0 E Output F
448. path of the Windows system folder This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command The library file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Using libraries number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button gt Edit by the Specify Using Library File dialog box which appears when clicking the Browse button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 139 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder Specify the output folder The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is assumed th
449. pecified as source files then a warning is output and an object file is only saved for the last source file to be specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Intermediate file output folder in the Output File Type and Path category Example of use To save the object file generated during compilation to foler D sample describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 338 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xasm_path This option specifies the folder to save an assembly source file generated during compilation Specification format Xasm_path path Interpretation when omitted An assembly source file will not be output except when specifying the S option Detailed description This option specifies the folder to save an assembly source file generated during compilation as path If an existing folder is specified as path the assembly source file is saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by asm to path An error will occur if a nonexistent folder is specified An existing file can be specified as path If one assembly source file is output it will be saved with path as the file name If two or more assembly source files are output an error will occur An error will occur if a nonexistent file is specified If path is omitted the assembly source file is
450. places with the command line option under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before compile processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of the compile option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 241 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after compile processing after compile processing Use
451. pports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name Remark You can also change the option in the same way with the Output file name property in the Frequently Used Options for Hex Output category on the Common Options tab If the Hex file format property in the Hex Format category is changed the following message dialog box will open Figure 2 18 Message Dialog Box Question Q0291001 3 Do you change a file extension When Yes is selected in the dialog box the extension of the output file name is changed according to the format selected in the Hex file format property Figure 2 19 Output file name and Hex file format Property E Output File Output hex file Yes BuildMoadeh amex test bin R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 25 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 When changing the library file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel Enter the library file name to be changed to on the Output file name property in the Output File category Figure 2 20 Output file name Property E Output File Output file format User libraries FOrm Library U v i i it ir 2 E i e Output file name ProjectName lib This proper
452. pr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The description of each button is shown below is selected by default Sorts category nodes and files in order of their names Ascending order Descending order Ascending order Sorts category nodes and files in order of their timestamp Descending order t Ascending order And L Descending order Displays category nodes and files exclude the dependency files in order of the user definition default You can change the display order of category nodes and files arbitrarily by dragging and dropping them j Displaying the dependency file When there is a dependency file for a source file added to the project the dependency file is displayed under the source file The source file without a dependency file The source file with a dependency file 3 j main c a ioh The display of the dependency files is updated on the following timings When the first build is run after the project is loaded When E on the toolbar is clicked When Update Dependencies is selected from the Build menu When Update Dependencies of active project is selected from the Build menu Remarks 1 This function is valid only when the Show dependency files in project tree checkbox in the General Build Debug category of the Option dialog box is selected 2 Information on the dependency files displayed on the project
453. program as a comment to the assembly source file No Does not output a C source program as a comment to the assembly source file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 163 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Output code of switch statement APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select the code output mode for switch statements in programs This corresponds to the Xswitch option of the ccrh command Default Auto None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Auto None The ccrh selects the optimum output format if else Xswitch ifelse Outputs the switch statements in the same format as the if else statement along a string of case statements in programs Select this item if the case statements are written in the order of frequency or if only a few labels are used Because the case statements are compared starting from the top unnecessary comparison can be reduced and the execution speed can be increased if the case statement that most often matches is written first Binary search Xswitch binary Table jump Xswitch table Outputs the code in the binary search format for switch statements in programs Searches for a matching case statement by using a binary search algorithm If this item is selected when many labels are used any case statement can be found at almost the same speed Outputs the code in the table jump format for switch st
454. project 2 11 1 Import the build options of other project You can import the build options of other project to the current project On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Import Build Options from the context menu The following message dialog box will open Figure 2 86 Message Dialog Box Question Q0202003 p Are you sure you want to import build options A Current whole build options and build modes are replaced by specified project values Click Yes in the dialog box The Import Build Options dialog box will open Figure 2 87 Import Build Options Dialog Box Import Build Options Look in sample 2 DefaultBuild sub My Recent i sample mtpj Documents e Desktop My Documents My Computer File name My Network Files of type Project File mtpj R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 61 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS In the dialog box select the target project file for import the build options and click the Open button The build options of the selected project file are imported to the current project Remarks 1 The conditions of the project that is importable are shown below The build tool is the same The type of the project application library etc is the same The project has been created by CubeSuite with the same version 2 The target build options for importing are only the general o
455. ption is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Level of optimization in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category From the Compile Options tab Level of optimization in the Optimization category Maximum number of loop expansions Remove unused static functions Perform inline expansion Maximum increasing rate of R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 367 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE inline expansion size Perform pipeline optimization Use jr instruction to call a function at the end of the function and Optimize accesses to external variables in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Level of optimization in the Optimization category Maximum number of loop expansions Remove unused static functions Perform inline expansion Maximum increasing rate of inline expansion size Perform pipeline optimization Use jr instruction to call a function at the end of the function and Optimize accesses to external variables in the Optimization Details category Example of use To perform optimization with the object size precedence describe as gt ccrh Osize Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 368 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xintermodule This option performs inter modul
456. ptions set in the properties of the build tool The setting of the standard build options see 2 11 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project and the individual options are not imported 3 All the build modes of the import target are imported However the build modes of the current project other than DefaultBuild are deleted 4 The version of the build tool to be used is imported 2 11 2 Set the link order of files The link order of object module files and library files is decided automatically but you can also set the order The procedures for performing this operation are described below 1 Open the Link Order dialog box On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu The Link Order dialog box will open Figure 2 88 Link Order Dialog Box Link Order fileO2 obj fileO3 obj library01 lib library02 lib libraryO03 lib The names of the following files are listed in File in the order that the files are input to the linker Object module files which are generated from the source files added to the selected main project or subproject Object module files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Library files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 62 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01
457. r If path does not exist a warning will be output An error will occur if path is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Additional include paths System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category From the Compile Options tab Additional include paths System include paths in the Preprocess category From the Individual Compile Options tab Additional include paths Use whole include paths specified for build tool in the Preprocess category R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 349 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To search include files from the current folder folder D include the standard folder in that order describe as gt ccrh ID include Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 350 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xpreinclude This option specifies the file that is included at the top of the compilation unit Specification format Xpreinclude file file Interpretation when omitted It is assumed that the file that is included at the top of the compilation unit does not exist Detailed description This option specifies the file that is included at the top of the compilation unit as file This option is equivalent to the following property in C
458. r authorized for use in products or systems that may pose a direct threat to human life or bodily injury artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations etc or may cause serious property damages nuclear reactor control systems military equipment etc You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for which the product is not intended by Renesas Electronics You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not
459. r message file file This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the cerh command Error messages are displayed on the Output panel regardless of this property s Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xerror_file Outputs the error message file No Does not output the error message file Error message file output Specify the folder which the error message file is output folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Error message file name Specify the error message file name The extension can be freely specified The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active p
460. r of modules within library The number of modules within the library is output 3 4 5 Module section and symbol information within the library Modules within the library is output When the show symbol option is specified symbol names within the module is output When the show section option is specified section names within the module is also output The output example of the module section and symbol information within the library is shown below Library List 2 2 MODULE LAST UPDATE 3 SECTION 4 SYMBOL extmod1 12 Dec 2011 16 30 00 text _func_01 _func_02 extmod2 12 Dec 2011 16 30 10 text _func_03 _func_04 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 98 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Number Description 1 Module name The module name is output 2 Module definition date The module definition date is output If the module is updated the date of the latest update is output 3 Name of section within module The name of the section within the module is output 4 Name of symbol within section The name of the symbol within the section is output R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 99 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 5 Intel HEX File This section explains the Intel HEX file The methods for outputting the Intel HEX file are shown below 1 For CubeSuite Select the buil
461. rcpy stremp memcpy and memset calls Does not perform inline expansion of functions strcpy stremp memcpy and memset calls Merge string literals When the same string literals exist in the source file specify whether to merge them and allocate to the one area This corresponds to the Xmerge_string option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xmerge_string Merges the same string literals exist in the source file and allocates to the one area No Each allocates the same string literals exist in the source file to separate areas 4 Preprocess The detailed information on preprocessing is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 158 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Additional include paths System include paths R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the additional include paths during compiling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path o
462. reate or load a project Create a new project or load an existing one Remark See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start for details about creating a new project or loading an existing one 2 Set a build target project Set a build target project see 2 11 Make Settings for Build Operations Remarks 1 If there is no subproject in the project the project is always active 2 When setting a build mode add the build mode see 2 11 6 Add a build mode 3 Set build target files Add or remove build target files and update the dependencies see 2 3 Set Build Target Files Remarks 1 See 2 7 1 Add a user library for the method of adding a user library to the project 2 Also you can set the link order of object module files and library files See 2 11 2 Set the link order of files 4 Specify the output of a load module Select the type of the load module to be generated see 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File 5 Set build options Set the options for the compiler assembler linker and the like see 2 5 Set Compile Options 2 6 Set Assemble Options 2 7 Set Link Options 6 Run a build Run a build see 2 12 Run a Build The following types of builds are available Build see 2 12 1 Runa build of updated files Rebuild see 2 12 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build see 2 12 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations Batch build see 2 12 4 Run builds in batch
463. riction 1 to FF hexadecimal number Output S9 record at the Select whether to output the S9 record at the end end This corresponds to the S9 option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Motorola S record file FOrm Stype in the Hex file format property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes S9 Outputs the S9 record at the end No Does not output the S9 record at the end 3 Others Other detailed information on the hex output is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property in the Output File category is selected Other additional options Input the hex output options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the hex output options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 204 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Create Library Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the create library phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Debug Information 2 Input File 3 Output File 4 Library 5
464. rk See B 5 Option for details about each option a Performing compilation assembly and linking by one command C source file file1 c is compiled by ccrh and then assembly source file file1 asm is generated Next assembly source file file1 asm and file2 asm are assembled by asrh and then object file file1 obj and file2 obj are generated Assemble list file sample prn are also output Finally object file file1 obj file2 obj and file3 obj are linked by rlink and then link map file sample map and load module file sample abs are generated gt ccrh filel c file2 asm file3 obj Xasm_option Xprn_path sample prn X1k_option list osample abs Xcommon v850e3v5 Remark In the ccrh command line use the Xasm_option option to specify an option dedicated to asrh to specify an option dedicated to rlink use the XIk_option option b Performing compilation and assembly by one command and linking separately C source file file1 c is compiled by ccrh and then assembly source file file1 asm is generated Next assembly source file file1 asm and file2 asm are assembled by asrh and then object file filet obj and file2 obj are generated Assemble list file sample prn are also output gt ccrh c filel c file2 asm Xasm_option Xprn_path sample prn Xcommon v850e3v5 Remark In the ccrh command line use the Xasm_option option to specify an option dedicated to asrh Object file file1 obj file2 o
465. rmation for source debugging to the output file This corresponds to the g option of the ccrh command Default Yes g How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes g Generates the debug information No Does not generate the debug information 2 Optimization The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Level of optimization Select the level of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the O option of the ccrh command Default Default Optimization None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Default Performs optimization that debugging is not Optimization None affected optimization of expressions and register allocation and the like Code Size Performs optimization with the object size Precedence Osize precedence Regards reducing the ROM RAM capacity as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Speed Precedence Performs optimization with the execution speed Ospeed precedence Regards shortening the execution speed as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Debug Precedence Performs optimization with the debug Onothing precedence Regards debugging as important and suppresses all optimization including default optimization 3 Optimization Details
466. rms assembly as a jarl or jr instruction 5 Assemble List The detailed information on the assemble list is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xprn_path option of the cerh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path Outputs the assemble list file No Does not output the assemble list file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 178 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for assemble list file 6 Others Specify the folder which the assemble list file is output The assemble list file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xprn_path option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file
467. roject name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName err has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected Default ProjectName err How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 147 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 10 Warning Message The detailed information on warning messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed Undisplayed warning Specify the number of the warning message not to be displayed message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 02042 02107 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 02222 02554 02699 02782 This corresponds to the Xno_warning option of the ccrh command Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters 11 Build Method The detailed information on the build method is displayed and the configuration can be changed Build simultaneously Select whether to geneate the lo
468. rom the View menu The Property panel opens For the application project Select the Common Options tab Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab Link Options tab and Hex Output Options tab For the library project Select the Common Options tab Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab and Create Library Options tab You can set the various ccrh options by setting the necessary properties in this tab R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 329 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 2 Property Panel Property A CC RH Property E Build Mode Build mode E Output File Type andPath Output file type Output common object file for various devices Specify CPU core Output cross reference information Intermediate file output folder E Frequently Used Options for Compie Level of optimization Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition E Frequently Used Options for Link Using libraries Output folder Output file name Use standard libraries Use Standard Library function Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Use Non local jump Library function E Frequently Used Options for Hex Output Output hex file Hex file format Output folder Output file name Division output file Register Mode Error Output DefaultBuild Execute Module Load Module File Yes
469. roperty cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected characters of the property to the clipboard Paste While editing the value of the property inserts the contents of the clipboard Delete While editing the value of the property deletes the selected characters Select All While editing the value of the property selects all the characters of the selected property Reset to Default Restores the configuration of the selected item to the default configuration of the project For the Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option Reset All to Default R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Restores all the configuration of the current tab to the default configuration of the project For the Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option 2tENESAS Page 131 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Common Options tab APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This tab shows the detailed information on the build tool categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Build Mode Output File Type and Path Frequently Used Options for Compile Frequently Used Options for Assemble Frequently Used Options for Link 6 Frequently Used Options for Hex Output Frequently Used Options for
470. rresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Apply specified rule number Xmisra2004 apply in the Apply rule property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify Rule Number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Exclusion rule number Specify the rule number to be excluded from the check Specify at least one rule number in decimal This corresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Ignore specified rule number Xmisra2004 ignore in the Apply rule property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify Rule Number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Check rule number Specify the rule number to be checked besides the required rules besides required rule Specify at least one rule number in decimal This corresponds to the Xmisra2004 option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Apply rules that are classified as required and specified rule number Xmisra2004 required_add in the Apply rule property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify Rule Number dialog box which appears when clicking the butt
471. rted ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the OUitput option of the rlink command Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output file name Specify the output file name If the extension is omitted abs is automatically added The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the OUitput option of the rlink command Default ProjectName abs How to change Directly
472. ructions are used in the instruction set architecture of the target and common magic number series that supports the instruction set architecture is embed into the object file The item that can be specified as series is shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified v850e3v5 It is possible to link to the model with the V850E3v5 instruction set architecture which is specified as a target device rh850 The result is the same as when v850e3v5 is specified An error will occur if series is omitted Example of use To embed the magic number common to models with the instruction set architectures superior to V850E3V5 into the object file to be generated describe as gt asrh Xcommon v850e3v5 c main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 408 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xcpu This option specifies that an object for the specified core is generated Specification format Xcpu core Interpretation when omitted If the Xcommon option is specified an object for G3M is generated Detailed description This option specifies that an object for core core is generated The items that can be specified as core are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified Generates an object for G3M Generates an object for G3K An error will occur if core is omitted Example of use To generat
473. ructions for division Although the divq and divau instructions are fast the number of execution cycles will differ depending on the values of the operands This corresponds to the Xdiv option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xdiv Generates the div and divu instructions for division No Generates the divq and divau instructions for division Generate OV flag check Select whether to generate code fetrap instruction that checks the OV flag after division code in division instructions and generate an FE level software exception when the OV flag is 1 operation This corresponds to the Xcheck_div_ov option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xcheck_div_ov Generates code that checks the OV flag at division No Generates code that does not check the OV flag at division Vector number of fetrap Specify the vector number of the fetrap instruction generated when the OV flag is 1 instruction in divide This corresponds to the Xcheck_div_ov option of the ccrh command exception This property is displayed only when Yes Xcheck_div_ov in the Generate OV flag check code in division operation property is selected Default How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 1 to 15 decimal number Generate product sum Select whether to generate prod
474. s Section 0x00000000 const text data Ox01000000 RESET OxFEBFS000 data A bss stack bss If you click the Add button the Section Address dialog box will open Figure 2 54 Section Address Dialog Box Section Address Address I f Enter in Address the address of the ROM section to be added and click the OK button to add the entered address to Address in the Section Settings dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 43 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 55 Section Settings Dialog Box After ROM Section Addresses Are Added Section Settings Address Section Ox00000000 YECT const Modify text New Overlay data R Remove 000001000 Ox01000000 RESET Up Down OxFEBFS000 data R Click here and then click the bss Add button stack bss Click the Section column on the added address row and click the Add button to open the Add Section dialog box Figure 2 56 Add Section Dialog Box Add Section Section name Enter in Section name the name of the ROM section to be added and click the OK button to add the entered section to Section in the Section Settings dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 44 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 57 Section Settings Dialog Box After
475. s This property is changed to No when No in the Use standard libraries property is selected This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default Yes LIBrary libmf How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libmf Uses the mathematical library single precision functions No Does not use the mathematical library single precision functions Use Non local jump Library function changed Select whether to use the non local jump library functions This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use standard libraries property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes LIBrary libsetjmp Uses the non local jump library functions No Does not use the non local jump library functions 6 Frequently Used Options for Hex Output The detailed information on frequently used options during hex outputting is displayed and the configuration can be This category is not displayed for the library project R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 141 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output hex file Select whether to output the hex file This corresponds to the FOrm option
476. s in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output message of the enhanced key word and extended specifications in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category Example of use To enable the source code checking of the MISRA C 2004 rules which are partially suppressed by the extended language specifications describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 363 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Japanese Chinese character conirol The Japanese Chinese character control option is as follows Xcharacter_set Xcharacter_set This option specifies the Japanese Chinese character code Specification format Xcharacter_set code Interpretation when omitted Processing of Japanese Chinese character encoding is not performed Detailed description This option specifies the character code to be used for Japanese Chinese comments and character strings in the source file The items that can be specified as code are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Operation is not guaranteed if the specified character code differs from the character code of the source file none Does not process the Japanese and Chinese character code euc_jp EUC Japanese sjis SJIS utf8 UTF 8 big5 Traditional Chinese gb2312 Simplified Chinese An error will occur if code is omitted This opt
477. s 1 The value that can be specified for num is 1 to 15 a value that can be specified for the operand of the fetrap instruction An error will occur if any other item is specified An error will occur if num is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Generate OV flag check code in division operation Vector number of fetrap instruction in divide exception in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Generate OV flag check code in division operation Vector number of fetrap instruction in divide exception in the Output Code category Example of use To check the OV flag at division describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 389 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xuse_fmaf This option generates product sum operation instructions Specification format Interpretation when omitted Product sum operation instructions are not generated Detailed description This option generates product sum operation instructions fmaf s fmsf s fnmaf s and fnmsf s for single precision floating point product sum operations Specifying this option will accelerate the execution speed but change the operation precision This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Generate product sum operation instruction in t
478. s are output from Tabs that are displayed are as follows Tab Name Description All Messages Displays all the messages by order of output except while executing a rapid build Rapid Build Displays the message output from the build tool by running a rapid build Build Tool Displays the message output from the build tool by running a build rebuild or batch build Caution Even if anew message is output on a deselected tab tab selection will not automatically switch In this case a 5 mark will be added in front of the tab name indicating that anew message has been output File menu only available for the Output panel The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Output panel other items are common to all the panels Save Output tab name Saves the contents on the currently selecting tab in the previously saved text file txt see c Save log When this item is selected for the first time after launching the program the operation is equivalent to when selecting Save Output tab name As Save Output tab name As Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents on the currently selecting tab in the designated text file txt See c Save log R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 258 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu only available for the Output panel The following items are exclusive for the Edit
479. s displayed only when Yes Auto detect Oinline 2 in the Perform inline expansion property is selected or when Yes To adjust the level of optimization in the Perform inline expansion property and Speed Precedence Ospeed in the Optimization Level property are selected Default 100 How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 0 to 65535 decimal number Perform pipeline optimization Select whether to improve the program s execution performance by reordering instructions at the machine language level This corresponds to the Opipeline option of the ccrh command Default Yes To adjust the level of optimization None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes To adjust the level Performs optimization according to the Level of of optimization None optimization property Yes Opipeline Performs pipeline optimization No Opipeline off Does not perform pipeline optimization Use jr instruction to call a function at the end of the function Select whether to give precedence to using jr instructions in the place of jarl instructions when the function ends with a function call This corresponds to the Otail_call option of the cerh command Default Yes To adjust the level of optimization None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes To adjust the level Performs optimization according to the
480. s equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Compress debug information in the Debug Information category Example of use Not to compress the debug information describe as gt rlink a obj b obj nocompress R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 461 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE MEMory This option specifies the memory size occupied during linking Specification format MEMory occupancy Interpretation when omitted The processing is the same as usual It is the same result as when the memory high option is specified Detailed description This option specifies memory size occupancy occupied during linking The items that can be specified as occupancy are shown below The processing is the same as usual The optimizing linker loads the information necessary for linking in smaller units to reduce the memory occupancy This increases the frequency of file access As a result processing will be slower than when High is specified if the memory used is not larger than implementation memory If occupancy is omitted it is assumed that High has been specified Specify Low as occupancy if processing is slow because a large project is linked and the memory size occupied by the optimizing linker exceeds the available memory in the machine used This option is equivalent to the following property in
481. s in the RAM section Specify a relocatable section including the initial value for ROM section ROMsection Specify a a nonexistent section or relocatable section whose size is 0 for RAM section RAMsection This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab ROM to RAM mapped section in the Section category Example of use To reserve the data R section with the same size as the data section and relocate defined symbols in the data section with address in the data R section describe as Remark If the form object relocate liorary option or strip option is specified this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 436 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE OUtput This option specifies the output file Specification format Interpretation when omitted The output file name is first input file name default extension The default extensions are shown below When the form absolute option is specified abs When the form relocate option is specified rel When the form object option is specified obj When the form library option is specified lib When the form hexadecimal option is specified hex When the form stype option is specified mot When the form binary option is specified bin Detailed description This option specifies output file file Specify the start addr
482. s information for source debugging to the output file Source debugging can be performed by specifying this option If this option and an optimization option are specified at the same time the ease of debugging could be affected This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Add debug information in the Debug Information category From the Individual Compile Options tab Add debug information in the Debug Information category Example of use To output information for source debugging to the output file describe as gt ccrh g Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 341 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device specification The device specification option is as follows Xcommon Xcpu Xcommon This option specifies that an object file common to the various devices is generated Specification format Xcommon series Interpretation when omitted An error will occur However an error will not occur if the V h or P option is specified Detailed description This option specifies that an object file common to the various devices is generated When this option is specified only instructions are used in the instruction set architecture of the target and common magic number series that supports the instruction set architecture is embed into the object file Th
483. s product uses The extension is free but cref is recommended This file is output when the Xcref option is specified Error message file free File which contains error messages The extension is free but err is recommended This file is output when the Xerror_file option is specified Subcommanid file free File which contains the parameters of the execution program This is created by the user Notes 1 The extension can be changed by specifying the option 2 See CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS for details about each file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 324 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 3 Environment Variable This section explains the environment variables The environment variables of the optimizing linker and the examples when specifying them on the command line are shown below HLNK_LIBRARY1 HLNK_LIBRARY2 HLNK_LIBRARY3 Specify the default library that the optimizing linker uses The library specified by the library option has the precedence for linking After that if unresolved symbols remain default libraries HLNK_LIBRARY1 HLNK_LIBRARY2 and HLNK_LIBRARY3 are searched in that order Example gt set HLNK_ LIBRARY1 usrl lib gt set HLNK_LIBRARY2 usr2 lib gt set HLNK_LIBRARY3 usr3 1lib HLNK_TMP Specify the folder where the optimizing linker creates temporary files If this environment variable is not specified the files
484. s property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Output link map file property and Relocatable file FOrm Relocate in the Output file format propertry in the Output File category are selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow Xreference Outputs the cross reference information No Does not output the cross reference information Output total sizes of Select whether to output the total size of sections sections This corresponds to the SHow Total_size option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Output link map file property and Relocatable file FOrm Relocate in the Output file format propertry in the Output File category are selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow Total_size Outputs the total sizes of sections separately for ROM allocated sections and RAM allocated sections Does not output the total size of sections 6 Message The detailed information on messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 211 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Enable information Select whether to enable the output of information messages message output This corresponds to the Message and NOMessag
485. s selected rel The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the OUitput option of the rlink command Default ProjectName lib How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters 4 Library The detailed information on the library is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 208 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Using libraries Specify the library files to be used The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder This corresponds to the L Brary option of the rlink command
486. s the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and their build modes which you wish to run a build When this dialog box is opened for the first time after the project is created all the check boxes are unchecked From the second time the previous setting is retained R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 291 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Build mode This area displays the build modes which the main project and subprojects have c Defined macros For the combination of the main project and subprojects and their build modes the defined macros which have been set in the Compile Options tab and the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel are separated with and displayed The defined macro in the compile option comes before the one in assemble option They are separated with and displayed Remarks 1 You can select multiple lines by one of the following procedures Left click the mouse with pressing the Ctrl key Left click the mouse with pressing the Shift key Drag the mouse to select a range of rows Pressing the space key while a row is selected switches the selected non selected state of the checkbox 2 Clicking on the header of each column sorts the entries in ascending order by default Clicking on the same header again sorts the entries in the reverse order
487. saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by asm If two or more files with the same name even if they are in different folders are specified as source files then a warning is output and an assembly source file is only saved for the last source file to be specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output assembly source file Output folder for assembly source file in the Output File category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output assembly source file Output folder for assembly source file in the Output File category Example of use To save the assembly source file generated during compilation to foler D sample describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 339 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xprep_path This option specifies the folder to save the preprocessed file Specification format Xprep_path path Interpretation when omitted A preprocessed file will not be output except when specifying the P option Detailed description This option specifies the folder to save a preprocessed file as path If an existing folder is specified as path the preprocessed file is saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by i to path An error will occur if a nonexistent folder is specified An existing file can be specifi
488. scription of a subcommand file The arguments to be specified can be coded over several lines However you cannot start a new line within the name of the option or file Asubcommand file cannot be nested The character code contents of a subcommand file cannot be specified by using the Xcharacter_set option If you use characters other than ASCII in the subcommand file use the UTF 8 file with BOM The following characters are treated as special characters These special characters themselves are not included in the command line of the ccrh command and deleted double quotation mark The character string until the next double quotation mark is treated as a contiguous character string sharp If this is specified at the beginning of a line the characters on that line before the end of the line are interpreted as a comment circumflex The character immediately following this is not treated as a special character b Example of subcommand file specification Create subcommand file sub txt using an editor Xcommon v850e3v5 Q Specify sub txt by subcommand file specification option on the command line gt ccrh sub txt ofile obj file c The command line is expanded as follows gt ccrh Xcommon v850e3v5 c Dtest Idir Osize ofile obj file c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 328 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Using a subcommand f
489. se Non local jump Library function No fal To change the library files you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Using libraries property in the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab 2 7 2 Prepare for using the overlaid section selection function The optimizing linker rlink used by CC RH can allocate multiple sections defined in a program to the same address The sections allocated in this way are called overlaid sections The debug tool provides a function to select the debug target section from the overlaid sections priority sections allocated to the same address The function is called overlaid section selection function A load module using overlaid sections can be debugged with switching of the priority section before program execution The method for generating a load module to use the overlaid section selection function is shown below 1 Copy the ROM area contents to RAM Copy the ROM area contents to the RAM area to expand the code and data in the RAM 2 Set build options Set the ROM to RAM mapped sections and overlaid sections to use the overlaid section selection function Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel a Set ROM to RAM mapped sections Setting the ROM to RAM mapped sections is made with the ROM to
490. sed The types and explanations for options are shown below Classification Input control Input Table B 4 Link Options Description This option specifies the input file LIBrary This option specifies the input library file Binary This option specifies the input binary file DEFine This option defines an undefined symbol forcedly ENTry This option specifies the execution start address Output control FOrm This option specifies the output format DEBug This option outputs debug information to the output file NODEBug This option does not output the debug information RECord This option specifies the size of the data record to be output ROm This option specifies the section that maps symbols from ROM to RAM OUtput This option specifies the output file MAp This option outputs the external variable allocation information file SPace This option fills the vacant area of the output range Message This option output information messages NOMessage This option suppresses the output of information messages MSg_unused This option notifies the user of the external defined symbol that is not referenced BYte_count This option specifies the maximum byte count for a data record PADDING This option fills in data at the end of a section OVERRUN_FETCH This option prevents reading of
491. selected when this item is selected this item will be changed to No No Does not optimize accesses to external variables Perform inter module optimization R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 Specify the level of inter module optimization such as function merging This corresponds to the Xintermodule option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Level 1 Perform Xintermodule Performs inter module optimization for each file No 2tENESAS Does not perform inter module optimization Page 224 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Perform optimization Select whether to perform optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by considering type of data the pointer based on the ANSI standard indicated by pointer This corresponds to the Xalias option of the cerh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Performs optimization with consideration for the type of the Xalias ansi data indicated by the pointer In general this option improves the object performance but the execution result may differ from the case when No is selected No Does not perform optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by the pointer
492. ses of extern variables defined in the files to be compiled will not be modified or referenced from outside those files Even if a file to be compiled calls a function defined outside the files to be compiled the called function will never call a function in the files to be compiled If this option is specified it is assumed that the Xintermodule option is specified If two or more C source files are input it is assumed that the Xmerge_files option is specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Perform inter module optimization in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Perform inter module optimization in the Optimization Details category Example of use To perform optimization assuming that the files to be compiled comprise the entire program describe as gt ccrh Xwhole program Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 375 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Generated code control The generated code control options are as follows Xpack Xbit_order Xpass_source Xswitch Xreg_mode Xreserve_r2 Xep Xfloat Xcall_jump Xfar_jump Xdiv Xcheck_div_ov Xuse_fmaf Xunordered_cmpf Xmulti_level Xpatch Xpack This option performs the structure packing Specification format
493. specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Macro undefinition Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the U option of the ccrh command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 227 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Output C source comments to preprocessed file APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to output the comments of the C source to the preprocessed file This correspond s to the Xpreprocess option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes P in the Output preprocessed source file property in the Output Fi e category is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xpreproce
494. sponds to the Xcommon option of the ccrh command Default Yes RH850 architecture common Xcommon rh850 How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes RH850 architecture The result is the same as when common Yes V850E3V5 architecture common Xcommon rh850 Xcommon v850e3v5 is specified Yes V850E3V5 architecture Outputs the object file compatible with models common having the V850E3V5 instruction set Xcommon v850e3v5 architecture R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 134 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify CPU core Specify the CPU core This corresponds to the Xcpu option of the ccrh command Default Object for G3M Xcpu g3m How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Object for G3M Generates an object for G3M Xcpu g3m Object for G3K Xcpu g3k Generates an object for G3K Output cross reference Select whether to output the cross reference information to a file information The file is output to the folder specified in the Output folder property in the Output File category from the Link Options tab The file is output under the file name specified in the Output file name property with the extension replaced by cref However if the Object file name property in the Output File category from the Individual Compile Options tab is specified the file is output under th
495. ss comment Outputs the comments of the C source to the preprocessed file No Does not output the comments of the C source to the preprocessed file Output line number information to preprocessed file 5 C Language Select whether t This correspond o output the line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file s to the Xpreprocess option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes P in the Output preprocessed source file property in the Output Fi e category is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xpreprocess line Outputs the line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file No Does not output the line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file The detailed information on C language is displayed and the configuration can be changed Compile strictly according to ANSI standards Select whether to process as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard and output an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard This correspond Default s to the Xansi option of the ccrh command Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xansi Processes as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI stan
496. ssembler symbol describe as gt asrh Dsample 256 Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 410 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE U This option deletes the assembler symbol definition by the D option Specification format Uname name Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option deletes the definition of assembler symbol name by the D option An error will occur if name is omitted This option cannot delete the definition by describing name SET def This option can be specified more than once If both this option and D option are specified for the same assembler symbol the option specified last will be valid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category Example of use To delete the definition of assembler symbol test by the D option describe as gt asrh Utest Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 411 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE This option specifies the folder to search include files Specification format Ipath path Interpretation when omitted The include file is searched from the standard inc
497. struction in the Output Code category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Use 32 bit branch instruction in the Output Code category Example of use To assume that all jarl and jr instructions described in the source are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and perform assembling describe as gt asrh Xasm_far_ jump Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 417 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error output control The error output control option is as follows Xerror_file Xerror_file This option outputs error messages to a file Specification format Xerror_ file file Interpretation when omitted Error messages are output to only the standard error output Detailed description This option outputs error messages to the standard error output and file file If file already exists it will be overwritten An error will occur if file is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Individual Assemble Options tab Output error message file Error message file output folder Error message file name in the Error Output category Example of use To output error messages to the standard error output and file err describe as gt asrh Xerror_file err Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 418 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 0
498. subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or systems manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or
499. supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LinkedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under link processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after link processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is
500. t Restriction DefaultBuild Runs a build with the default build mode that is set when a new project is created Build mode that is added Runs a build with the build mode that is added to to the project the project other than DefaultBuild 2 Output File Type and Path The detailed information on output file types and paths is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output file type Select the type of the file to be generated during a build The file type set here will be the debug target For other than library projects only Execute Module Load Module File and Execute Module Hex File are displayed For the library project only Library is displayed Default For other than the library project Execute Module Load Module File For the library project Library How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Execute Module Load Generates a load module file during a build Module File The load module file will be the debug target Execute Module Hex File Generates a hex file during a build The hex file will be the debug target This item is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property in the Output File category from the Hex Output Options tab is selected Library Generates a library file during a build Output common object Specify the output of an object file common to the various devices file for various devices This corre
501. t This is expressed in a hexadecimal number Section size The section size is output byte This is expressed in a hexadecimal number Section alignment size The section alignment size is output 3 2 5 Total section size When the show total_size option is specified the total sizes of RAM ROM and program sections are output The output example of the total section size is shown below Total Section Size RAMDATA SECTION 00000660 Byte s 1 ROMDATA SECTION 00000174 Byte s 2 PROGRAM SECTION 000016d6 Byte s 3 Total size of RAM data sections The total size of RAM data sections is output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 88 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Number Description Total size of ROM data sections The total size of ROM data sections is output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number Total size of program sections The total size of program sections is output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number 3 2 6 Symbol information When the show symbol option is specified the external defined symbol or static internal defined symbol address size type and whether optimization is applied are output in the order of address When the show reference option is specified the reference count of each symbol is also output The output example of the symbol information is shown
502. t 0E Fixed at 0000 File name eight characters file format three characters in most cases Checksum Newline R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 106 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 6 3 S1 record This indicates the value of the code Description 1 Fixed at S1 2 Record length 3 Load address 16 bits 0x0 to OxFFFF 4 Code Each byte of code is expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number 5 Checksum 6 Newline 3 6 4 S2 record This indicates the value of the code Description Fixed at S2 Record length Load address 24 bits 0x0 to OxFFFFFF Code Each byte of code is expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number Checksum Newline 3 6 5 S3 record This indicates the value of the code R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 107 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Number Description 3 Load address 32 bits 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF 4 Code Each byte of code is expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number 5 Checksum 6 Newline 3 6 6 S7 record This indicates the entry point address XX YYYYYYYY SS NL 4 5 S7 1 2 3 Number Description 1 Fixed at S7 Record length Entry point address 32 bits 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Checksum 4 5 Newline 3 6 7 S8 record This indicates the entry
503. t area Output padding data Specify the hexadecimal value to fill the vacant area This corresponds to the SPace option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes Specification value SPace lt Numerical value gt in the Fill unused areas in the output ranges with the value property is selected Default FF How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 0 to FFFFFFFF hexadecimal number Specify byte count for data record Select whether to specify the maximum byte count for a data record This corresponds to the BYte_count option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Intel HEX file FOrm Hexadecimal in the Hex file format property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes BYte_count Specifies the maximum byte count for a data record No Specifies OxFF as the maximum byte count for a data record R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 203 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Maximum byte count for Specify the maximum byte count for a data record data record This corresponds to the BYte_count option of the rlink command This property is displayed only when Yes BYte_count in the Specify byte count for data record property is selected Default FF How to change Directly enter to the text box Rest
504. t error messages to the standard error output and file err describe as gt ccrh Xerror_file err Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 395 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Warning message output control The warning message output control options are as follows Xno_warning Xno_warning This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Specification format Xno_warning num num Xno_warning num1 num2 Interpretation when omitted All warning messages are output Detailed description This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Specify the error numbers as num num1 and num2 If the error number that does not exist it will be ignored An error will occur if num num1 or num2 is omitted If num1 num2 is specified it is assumed that error numbers within the range have been specified The error number specified by this option is the rightmost 5 digits of the 7 digit number following the W See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Message for error numbers This option controls the warning messages of the compiler and assembler and does not control the messages of the optimizing linker This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Undisplayed warning message in the Warning Message
505. t from the drop down list Restriction Yes MAp Outputs an external symbol allocation information file No Does not output an external symbol allocation information file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 184 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Input File The detailed information on input files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Object file Specify the object files Specify in the format of ibrary module with one entry name per line The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder This corresponds to the Input option of the rlink command The object file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Object file number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Ed
506. t name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder This corresponds to the Binary option of the rlink command The binary file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Binary file number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1024 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Symbol definition Define the symbols Specify in the format of symbol name symbol name or symbol name numerical value with one entry name per line Specify the numerical value in hexadecimal This corresponds to the DEFine option of the rlink command The symbol name is displayed as the subproperty Default Symbol definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 4 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 186 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder Specify the output folder The following placeholders are suppo
507. t the link order specification file and click the Open button The description order of the file names are acquired from the selected link order specification file and then they are reflected in File in the Link Order dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 64 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 91 Link Order Dialog Box After Setting Link Order Link Order file03 obj library02 lib file02 obj library01 lib library03 lib Cautions 1 The file that is described in the link order specification file and is not added to the project is not displayed If the corresponding file exists the list of the file names will be displayed in the Output panel 2 The file that is added to the project and is not described in the link order specification file is displayed in the end of File 3 Ifa file with the same name exists check the location of the file in the popup display it will appear when you hover the mouse cursor over the file name To change the link order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the file names 3 Set the file link order Click the OK button in the Link Order dialog box to set the input order of the files to the linker 2 11 3 Change the build order of subprojects Builds are run in the order of subproject main project but when there are multiple subprojects added the build order of subprojects is their display order on the proj
508. t when the S option is specified Source file described in assembly language This is created by the user Header file Object file Assemble list fileNote 2 File referred by source files This file is described in C language or assembly language This is created by the user The extension is free but the following is recommended include directive h include control instruction inc ELF format file including machine language information relocation information relating to machine language allocation addresses and symbol information List file which has information from the assemble result This file is output when the Xasm_option Xprn_path option is specified Library file ELF format file in which two or more object files are included This file is output when the Xlk_option form library option is specified Load module file ELF format file of the object code of the link result This is the input file when a hex file is output This file is output when the Xlk_option form absolute option is specified If you specify the XIk_option option but not the form option the command assumes that the above option has been specified Relocatable file Relocatable object file This file is output when the Xlk_option form relocate option is specified Intel HEX fileNote 2 Load module file converted into the Intel HEX format This file is output when the Xlk_option form hexadecimal
509. tab Merge string literals in the Optimization Details category Example of use When the same string literals exist in the source file to merge them and allocate to the one area describe as gt ccrh Xmerge_ string Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 372 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xalias This option performs optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by the pointer Specification format Interpretation when omitted Optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by the pointer based on the ANSI standard is not performed Detailed description This option specifies whether to perform optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by the pointer based on the ANSI standard The items that can be specified as va ue are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified ansi Optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by the pointer based on the ANSI standard is performed noansi Optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by the pointer based on the ANSI standard is not performed An error will occur if value is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Perform optimization considering type of data indicated by pointer in
510. tandard Library function Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Use Non local jump Library function E Frequently Used Options for Hex Output Output hex file Hex file format Output folder Output file name Division output file Register Mode Error Output DefaultBuild Execute Module Load Module File Yes RH850 architecture common common rh850 Object for G3M cpu g3m No BuildModeN ame Default Optimization None Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Using libraries 0 BuildModeN ame ProjectName abs Yes Yes LIBrary libe Yes LIBrary libm Yes LIBrary libmf No Yes Motorola S record file FOrm Stype BuildModeN ame ProjectName mot Division output file O Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build Compile Options Link Options Hex Output Options R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 133 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Build Mode The detailed information on the build mode is displayed and the configuration can be changed Build mode Select the build mode to be used during a build Note that this property is not applied to Reset All to Default from the context menu Default DefaultBuild How to change Select from the drop down lis
511. te From the Link Options tab Enable information message output in the Message category From the Create Library Options tab Enable information message output in the Message category Example of use To output information messages describe as gt rlink a obj b obj message R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 441 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE NOMessage This option suppresses the output of information messages Specification format NOMessage num num num num Interpretation when omitted The output of information messages is suppressed Detailed description This option suppresses the output of information messages If message number num is specified the output of the message with the specified number is suppressed Also a range of message numbers can be specified using a hyphen Specify the 4 digit number that is output after the component number 05 and the phase of occurrence 6 as num for example specify 0004 for message number M0560004 0 at the beginning of the 4 digit number can be omitted for example specify 4 for message number M0560004 Ifa number of a warning or error type message is specified the output of the message is suppressed assuming that change_message option has changed the specified message to the information type This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the
512. te V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Perform optimization Select whether to perform optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by considering type of data the pointer based on the ANSI standard indicated by pointer This corresponds to the Xalias option of the cerh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Performs optimization with consideration for the type of the Xalias ansi data indicated by the pointer In general this option improves the object performance but the execution result may differ from the case when No is selected No Does not perform optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by the pointer Perform inline expansion Selsect whether to perform inline expansion of functions strcpy stremp mMemcpy of strcpy stremp and memset calls with regarding the alignment conditions of the array including character memcpy memset strings and the structure as 4 bytes This improves the execution speed of the program to be generated but it increases the code size This corresponds to the Xinline_strcpy option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when No in the Structure packing property in the Output Code category is selected Default How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Performs inline expansion of functions strcpy Xinline_st
513. tems are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Section Settings dialog box select an address in the address section area and then click the Add or Modify button Description of each area 1 Address Specify the start address of the section Directly enter the address in the text box or select from the button The range that can be specified for the value is 0 to FFFFFFFF hexadecimal number default 0 Function buttons Button Function When opening from the Add button in the Section Settings dialog box Closes this dialog box and adds the specified address to an appropriate location in the address section area in the Section Settings dialog box the section column remains empty When opening from the Modify button in the Section Settings dialog box Closes this dialog box and moves the section group an address and the sections allocated to the address to an appropriate location in the address section area in the Section Settings dialog box Cancel Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 282 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Unassigned Section dialog box This dialog box is used to delete sections Figure A 34 Unassigned Section Dialog Box Unassigned Section Select secti
514. th ProjectDir lt Description a Absolute path of the active projec Active project name Build mode name Absolute path of the main project Main project name Absolute path of the CubeSuite Absolute path of the project folder y gt ee SS EE 2tENESAS Page 269 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category and Using libraries in the Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Compile Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category and Rule check exclusion file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category From the Assemble Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Link Options tab Using libraries in the Library category From the Create Library Options tab Using libraries in the Library category From the Individual Compile Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category and Rule check exclusion file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category From the Individual Assemble
515. th of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The specified include path is searched with higher priority than the standard include file folder of CC RH The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CC RH is searched This corresponds to the l option of the ccrh command The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 176 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE System include paths Change the specified order of the include
516. th or a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the current folder When a parameter includes a space such as a path name enclose the parameter in a pair of double quotation marks The types and explanations for options are shown below Table B 2 Compile Options Classification Description Version help display This option displays the version information of ccrh specification This option displays the descriptions of ccrh options Output file This option specifies the output file name specification Xobj_path This option specifies the folder to save an object file generated during compilation Xasm_path This option specifies the folder to save an assembly source file generated during compilation Xprep_path This option specifies the folder to save the preprocessed file Source debugging g This option outputs information for source debugging control Device specification Xcommon This option specifies that an object file common to the various devices is generated Xcpu This option specifies that an object for the specified core is generated Processing interrupt This option executes only preprocess processing for the input file specification This option does not execute processing after assembling This option does not execute processing after linking Preprocessor control This option defines preprocessor macros and assembler symbols This
517. the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Perform optimization considering type of data indicated by pointer in the Optimization Details category Example of use To perform optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by the pointer based on the ANSI standard describe as gt ccrh Xalias ansi Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 373 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xmerge_files This option merges two or more C source files and compiles them Specification format Interpretation when omitted Compilation is performed at the input file level without merging Detailed description This option merges two or more C source files and compiles them And then it outputs one file If the o option is specified then the specified file name is used for the output file If the o option is not specified then the file name is in accordance with the interpretation of the o option being omitted for the initially specified C source file If one C source file is input and if this option is specified together with the P option this option will be invalid If this option is specified at the same time as the S or c option then for the 2nd and subsequent C source files that are specified an empty file is output in accordance with the interpretation that the o option was omitted
518. the Output file name property by directly entering to the text box If the extension is omitted it is automatically added according to the selection in the Output file format property When User libraries FOrm Library U is selected lib When System libraries FOrm Library S is selected lib When Relocatable file FOrm Relocate is selected rel Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name ProjectName lib is set by default R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 56 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 Set Build Options Separately Build options are set at the project or file level Project level See 2 10 1 Set build options at the project level File level See 2 10 2 Set build options at the file level 2 10 1 Set build options at the project level To set options for build options for the project main project or subproject select the Build tool node on the project tree to display the Property panel Select the phase tab and set build options by setting the necessary properties Compile phase Compile Options tab Assemble phase Assemble Options tab Link phase Link Options tab Hex output phase Hex Output Options tab Create library phase Create Li
519. the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Code Size Precedence Osize or Speed Precedence Ospeed in the Level of optimization property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes To adjust the level of optimization None Performs optimization according to the Level of optimization property Yes Only specified functions Oinline 1 Performs inline expansion at the location calling the function for which pragma inline is specified Yes Auto detect Oinline 2 Distinguishes the function that is the target of inline expansion automatically and expands it Yes Auto detect without code size increase Oinline 3 Distinguishes the function that is the target of inline expansion automatically and expands it while minimizing the increase in code size No Oinline 0 Suppresses all inline expansion including the function for which pragma inline is specified Specify the maximum increasing rate of the code size up to which inline expansion is performed Example When 100 is specified inline expansion will be applied until the code size increases by 100 becomes twice the initial size This corresponds to the Oinline_size option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Auto detect Oinline 2 in the Perform inline expansion property is selected
520. the file extension see v Running the editor Open with Internal Editor Opens the selected file with the Editor panel Open with Selected Application Opens the Open with Program dialog box to open the selected file with the designated application Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the selected file with Explorer Displays the context menu in Windows Explorer corresponding to the selected file Windows Explorer Menu Add Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node at the same level as the selected file You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Remo
521. the function name label name in an assembly source by prefixing _ to that in C language However the following formats can be specified instead of function names all function All functions are called all interrupt All interrupt functions are called Rutime routines can be specified instead of functions In this case describe the runtime routine name as is as the function name A space and tab can be inserted before and after function names R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 386 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Only ASCII characters can be used After the space characters at the beginning of a line a non space character string until the next space character or the end of the line is treated as a function name and the rest of the line from the space character to the end of the line is ignored Comments cannot be inserted Up to 1023 characters can be specified per line including a space and tab The example when specifying functions is shown below _func_led _func_beep _func_motor _func_switch Example of use To generate the code that uses jmp directive to branch to the function specified in func fjp describe as R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 387 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xdiv This option generates the div and divu instructions for division Specification for
522. the level of optimization None Performs optimization according to the Level of optimization property Yes Otail_call on Gives precedence to using jr instructions in the place of jarl instructions when the function ends with a function call The code size can be reduced by removing the store restore instructions for Ip However some debug functions cannot be used No Otail_call off Uses jarl instructions when the function ends with a function call Optimize accesses to external variables Select whether to optimize accesses to external variables This correspond s to the Osmap and Omap options of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Optimizes the inner module Osmap Sets a base address for external or static variables defined in the file to be compiled and generates code that accesses these relative to the base address Yes Optimizes the inter module Omap Generates an external symbol allocation information file According to the information recompilation is done to generate code that performs access to external or static variables relative to the base address This item is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected If Yes in the Build simultaneously property is
523. the name of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from C header file h C header file default C source file c C source file All files All the formats Function buttons Sets the designated file to the area that this dialog box is called from Closes this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 310 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify Using Library File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the library file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 48 Specify Using Library File Dialog Box Specify Using Library File 1 Look in sample B DefaultBuild 4 Qsample_lib sub My Recent Documents user lib 3 Eaa Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel after selecting the following properties open the Path Edit dialog box by clicking the button From the Common Options tab Using libraries in the Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Link Options tab Using libraries in the Library category From the Create Library Options tab Using libraries i
524. the order that the files are registered to the project By changing the display order of the paths you can set the specified order of the paths to the compiler To change the display order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the path names Remarks 1 Move the mouse cursor over a file name to display a tooltip with the absolute path of that file 2 Newly added system include paths are added next to the last path of the list 3 When the path names are dragged and dropped the multiple path names which are next to each other can be selected together b Button R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 273 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Moves the selected path to down Remark Note that above buttons are disabled when any path is not selected Function buttons Button Function Sets the specified order of the paths to the compiler as the display order in the Path list dis play area and closes this dialog box Cancels the specified order of the paths and closes the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 274 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify Rule Number dialog box This dialog box is used to select the number of the MISRA C 2004 rule and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 28 Specify Rule Number Dialog Box Specify Rule Number
525. the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 2tENESAS Page 136 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE System include paths Change the specified order of the include paths which the system set during compiling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the option of the ccrh command The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restr
526. ther item is specified auto Each enumerated type is handled as the smallest integer type capable of expressing all the enumerators in that type An error will occur if string is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Enumeration type in the C Language category Example of use To handle each enumerated type as the smallest integer type capable of expressing all the enumerators in that type describe as gt ccrh Xenum_type auto Xcommon v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 356 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xvolatile This option specifies external variables as volatile Specification format Xvolatile Interpretation when omitted Only the volatile qualified variables are handled as if they were volatile declared Detailed description This option handles all external variables as if they were volatile declared The access count and access order for external variables are exactly the same as those described in the C source file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Handle external variables as if they are volatile qualified in the C Language category From the Individual Compile Options tab Handle external variables as if they are volatile qualified in the C Language category Example o
527. timization with the execution speed precedence select Speed Precedence Ospeed in the Optimization Level property in the Optimization category Figure 2 30 Level of optimization Property Execution Speed Precedence Level of optimization Speed Precedence O speed Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Optimization Level property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 3 Add an include path Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel The include path setting is made with the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 31 Additional include paths Property Include files at head of compiling units Include files at head of compiling units 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 If you click the button the Path Edit dialog box will open R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 31 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 32 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line Fe Aine ProjectDir Browse C Permit non existent path CO Include subfolders automatically Placeholder Placeholder Value ActiveProjectDir D work sample ActiveProjectName sample BuildModeName DefaultBuild MainProjectDir D work sample Main
528. tion Such information is generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option corresponds to the g optio Common Options Compile Options A Ipt iA Link Options _ Hex Output Options Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information Select whether to generate the debug information It is possible to perform source debugging with the debugger by outputting information for source debugging to the output file This corresponds to the g option of the ccrh command Default Yes g How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes g Generates the debug information No Does not generate the debug information R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 175 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Preprocess The detailed information on preprocessing is displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during assembling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute pa
529. tion Up to 247 characters 9 Assemble List The detailed information on the assemble list is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xprn_path option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path Outputs the assemble list file No Does not output the assemble list file R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 168 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for Specify the folder which the assemble list file is output assemble list file The assemble list file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xasm_option Xprn_path option of the ccrh command This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default BuildModeNa
530. to the following processing will be invalid At this time a warning will be output Xcpu g3k The Xfloat option will be invalid At this time a warning will be output If options are specified by the following combinations the option specified last will be valid with outputting a warning P S c D U When their symbol names are same Onothing Odefault Osize Ospeed Depending on the order of specified options the following options will be invalid Oitem t that is specified before Onothing Odefault Osize or Ospeed Note Ojtem Ounroll Oinline Oinline_size Odelete_static_func Opipeline Otail_call Omap Osmap B 6 2 Incompatible features If options are specified by the following combinations an error will occur Omap Xep fix Osmap Xep fix B 6 3 Dependencies The behavior of the following options varies depending on what other options are specified Xpreprocess This option will be invalid if the P option is not specified at the same time At this time a warning will not be output If the P S or c option is specified at the same time then the generated file types will be a preprocessed file assembly source file or object file If the O option is specified at the same time debug information may not be correct Oinline If this option is specified at the same time with the Xmerge_files option inline expansion may be performed between files
531. tput file 0 Use object uniting function No Select Intel HEX file FOrm Hexadecimal or Motorola S record file FOrm Stype in the Hex file format property in the Hex Format category Figure 2 75 Hex file format Property Motorola S record file FOrm Stype Unity record size No Output 9 record at the end No Caution The same format should be selected in the boot loader project and all application projects 2 Specify combining into a hex file Specify combining into a hex file in the boot loader project Select Yes in the Use object uniting function property in the Output File category Figure 2 76 Use object uniting function Property E Output File Output hex file Yes Output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectName mot ivisi ile Division out iel D Output folder for united ZbuldModeN ame _merged The destination where the combined hex file is to be output can be specified in Output folder for united hex file property default BuildModeName _merged The name in the Output file name property is used as the combined file name R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 54 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 Set Create Library Options To set options for the librarian select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various create library options by setting
532. tree is not saved in the project file k Displaying the editing file When the file added to the project is edited in the Editor panel exclude the dependency files and the file is not saved once the file name is followed by If the file is saved will be deleted The file that is saved ej main c The file that is not saved after editing e main c I Displaying the source file in boldface that the individual build option is set The source file icon whose option is different from the project general options individual compile options or individual assemble options is changed to the different one from the normal icon R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 120 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The file with project general options The file with the individual build options m Highlighting the file with the read only attribute The read only file added to the project is displayed in italic The file without the read only attribute The file with the read only attribute n Highlighting the file that does not exist The file that is added to the project but does not exist is grayed out and its icon is dimmed The file that exists c_ main c The file that does not exist E main c 0 Highlighting the build target file lt 1 gt The file which an error occurred during building rapid building rebuilding compiling or assembling is highlighted as the ex
533. ts with a character from A to F defined symbols are searched first and if corresponding symbol is not found the value is interpreted as an address Values starting with 0 are always interpreted as addresses If the specified symbol name is a C variable name add _ at the head of the definition name in the program This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Specify execution start address Execution start address in the Output Code category Example of use To specify main function in C as the execution start address describe as gt rlink entry _main a obj b obj To specify 0x100 as the execution start address describe as gt rlink entry 100 a obj b obj Remark If the form object relocate liorary option or strip option is specified this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 429 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output control The output control options are as follows FOrm DEBug NODEBug RECord ROm OUtput MAp SPace Message NOMessage MSg_unused BYte_count PADDING OVERRUN_FETCH FOrm This option specifies the output format Specification format FOrm format Interpretation when omitted A load module file is output It is the same result as when the form absolute option is specified Detail
534. ty supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name Remark You can also change the option in the same way with the Output file name property in the Frequently Used Options for Create Library category on the Common Options tab If the Output file format property is changed the following message dialog box will open Figure 2 21 Message Dialog Box Question Q0291001 p Do you change a file extension When Yes is selected in the dialog box the extension of the output file name is changed according to the format selected in the Output file format property Figure 2 22 Output file format and Output file name Property Output file name test rel R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 26 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 2 Output an assemble list The assemble list the code of the assemble result is output to the assemble list file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To output the assemble list file select Yes Xasm_option Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category Figure 2 23 Output assemble list file Property Output folder far assemble list file BuildModeNamex When outputting the assem
535. ubcommand file sub txt gt Remark If the form object or extract option is specified this option will be invalid If an Intel HEX file is specified as an input file only the form hexadecimal option can be specified If a Motorola S record file is specified only the form stype option can be specified If the output file name is not specified it will be first input file name_combine extension If the input file is a mot the output file will be a_combine mot R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 424 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE LIBrary This option specifies the input library file Specification format LIBrary file file Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option specifies input library file file If multiple files are specified delimit them with a comma Wildcard characters can also be used The character strings specified with wildcard characters are expanded in alphabetical order Expansion of numerical values precedes that of alphabetic characters Uppercase characters are expanded before lowercase characters If the extension is omitted from the input file specification it is assumed that lib has been specified If this option and the form library or extract option are specified at the same time the specified library file is input as the target library to be edited Otherwise undefined sym
536. ubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Include files at head of compiling units in the Preprocess category From the Individual Compile Options tab Include files at head of compiling units in the Preprocess category Example of use To include file sample h at the top of the compilation unit describe as gt ccrh main c Xpreinclude sample h Xcommon v850e3v5 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 351 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xpreprocess This option controls outputting the result of preprocessing Specification format Xpreprocess string string Interpretation when omitted The comments and line number information of the C source are not output to the preprocessed file Detailed description This option outputs the comments and line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file This option is valid only when the P option is specified If the P option is not specified this option will be ignored The items that can be specified as string are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified comment Outputs the comments of the C source Note line Outputs line number information Note The format of the line number information is shown below line line number file name line number is a decimal number and the maximum value is the maximum number of unsigned int In the full path
537. ubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xreserve_r2 This option reserves the r2 register Specification format Xreserve r2 Interpretation when omitted The compiler uses the r2 register without reserving it Detailed description This option reserves the r2 register and generates code that does not use this register by the compiler Example of use To reserve the r2 register and generates code that does not use this register by the compiler describe as gt asrh Xreserve_ r2 Xcommon v850e3v5 main asm R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 415 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xep This option specifies how to handle the ep register Specification format Interpretation when omitted The ep register is treated as a register guaranteeing the value before and after the function call Detailed description This option specifies how to handle the ep register The items that can be specified as mode are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Fixes the value of the ep register for the entire project Specify this parameter when any of the following attribute strings in a pragma section in the project is used ep_auto ep_disp4 ep_disp5 ep_disp7 ep_disp8 ep_disp16 ep_disp23 callee Treats the ep register as a register guaranteeing the value before and after the function call Specify this parameter
538. uct sum operation instructions fmaf s fmsf s fnmaf s and operation instruction fnmsf s for single precision floating point product sum operations This corresponds to the Xuse_fmaf option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Generates product sum operation instructions for single Xuse_fmaf precision floating point product sum operations Specifying this option will accelerate the execution speed but change the operation precision Does not generate product sum operation instructions R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 165 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Check invalid exception in cmpf instruction APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to generate code by using the comparison condition for generating an invalid operation exception when any of the comparison values is a not a number in floating point comparison This corresponds to the Xunordered_cmpf option of the ccrh command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Generates code by using the comparison condition Xunordered_cmpf for generating an invalid operation exception when any of the comparison values is a not a number in floating point comparison No Does not detect invalid operation exceptions in floating point comparison Use 32 bit branch instruction Select whether to use the far jum
539. unction in the Library category From the Create Library Options tab Using libraries System libraries Use standard libraries Use Standard Library function Use Mathematical Library Double precision function Use Mathematical Library Single precision function Use Non local jump Library function in the Library category R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 425 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To input a lib and b lib describe as rlink main obj library a lib b To input all lib files beginning with c describe as rlink main obj library c 1lib R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 426 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Binary This option specifies the input binary file Specification format Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option specifies input binary file file If multiple files are specified delimit them with a comma If the extension is omitted from the input file specification it is assumed that bin has been specified Input binary data is allocated as the data of specified section section Specify the section address by the start option An error will occur if section is omitted When symbol symbol is specified it can be linked as a defined symbol For a variable name referenced by a C program add _
540. units 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 To change the include paths you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 32 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties automatically Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Additional include paths property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 4 Set a macro definition Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel The macro definition setting is made with the Macro definition property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 34 Macro definition Property E Preprocess E Additional include paths E System include pais Additional include paths 0 5 yeien include patra If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 35 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Text TEST 1 TIME 10 Enter the macro definition in Text in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line You can specify up to 256 characters per line up to 256 lines The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value If you click th
541. urce code is checked against the rules with the numbers that are not specified by num among the rules which are supported required None The source code is checked against the rules of the required type among the rules which are supported required_add num nun The source code is checked against the rules of the required type and the rules with the numbers specified by num among the rules which are supported required_remove num nun The source code is checked against the rules of the required type except for the rules with the numbers specified by num among the rules which are supported The source code is checked against the rules with the numbers described in specified file file among the rules which are supported Specify one rule number per one line in the file The items that can be specified as num are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified 2 22 3 4 1 4 2 5 25 35 45 55 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 46 5 TA 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 11 8 12 9 19 29 3 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 12 1 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 12 11 12 12 12 13 R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 360 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 15 1 15 3 15 4 15 5 16 1 16 3 16 5 16 6 16 9 17 5 18 1 18 4 19 3 19 6 19 7 19 8 19 11 19 13 19 14 19 15 20 4 20 5 20 6 20 7 20 8 2
542. userD1 text A user02 text A OxFEBF8200 userl1 text A userl2 text A OxFEBF8300 user0l data A user02 data A Click the OK button The specified ROM sections and RAM sections overlaid sections will be displayed in the text boxes Figure 2 65 Section start address Property After Setting Sections Section alignment Section alignment 0 ROM to RAM mapped section ROM to RAM mapped section 10 3 Run a build of the project Run a build of the project A load module file to use the overlaid section selection function is generated R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 49 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 Set Hex Output Options To set options for the hex output phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various hex output options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure 2 66 Property Panel Hex Output Options Tab Property Ay CC RH Property Output File Output hex file Yes Output folder BuildModeName Output file name ProjectName mot Division output file Division output file 0 E Hex Format Hex file format Motorola S record file FOrm Stype Unify record size No Output 9 record at the end No Others Output hex file Selects whether to output a hex file This option corresponds t
543. ut filel abs file2 abs file3 abs strip Remark If the form object relocate hexadecimal stype binary option is specified this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 467 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE CHange_message This option changes the type of information warning and error messages Specification format Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option changes type level of information warning and error messages The execution continuation or abort at the message output The items that can be specified as evel are shown below Information Information Warning Warning Error Error If message number num is specified the type of the message with the specified number is changed Also a range of message numbers can be specified using a hyphen Specify the 4 digit number that is output after the component number 05 and the phase of occurrence 6 as num for example specify 2310 for message number E0562310 If the specification of a message number is omitted the types of all messages are changed to the specified one This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Change warning message to information message Number of warning message Change information message to warning message Number of information message Ch
544. utput c rel To extract module a from lib lib and output as an object file describe as gt rlink library lib lib extract a form object To extract module a from lib lib and output library file exta lib describe as gt rlink library lib lib extract a form library output exta To extract module a from lib lib and output relocatable file a rel describe as gt rlink library lib lib extract a form relocate R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 432 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE DEBug This option outputs debug information to the output file Specification format DEBug Interpretation when omitted The debug information is output to the output file It is the same result as when the debug option is specified Detailed description This option outputs debug information to the output file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Output debug information in the Debug Information category From the Create Library Options tab Output debug information in the Debug Information category Example of use To output debug information to the output file describe as gt rlink a obj b obj debug output c abs Remark If the form object library hexadecimal stype binary strip option or extract option is specified this option will be invalid If two or
545. utputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the program name under execution ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before link processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Default Commands executed before link processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 197 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after link processing after link processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are
546. utputs debug information output file DEBug No Does not output debug information Delete local symbol Select whether to delete local symbol name information name information This corresponds to the Hide option of the rlink command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Hide Deletes information of the local symbol name No Does not delete information of the local symbol name 2 Input File The detailed information on input files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Object file Specify the object files Specify in the format of ibrary module with one entry name per line The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder This corresponds to the Input option of the rlink command T
547. v850e3v5 main c R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 346 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Preprocessor control The preprocessor control options are as follows Xpreinclude Xpreprocess D This option defines preprocessor macros and assembler symbols Specification format Dname def name def Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option defines name as a preprocessor macro or user defined symbol of the assembler This is equivalent to adding define name def or SET name def only assembly source program at the beginning of the source program If name contains characters that are allowed in an assembler symbol but which cannot be used in a preprocessor macro and a warning will be output and it is defined as an assembler symbol only This option can be used to redefine C language macros that have been defined already LINE _ FILE DATE _TIME__ and__ CCRH __ except for D__ CCRH__ 1 An error will occur if these are redefined when the input file is a C source file An error will occur if name is omitted If def is omitted defis regarded as 1 This option can be specified more than once If both this option and U option are specified for the same preprocessor macro and assembler symbol the option specified last will be valid This option is equivalent to the following property
548. vacant areas due to overrun fetch List output LISt This option outputs the list file SHow R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 This option specifies information that is output to the list file 7tENESAS Page 421 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 Classification Section specification STARt APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description This option specifies the start address of the section FSymbol This option outputs external defined symbols to the symbol address file ALIGNED_SECTION This option changes the number of alignment of the section to 16 bytes Verify specification CPu This option checks the consistency of the address to which the section is allocated Subcommand file specification SUbcommand This option specifies options with a subcommand file Other S9 This option outputs the S9 record at the end STACk This option outputs the stack information file COmpress This option compresses the debug information NOCOmpress This option does not compress the debug information MEMory This option specifies the memory size occupied during linking REName This option changes an external symbol name or a section name DELete This option deletes an external symbol name or a library module REPlace This option replaces library modules EXTract This option extracts library modules
549. ve from Project Removes the selected file from the project The file itself is not deleted from the file system Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copy Copies the selected file to the clipboard When the file name is in editing the selected characters are copied to the clipboard Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected file The actual file is also renamed When the selected file is added to other project that file name is also changed Change Extension Opens a message dialog box to confirm whether to change the file extension Clicking on the Yes button in the dialog box will open the Character Siring Input dialog box in which the extension of the selected file can be changed When multiple files are selected they are changed at one time Note that this menu is disabled when a file that cannot be renamed or removed from the project is selected and when the build tool is in operation Property Displays the selected file s property on the Property panel 6 When the Build tool generated files node is selected Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 127 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 7 When a category node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Ope
550. version of this product or the current project 3 The quality report file is output with the file name QuarityReport project name build mode name text to the project folder of each project If a file having the same name exists it will be overwritten It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node 5 Enable Break Sound Beeps when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break Does not beep when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break default R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 297 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Observe downloaded load module files changing Observes the load module file downloaded to the debug tool for changes When there is a change a message dialog box confirming whether to execute the download will be displayed Does not observe the load module file downloaded to the debug tool for changes default 7 Add source files automatically for the Debug Only project only In a debug dedicated project when downloading a load module file into the debug tool source files are automatically added to the project tree default In a debug dedicated project when downloading a load module file into the debug tool source files are not automatically added to the project tree Caution This function is onl
551. vironment User s Manual RH850 Coding for details about register modes R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 34 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 Set Assemble Options To set options for the assemble phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various assemble options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 38 Property Panel Assemble Options Tab Property 4 CC RH Property E Debug nformaton Add debug information Yes g El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 Character Encoding Output Code Assemble List Others Add debug information Specifies whether to generate the debug information Such information is generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option corresponds to the g optio Common Options Compile Options Asse ble Optio si Link Options Hex Output Options Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab Caution This tab is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is sel
552. were output in the message volatile qualified variables The sizes of reads and writes may differ between compilers This compiler may access bit fields with a volatile decorator as a smaller size than the declared type but the SH compiler will access them as the size of the declared type Integer promotion of binary operations The result of binary operation such as addition subtraction multiplication division or comparison using unsigned int type and long type operands may differ from that obtained by using the SH compiler The SH compiler calculates this operation in signed long if the strict_ansi option is not specified This compiler calculates this operation after converting the operands to the unsigned int type Types of integer constants exceeding type signed long The SH compiler makes values in the range that can be expressed as type unsigned long into type signed long long This compiler makes values in the range that can be expressed as type unsigned long into type unsigned long Bit field allocation The SH compiler does not allocate bits to contiguous areas when the type of a bit field differs from that of the previous bit field This compiler may allocate bits to contiguous areas according to the Xpack option setting R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 358 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE No message will be output for structure and bit field member allocation See Cub
553. wing types of symbols are hidden C source Variable or function names specified with the static qualifiers C source Label names for the goto statements Assembly source Symbol names of which external definition reference symbols are not declared The entry function name is not hidden This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Delete local symbol name information in the Debug Information category From the Create Library Options tab Delete local symbol name information in the Debug Information category Example of use To delete local symbol name information from the output file describe as gt rlink a obj b obj hide The C source example in which this option is valid is shown below R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 469 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 int gi int g2 1 const int g3 3 static int s1 static int s2 1 static const int s3 2 static int subl1 static int s1 int 11 11 11 s1 return 11 subl1 if qi 1 goto LI g2 2 return 0 Remark APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE variabl 1I hidden variabl LLL hidden variabl iLL hidden variabl LLL hidden lt The label name of the goto statement will be hidden This option is valid only when the form absolute relocate library option is specified When this option is specified with the ext
554. wn below Conflict information 1 FILE Conflict 1 00000200 00000213 samplel mot sample2 mot Number Description Overlapped combine source file name The overlapped combine source file name is output Start addresses of overlapped range data The start addresses of the overlapped range data are output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number End addresses of overlapped range data The end addresses of the overlapped range data are output This is expressed in a hexadecimal number Size of overlapped range data The size of the overlapped range data is output in byte units This is expressed in a hexadecimal number R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 95 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 4 Library List File This section explains the library list file The library list has information from the library creation result The methods for outputting the library list file are shown below 1 For CubeSuite Select the build tool node on the Project Tree panel and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel To output the library list file select Yes in the Output link map file property in the List category Specify the output destination in the Output folder property in the Output File category It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node The file name will be the project file name with
555. x is used to select the MISRA C 2004 rule file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Add Excluding File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the file that will not be checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Specify Using Library File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the library file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name Open with Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the application to open the file Select Import File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the file and import it to the area that this dialog box is called from Select Export File dialog box This dialog box is used to output the information of the area that this dialog box is called from R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 111 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This is the first window to be opened when CubeSuite is launched This window is used to control the user program execution and open panels for the build process Figure A 1 Main Window sample CubeSuite Project Tree File Edit View Project Build Debug Tool Window Help X90 a Rar AJ SS be Sa Project Tree Oo 2 a LB sample Project ON CC RH Build Tool
556. xample of use To extract module file1 from library file lib lib and output it to a file with the object file output format describe as gt rlink library lib1 lib extract filel form obj Remark If the form absolute hexadecimal stype binary option and the strip option is specified this option will be invalid When the form library option is specified library modules can be deleted When the form absolute relocate hexadecimal stype binary option is specified external symbols can be deleted R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 466 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE STRip This option deletes debug information in the load module file or library file Specification format STRip Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option deletes debug information in the load module file or library file The files before debug information is deleted are backed up in file file name abk If this option is specified one input file should correspond to one output file Example of use To delete debug information of file1 abs file2 abs and file3 abs and output these to file1 abs file2 abs and file3 abs respectively describe as The files before debug information is deleted are backed up in file1 abk file2 abk and file3 abk lt Command line gt gt rlink subcommand sub txt lt Subcommand file sub txt gt inp
557. xx xx xx fsymbol sct2 sct3 SECTION NAME sct2 public _f _ equ 0x0 public g _g equ 0x16 SECTION NAME sct3 public _main _Main equ 0x20 Remark If the form object relocate library option or strip option is specified this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 454 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ALIGNED_SECTION This option changes the number of alignment of the section to 16 bytes Specification format ALIGNED SECTION section section Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option changes the number of alignment of section section to 16 bytes This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Section alignment in the Section category Example of use To change the number of alignment of section A to 16 bytes describe as gt rlink a obj b obj aligned_section A Remark If the form object relocate library option and the extract or strip option is specified this option will be invalid R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 455 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Verify specification The verify specification option is as follows CPu CPu This option checks the consistency of the address to which the section is allocated Specification format
558. y in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Display copyright information in the Others category From the Create Library Options tab Display copyright information in the Others category Example of use To suppress the output of the copyright notice describe as gt rlink a obj b obj nologo R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 473 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE END This option executes option strings specified before this option Specification format Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option executes option strings specified before this option After link processing is terminated option strings specified before this option are input and link processing is continued Caution This option can be used only in a subcommanid file Example of use Create subcommand file test sub with the following content input a obj b obj start P C D 100 B 8000 output a abs end input a abs form stype output a mot To specify subcommand file test sub describe as gt rlink subcommand test sub Processing from 1 to 3 are executed and a abs is output Then processing from 4 to 6 are executed and a mot is output R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 474 of 485 Apr 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE EXit This option specifies the end of option specifi
559. y valid when a load module file has been added to the Download files node of the project tree When a load module file has been added in the Download File Settings tab on the Property panel of the debug tool source files are not added to the project tree 8 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2585EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Apr 01 2013 ztENESAS Page 298 of 485 CubeSuite V2 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Existing File dialog box This dialog box is used to select existing files to add to the project Figure A 42 Add Existing File Dialog Box Add Existing File 1 Look in sample B DefaultBuild EG E main c My Recent Documents 2 My Documents My Computer 3 ernie 4 vty heterork i ic source file c Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function butt
560. yrights 9 1 3 Features 10 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 11 2 1 Overview 11 2 1 1 Create a load module 11 2 1 2 Create a user library 12 2 2 Change the Build Tool Version 13 2 3 Set Build Target Files 14 2 3 1 Add a file to a project 14 2 3 2 Remove a file from a project 18 2 3 3 Remove a file from the build target 18 2 3 4 Classify a file into a category 19 2 3 5 Change the file display order 20 2 3 6 Update file dependencies 20 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File 24 2 4 1 Change the output file name 24 2 4 2 Output an assemble list 27 2 4 3 Output map information 27 2 4 4 Output library information 28 2 5 Set Compile Options 30 2 5 1 Perform optimization with the code size precedence 31 2 5 2 Perform optimization with the execution speed precedence 31 2 5 3 Add an include path 31 2 5 4 Seta macro definition 33 2 5 5 Change the register mode 34 2 6 Set Assemble Options 35 2 6 1 Add an include path 35 2 6 2 Seta macro definition 37 2 7 Set Link Options 39 2 7 1 Add a user library 40 2 7 2 Prepare for using the overlaid section selection function 41 2 8 Set Hex Output Options 50 2 8 1 Set the output of a hex file 50 2 8 2 Fill the vacant area 52 2 8 3 Combine multiple objects 54 2 9 Set Create Library Options 55 2 9 1 Set the output of a library file 55 2 10 Set Build Options Separately 57 2 10

RH850 Build - Renesas Electronics

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents